0% found this document useful (0 votes)
483 views94 pages

Computer Cousr

Copyright
© © All Rights Reserved
We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.
Available Formats
Download as DOCX, PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd
0% found this document useful (0 votes)
483 views94 pages

Computer Cousr

Copyright
© © All Rights Reserved
We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.
Available Formats
Download as DOCX, PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd
You are on page 1/ 94

COMPUTER AWARENESS SET 1 Referential integrity constraint  Action assertion 

Q.1.The metal or plastic case that holds all the Composite attribute
physical parts of the computer is the:  System Unit.
(correct)  CPU.  Mainframe.  Platform. Q.12.An applet _______  Is an interpreted program
that runs on the client  Tracks the number of
Q.2.------------- controls the way in which the visitors to a Website (correct)
computer system functions and provides a means by Subscribe To Our Youtube Channel - Click Here
which users can interact with the computer.  The 501 must do Computer awareness questions
Platform  The Operating System (correct)  More about Computer Awareness, General
Application Software  The Motherboard Knowledge, Quant, Verbal, Logic and DI on
cetking.com To join Shortcuts, Mocks, GDPI, Classes
Q.3.--------------is the science revolving around the and more on 09594441448 Cetking.com
use of Nano Structures to build devices on an  Is a compiled program that usually runs on the
extremely small scale.  Nanotechnology (correct) client  Collects data from visitors to a Website
 Micro-technology  Computer forensics 
Artificial intelligence Q.13.A ________sometimes called a boot sector
virus, executes when a computer boots up because it
Q.4.Servers are computers that provide resources to resides in the boot sector of a floppy disk orthe master
other computers connected to a  Network. (correct) boot record of a hard disk.  System virus  Trojan
 Mainframe.  Super Computer.  Client. horse virus  File virus  None of these (correct)

Q.5.Word processing, spreadsheet, and photo-editing Q.14.Which error detection method uses one's
are examples of:  Application software. (correct)  complement arithmetic?  Simply parity check 
System software.  Operating system software.  Check sum (correct)  Two-dimensional parity
Platform software. check  CRC

Q.6.Which one is not an examples of input devices : Q.15.A result of a computer virus can NOT lead to
 Scanner.  Mouse.  Keyboard.  Printer. ________ .  Disk Crash  Mother Board Crash
(correct) (correct)  Corruption of program  Deletion of
files
Q.7.A string of eight 0's Or 1's is called a: 
Megabyte.  Byte. (correct)  Kilobyte.  Q.16.The network interface card of LAN is related to
Gigabyte. following layer of OSIModel  Transport 
Network  Data Link & Physical  All of these
Q.8.After a picture has been taken with a digital (correct)
camera and processed appropriately, the actual print
of the picture is considered  Data.  Output Q.17.Which of the following does NOT describe a
(correct)  Input.  Process data warehouse?  Subject-oriented  Integrated 
Time-variant  Updateable (correct)
Q.9.-------- is the study of molecules & structures
whose size ranges from 1 to 100 Nanometers  Q.18.Which of the following is TRUE ?  Logical
Nanoscience (correct)  Microelectrodes  design is software-dependent (correct)  In a
Computer forensics  Artificial intelligence distributed database, database is stored in one
physical location
Q.10.The ability to recover and read deleted or  Conceptual design translates the logical design
damaged files from a criminal’s computer is an into internal model  Logical design is software
example of a law enforcement specialty called:  independent
Robotics.  Simulation.  Computer forensics
(correct)  Animation. Q.19.A range check ________  Ensures that only
the correct data type is entered into a field  Verifies
Q.11.The _______states that a foreign key must either that all required data is present  Determines
match a primary key value in another relation or it whether a number is within a specified limit (correct)
must be null.  Entity integrity rule (correct)   Tests if the data in two or more associated fields is
logical
Karan Dhami-1
database (C) database program (D) data warehouse
Q.20.The total set of interlinked hypertext documents (E) None of these Ans : (C)
worldwide is-  HTTP (correct)  Browser 
WWW  B2B 7. A set of step-by-step procedures for accomplishing
a task is known as a(n)— (A) algorithm (B) hardware
COMPUTER KNOWLEDGE Computer Knowledge program (C) software bug (D) firmware program (E)
is highly scoring section in IBPS POs and RRB None of these Ans : (A)
(Regional Rural Banks) Examinations. All the
questions will be from well known concepts such as 8. Which of the following is not true about RAM ?
Computer Terminology, Basic Computer (A) RAM is a temporary storage area (B) RAM is the
Architecture, Internet, MS-Office, E-Commerce, same as hard disk storage (C) RAM is volatile (D)
Computer Network etc. The questions may be Information stored in RAM is gone when you turn the
theoretical and also require knowledge of facts and computer off (E) None of these Ans : (B)
application.
9. The main directory of a disk is called the………
Punjab and Sind Bank Clerk Exam Computer directory. (A) root (B) sub (C) folder (D) network (E)
Knowledge None of these Ans : (A)

1. The software tools that enable a user to interact 10. The physical arrangement of elements on a page
with a computer for specific purposes are known as— is referred to as a document’s…… (A) features (B)
(A) Hardware (B) Networked Software (C) format (C) pagination (D) grid (E) None of these
Shareware (D) Applications (E) None of these Ans : Ans : (B)
(D)
11. =SUM (B1 : B8) is an example of a— (A)
2. A………shares hardware, software, and data function (B) formula (C) cell address (D) value (E)
among authorized users. None of these Ans : (B)
Subscribe To Our Youtube Channel - Click Here
501 must do Computer awareness questions Subscribe To Our Youtube Channel - Click Here
More about Computer Awareness, General 501 must do Computer awareness questions
Knowledge, Quant, Verbal, Logic and DI on More about Computer Awareness, General
cetking.com To join Shortcuts, Mocks, GDPI, Classes Knowledge, Quant, Verbal, Logic and DI on
and more on 09594441448 Cetking.com cetking.com To join Shortcuts, Mocks, GDPI, Classes
(A) network (B) protocol (C) hyperlink (D) and more on 09594441448 Cetking.com
transmitter (E) None of these Ans : (A) 12. Which of the following storage media provides
sequential access only ? (A) Floppy disk (B)
3. Computer programs are written in a high-level Magnetic disk (C) Magnetic tape (D) Optical disk (E)
programming language; however, the humanreadable None of these Ans : (B)
version of a program is called— (A) cache (B)
instruction set (C) source code (D) word size (E) 13. Compilers and translators are one form of— (A)
None of these Ans : (C) ROM (B) RAM (C) Hard disk (D) Software (E) None
of these Ans : (D)
4. In word processing, an efficient way to move the
3rd paragraph to place it after the 5th paragraph is— 14. Data representation is based on the………number
(A) copy and paste (B) copy, cut and paste (C) cut, system, which uses two numbers to represent all data.
copy and paste (D) cut and paste (E) None of these (A) binary (B) biometric (C) bicentennial (D) byte (E)
Ans : (D) None of these Ans : (A)

5. Which of the following is not a function of the 15. The most common input devices include— (A)
control unit ? (A) Read instructions (B) Execute Monitor and keyboard (B) Monitor and mouse (C)
instructions (C) Interpret instructions (D) Direct Mouse and keyboard (D) Printer and mouse (E) None
operations (E) None of these Ans : (D) of these Ans : (C)

6. Software for organizing storage and retrieval of


information is a(n)— (A) operating system (B)
Karan Dhami-2
16. www means— (A) world wide wonder (B) world 25. What is the intersection of a column and a row on
wide wizard (C) world wide web (D) wide world web a worksheet called ? (A) Column (B) Value (C)
(E) None of these Ans : (C) Address (D) Cell (E) None of these Ans : (D)

17. ………processing is used when a large mail-order 26. ………are often delivered to a PC through an e-
company accumulates orders mail attachment and are often designed to do harm.
and processes them together in one large set. (A) (A) Viruses (B) Spam (C) Portals
Batch (B) Online (C) Real-time (D) Group (E) None (D) Email messages (E) None of these Ans : (A)
of these Ans : (A)
27. What is the storage area for e-mail messages
18. What is the difference between a CDROM and a called ? (A) A folder (B) A directory (C) A mailbox
CD-RW ? (A) They are the same—just two different (D) The hard disk (E) None of these Ans : (C)
terms used by different manufacturers (B) A CD-
ROM can be written to and a CDRW cannot (C) A 28. A desktop computer is also known as a— (A)
CD-RW can be written to, but a CDROM can only be Palm Pilot (B) PC (C) Laptop (D) Mainframe (E)
read from (D) A CD-ROM holds more information None of these Ans : (B)
than a CD-RW (E) None of these Ans : (C)
29. When a file contains instructions that can be
19. Holding the mouse button down while moving an carried out by the computer, it is often called a(n)
object or text is known as— (A) Moving (B) ……file. (A) data (B) information (C) executable (D)
Dragging (C) Dropping (D) Highlighting (E) None of application (E) None of these Ans : (C)
these Ans : (B)
30. Documents converted to……can be published to
20. A………is a collection of data that is stored the Web. (A) a.doc file (B) http (C) machine language
electronically as a series of records in a table. (A) (D) HTML (E) None of these Ans : (D)
spreadsheet (B) presentation (C) database (D) web
page (E) None of these Ans : (C) 31. If a user needs information instantly available to
the CPU, it should be stored— (A) on a CD (B) in
21. The………primarily take(s) care of the behind- secondary storage (C) in the CPU (D) in RAM
the-scenes details and manage(s) the hardware. (A) Subscribe To Our Youtube Channel - Click Here
operating system (B) application software (C) 501 must do Computer awareness questions
peripheral devices More about Computer Awareness, General
Subscribe To Our Youtube Channel - Click Here Knowledge, Quant, Verbal, Logic and DI on
501 must do Computer awareness questions cetking.com To join Shortcuts, Mocks, GDPI, Classes
More about Computer Awareness, General and more on 09594441448 Cetking.com
Knowledge, Quant, Verbal, Logic and DI on (E) None of these Ans : (B)
cetking.com To join Shortcuts, Mocks, GDPI, Classes
and more on 09594441448 Cetking.com 32. To what temporary area can you store text and
(D) hard disk (E) None of these Ans : (A) other data, and later paste them to another location ?
(A) The clipboard (B) ROM (C) CD-ROM (D) The
22. A……is a professionally designed ‘empty’ hard disk (E) None of these Ans : (A)
document that can be adapted to the user’s needs. (A)
file (B) guide (C) template (D) user guide file (E) 33. In a spreadsheet, a………is a number you will use
None of these Ans : (C) in a calculation. (A) label (B) cell (C) field (D) value
(E) None of these Ans : (D)
23. A group of 8 bits is known as a— (A) Byte (B)
Kilobyte (C) Binary digit (D) Megabit (E) None of 34. After slide-directed time, if you want to move
these Ans : (A) ahead automatically, click in……check box in
transition of this slide group in tab of animations—
24. The hardware device commonly referred to as the (A) Transition timer (B) Automatically opter (C)
‘brain’ of the computer is the— (A) RAM chip (B) Transition opter (D) Automatic timer (E) None of
Data input (C) CPU (D) Secondary storage (E) None these Ans : (B)
of these Ans : (C)

Karan Dhami-3
35. All are included in removable media except the — (A) C++ (B) JAVA (C)Visual Basic.NET (D)
following— (A) CD-ROMs (B) Diskette (C) DVDs Machine language (E) None of these Ans : (D)
(D) High disk drive (E) None of these Ans : (D)
45. In table in excel, there are typical labels
36. If you open some menu and then decide that you alongwith…… (A) Letters (B) Numbers (C) Names
do not want to select some option, then click the (D) Formulae (E) None of these Ans : (B)
menu title again or press the…… key to layout the
menu. 46. ………….makes available the commands to
(A) shift (B) tab (C) escape (D) F1 (E) None of these righten the software. Instructions are translated step-
Ans : (C) by-step and executed by the processor so that some
objective can be achieved or some problem can be
37. Using the……process, it is easy to change the solved. (A) Software patch (B) Al language (C)
name of the file. (A) transforming (B) crash (C) Presentation language (D) Programming language (E)
renaming (D) retagging (E) None of these Ans : (C) None of these Ans : (C)

38. ………view shows that how will content on 47. As you create documents, graphs and pictures
printed page, alongwith footer and margin header, your computer holds the data in— (A) Restore file
appear. (A) Draft (B) Full screen reading (C) Outline (B) Backup drive (C) Clip board (D) Memory (E)
(D) Page layout (E) None of these Ans : (D) None of these Ans : (D)

39. Using………, the text can be entered and edited 48. Which of the following terms is used for the form
very efficiently. (A) spreadsheet (B) typewriter (C) in which the word will appear on the page ? (A) Text
word processing programme (D) desktop publishing formatting (B) Character formatting (C) Point size
programme (E) None of these Ans : (D) (D) Type face (E) None of these Ans : (A)

40. Other folders, named subfolders, can remain in 49. ……….helps to capture the raw data and enter
the folders while creating hierarchical structure— (A) into the computer system. (A) CPU (B) Integrated
Mini folder (B) Teard folder (C) Subfolders (D) circuit (C) Input device (D) Motherboard (E) None of
Object (E) None of these Ans : (C) these Ans : (C)

41. By using slide………, the characteristics of the 50. The following are included in the world
fonts of all the slides in programme ………….Title Bar, Ribbon, Status Bar,
Subscribe To Our Youtube Channel - Click Here Views, Document workspace. (A) Window
501 must do Computer awareness questions Subscribe To Our Youtube Channel - Click Here
More about Computer Awareness, General 501 must do Computer awareness questions
Knowledge, Quant, Verbal, Logic and DI on More about Computer Awareness, General
cetking.com To join Shortcuts, Mocks, GDPI, Classes Knowledge, Quant, Verbal, Logic and DI on
and more on 09594441448 Cetking.com cetking.com To join Shortcuts, Mocks, GDPI, Classes
presentation, can be changed. (A) theme (B) icon (C) and more on 09594441448 Cetking.com
master (D) style (E) None of these Ans : (B) (B) Browser (C) Explorer (D) Website (E) None of
these Ans : (A)
42. Though several programmers can be opened
simultaneously yet only…………programmed can be
active. (A) four (B) three (C) two (D) one (E) None of IBPS COMPUTER KNOWLEDGE PRACTICE
these Ans : (B) QUESTIONS

43. Straight and Uniform margins on both the sides 1. ___Key combination that lets you toggle between
indicate that there is …………in the document. (A) open windows a) ALT+SHIFT+TAB b)
full justification (B) full alignment (C) left ALT+CTRL+TAB c) ALT+CTRL d) ALT+TAB
justification (D) right justification (E) None of these
Ans : (A) 2. When more than one window is open, to switch to
the next win-dow___is the key combination a)
44. Among the typical computer programming CTRL+F5 b) CTRL+F6 c) CTRL+F7 d) CTRL+F8
languages used today, the following is not included in
Karan Dhami-4
3. To select or unselect one word to the right a) 16. ___Is the shortcut key to move to the next
CTRL+SHIFT b) CTRL+SHIFT+Down Arrow c) worksheet a) CTRL+Pagedown b) CTRL+Pageup c)
CTRL+SHIFT+Right Arrow d) None of the above CTRL+Right arrow d) CTRL+Left arrow

4. To maximize or restore a selected window a) 17. ___Is the shortcut key to move to the previous
CTRL+F7 b) CTRL+F10 c) CTRL+F8 d) CTRL+F9 worksheet a) CTRL+Pagedown b) CTRL+Pageup c)
CTRL+Right arrow d) CTRL+Left arrow
5. To Copy a picture of the selected window to the
clipboard a) ALT+TAB b) ALT+Print Screen c) Both 18. ___Key we use to select row a) SHIFT+TAB b)
(a) and (b) d) None of the above SHIFT+ Spacebar c) CTRL+ Spacebar d) SHIFT+
Enter
6. ___Is the key to close a selected dropdown list;
cancel a comm-and and close a dialog box a) TAB b) 19. ___Key we use to select column a) SHIFT+TAB
SHIFT c) ESC d) None of the above b) SHIFT+ Spacebar
c) CTRL+ Spacebar d) SHIFT+ Enter
7. ___Is the key we use to run the selected command
a) SHIFT b) TAB c) ENTER d) CTRL 20. ___Is the key to exit from excel a) ALT+F2 b)
ALT+F3 c) ALT+F4 d) ALT+F5
8. ___Is the functional key to display save as box a)
F5 b) F6 c) F9 d) F12 21. A device, which is not connected to CPU, is
called as --- a) On-line device b) Off-line device c)
9. ___Is the combination of keys to switch between Device d) None of the above
the last four places that you have edited a)
ALT+CTRL+Z b) ALT+CTRL+Y c) ALT+TAB+Z 22. What is the other name for programmed chip? a)
d) ALT+SHIFT+Z RAM b) ROM c) LSIC d) None of the above

10. To delete one word to the right a) CTRL+SHIFT 23. On-line real time systems become popular
b) CTRL+TAB c) CTRL+DEL d) CTRL+Z in___generation a) First Generation b) Second
Generation c) Third Generation d) Fourth Generation
11. ___Is the combination of keys we use to hide
rows a) CTRL+9 b) CTRL+8 c) CTRL+7 d) CTRL+6 24. EDVAC stands for a) Electronic Discrete
Variable Automatic Computer b) Electronic Discrete
12. To hide the columns___is the functional key a) Value Automatic Computer c) Electronic Device
CTRL+3 b) CTRL+2 Variable Automatic Computer d) Electronic Discrete
Subscribe To Our Youtube Channel - Click Here Variable Advanced Computer
501 must do Computer awareness questions
More about Computer Awareness, General 25. EDSAC stands for a) Electronic Delay Storage
Knowledge, Quant, Verbal, Logic and DI on Advanced Computer b) Electronic Data Storage
cetking.com To join Shortcuts, Mocks, GDPI, Classes Automatic Computer c) Electronic Delay Strong
and more on 09594441448 Cetking.com Automatic Computer
c) CTRL+1 d) CTRL+0 Subscribe To Our Youtube Channel - Click Here
501 must do Computer awareness questions
13. ___Is the shortcut key to delete cells, rows or More about Computer Awareness, General
columns a) CTRL+ Minus Sign b) CTRL+ Plus Sign Knowledge, Quant, Verbal, Logic and DI on
c) CTRL+ Star Sign d) CTRL+ Greater than Sign cetking.com To join Shortcuts, Mocks, GDPI, Classes
and more on 09594441448 Cetking.com
14. To insert cells, rows or columns ___the keyboard d) Electronic Delay Storage Automatic Computer
shortcut key a) CTRL+ Minus Sign b)
CTRL+SHIFT+ Plus Sign c) CTRL+ Star Sign d) 26. LSIC stands for a) Large Scale Inner Circuits b)
CTRL+ Greater than Sign Large Scale Integrated Computer c) Large Scale
Integrated Circuits d) Large Storage Integrated
15. ___Is the keyboard shortcut key to insert auto sum Circuits
a) ALT b) ALT= c) ALT+ d) ALT-

Karan Dhami-5
27. The task of performing operations like arithmetic cetking.com To join Shortcuts, Mocks, GDPI, Classes
and logical operations is called ___ a) Processing b) and more on 09594441448 Cetking.com
Storing c) Editing d) Sorting 3. Which of the can't spread virus a) An e-mail with
attachment b) A plain text mail c) Downloading files
28. The ALU and Control Unit jointly known as a) over the web d) None of the above
RAM b) ROM c) CPU d) None of the above
4. There is a new anti-virus software update available,
29. RAM is an example of a) Secondary memory b) when it is downloaded to your computer a) Everyday
Primary memory c) Both (a) and (b) d) None of the b) Only in the night c) When you next switch on your
above computer d) All of the above

30. Magnetic disk is an example of a) Secondary 5. Numbers are stored and transmitted inside a
memory b) Primary memory c) Both (a) and (b) d) computer in a) Binary form b) ASCII code form c)
None of the above Alphabets form d) Numerical form

31. A bit is an acronym for a) Digit b) Binary digit c) 6. CPU capacity can be measured in a) BPS b) MIPS
Number d) None of the above c) MHz d) MPI

32. Each memory cell has a unique number, assigned 7. MPIS stands for a) Million Instructions Per Second
to it is called as the ___ of the cell a) Address b) b) Million Instructions Per Season c) Monthly
Register Instructions Per Second d) Million Inputs Per Second
c) Number d) None of the above
8. LAN speeds are measured in a) BPS b) KBPS c)
33. RAM is also called as a) Read/Write Memory b) MBPS d) MIPS
Long Memory c) Permanent Memory d) None of the
above 9. Modem speeds are measured in a) BPS b) KBPS c)
MBPS d) MIPS
34. ___Store data or information temporarily and pass
it on as directed by the control unit a) Address b) 10. BPS stands for a) Bits Per Second b) Bits Per
Register c) Number d) None of the above Season c) Bytes Per Second d) Bits Per System

35. The secondary storage memory is also called as 11. In processing cheques which of the following I/O
a) Auxiliary Memory b) Attractive Memory c) Chip techniques have banks traditionally followed? a) OCR
Memory d) None of the above b) MICR c) Barcode d) VRT

ANSWERS: 1) a 2) b 3) c 4) b 5) b 6) c 7) c 8) d 9) a 12. What is object of UPS? a) Using for storage b) To


10) c 11) a 12) d 13) a 14) b 15) b 16) a 17) b 18) b increase the speed of a computer c) Provides backup
19) c 20) c 21) b 22) b 23) c 24) a 25) d 26) c 27) a power d) All of the above
28) c 29) b 30) a 31) b 32) a 33) a 34) b 35) a
13. QWERTY is used with reference to a) Monitor b)
IBPS COMPUTER KNOWLEDGE MCQs Printer c) Keyboard d) Mouse

1. In a network, the computer that stores the files and 14. "Zipping" a file means a) Encrypting the message
process the data is named as a) Server b) Terminal c) b) Compressing the message c) Transfer the message
Modem d) All of the above d) All of the above

2. Viruses are called that because a) They are viruses 15. Integrated Circuits (IC) chips used in computers
b) They can copy themselves and spread c) Both (a) are made with a) Gold b) Silver c) Silicon d) Coper
and (b) d) None of the above
16. What is the Super Computer developed in India a)
Subscribe To Our Youtube Channel - Click Here CRAY b) PARAM c) Both (a) and (b) d) None of the
501 must do Computer awareness questions above
More about Computer Awareness, General
Knowledge, Quant, Verbal, Logic and DI on Subscribe To Our Youtube Channel - Click Here
Karan Dhami-6
501 must do Computer awareness questions 30. Software programs that allow you to legally copy
More about Computer Awareness, General files and give them away at no cost are called which
Knowledge, Quant, Verbal, Logic and DI on of the following a) Time sharing b) Public domain
cetking.com To join Shortcuts, Mocks, GDPI, Classes Subscribe To Our Youtube Channel - Click Here
and more on 09594441448 Cetking.com 501 must do Computer awareness questions
17. Which of the following is different from other a) More about Computer Awareness, General
Internet b) Windows c) Unix d) Linux Knowledge, Quant, Verbal, Logic and DI on
cetking.com To join Shortcuts, Mocks, GDPI, Classes
18. What is the full form of WWW? a) World Wide and more on 09594441448 Cetking.com
Web b) World With Web c) Work Wide Web d) c) Shareware d) None of the above
World Wide Wet
31. The term that we use to describe physical
19. Which of the following Command is required to components of the system a) Hardware b) Input c)
reboot the computer a) CTRL+ALT+DEL b) Software d) None of the above
CTRL+ALT+TAB c) CTRL+ALT+SHIFT d)
CTRL+SHIFT+DEL 32. Which of the following is used to indicate the
location on the computer monitor a) Mouse b) Cursor
20. Select the ODD one a) Operating system b) c) Both (a) and (b) d) None of the above
Interpreter c) Compiler d) Assembler
33. Mr. Saketh needs to design invitation card. What
21. PC stands for a) Practical Computer b) Personal type of computer program is suitable? a) MS-Word b)
Computer c) Private Computer d) Personal Contact Desktop Publishing c) Simulation d) None of the
above
22. The computer code for interchange of information
between terminals is a) BCDIC b) BCD c) ASCII d) 34. Which combination of keys needs to be pressed to
None of the above make a percent sign? a) Shift+2 b) Shift+3 c) Shift+4
d) Shift+5
23. The retrieval of information from the computer is
defined as a) Data processing b) Input c) Output d) 35. What process should be used to recall a document
All of the above saved previously? a) Copy b) Save c) Retrieve d)
Enter
24. Which one of the following is NOT a computer
language? a) MS-Excel b) BASIC c) COBOL d) C++ 36. What term applies to a collection of related
records in a database? a) Field b) File c) Both (a) and
25. "C" is a) A letter b) A word c) A language d) An (b) d) None of the above
alphabet
37. How are data organized in a spreadsheet? a) Rows
26. Difference Engine invented by a) Charles and Columns b) Boxes c) Tables d) None of the
Babbage b) John McCarthy c) Pascal d) Newton above

27. First generation computer systems used a) 38. Which of the following mode we use to deliver e-
Transistors b) Vacuum Tubes c) Both (a) and (b) d) mail a) Postal b) Courier c) Computer d) Fax
None of the above
39. VIRUS stands for a) Vital Information Recourse
28. A byte is made up of a) Eight bytes b) Eight Under Siege b) Vital Information Reason Under Siege
binary digits c) Two binary digits d) Two decimal c) Vital Information Recourse Under System d) Virus
points Information Recourse Under Siege

29. Doing research by using an on-line database 40. ------ Is known as unauthorized access into others
instead of a printed set of similar information offers system a) Hacking b) Encryption c) Decryption d)
which of the following advantage a) More current None of the above
information b) Easier to understand c) Better charts d)
None of the above ANSWERS: 1. a 2. b 3. b 4. c 5. b 6. b 7. a
8. c 9. a 10. a 11. b 12. c 13. c 14. b
Karan Dhami-7
15. c 16. b 17. a 18. a 19. a 20. a 21. b 8. If a disk drive fails but the computer application
22. c 23. c 24. a 25. c 26. a 27. b 28. b running and using it can continue processing, this
29. a 30. b 31. a 32. b 33. b 34. d 35. c application is said to have been designed with this
36. b 37. a 38. c 39. a 40. a feature— (A) 100 per cent uptime (B) fault tolerance
(C) high reliability (D) All of these (E) None of these
Allahabad Bank Probationary Officers Exam. Ans : (B)
Computer Knowledge
9. What is e-commerce ? (A) Buying and selling
1. Which of the following are advantages of CD- international goods (B) Buying and selling products
ROM as a storage media ? (A) CD-ROM is an and services over the Internet (C) Buying and selling
inexpensive way to store large amount of data and products and services not found in stores (D) Buying
information and selling products having to do with computers (E)
Subscribe To Our Youtube Channel - Click Here Buying and selling of electronic goods Ans : (B)
501 must do Computer awareness questions
More about Computer Awareness, General 10. What are the four things needed to connect to the
Knowledge, Quant, Verbal, Logic and DI on Internet ? (A) Telephone line, modem, computer, and
cetking.com To join Shortcuts, Mocks, GDPI, Classes an ISP (B) Modem, computer, PDA and ISP (C)
and more on 09594441448 Cetking.com Telephone line, PDA, modem and
(B) CD-ROM disks retrieve data and information Subscribe To Our Youtube Channel - Click Here
more quickly than magnetic disks do (C) CD-ROMs 501 must do Computer awareness questions
make less errors than magnetic media (D) All of these More about Computer Awareness, General
(E) None of these Ans : (D) Knowledge, Quant, Verbal, Logic and DI on
cetking.com To join Shortcuts, Mocks, GDPI, Classes
2. A ……… is the term used when a search engine and more on 09594441448 Cetking.com
returns a Web page that matches the search criteria. computer (D) Computer, ISP, modem and
(A) blog (B) hit (C) link (D) view (E) success Ans : communication software (E) Monitor, keyboard,
(C) mouse, modem Ans : (A)

3. The ……… is the term used to describe the 11. Which of the following functions are not
window that is currently being used. (A) Web performed by servers ? (A) Email processing (B)
Window (B) display area (C) WordPad Window (D) Database sharing (C) Processing Web sites (D)
active window (E) monitor Ans : (D) Storage (E) Word processing Ans : (E)

4. CPU is an abbreviation for— (A) central 12. Which media have the ability to have
programming unit (B) central processing unit (C) data/information stored (written) on them by users
computer processing unit (D) computer protocol unit more than once ? (A) CD-R disks (B) CD-RW disks
(E) central protocol unit Ans : (B) (C) Zip disks (D) OptiDisks (E) Both CD-RW disks
and Zip disks Ans : (A)
5. A microprocessor is the brain of the computer and
is also called a(n)— (A) microchip (B) macrochip (C) 13. The process of transferring files from a computer
macroprocessor (D) calculator (E) software Ans : (A) on the Internet to your computer is called— (A)
downloading (B) uploading (C) FTP (D) JPEG (E)
6. Storage and memory differ with respect to which of downsizing Ans : (C)
the following characteristics ?
(A) Price (B) Reliability (C) Speed (D) All of these 14. The………controls a client computer’s resources.
(E) None of these Ans : (D) (A) application program (B) instruction set (C)
operating system (D) server application (E) compiler
7. What are two examples of freeware ? (A) WinZip Ans : (D)
and Linux (B) Shareware and file sharing (C)
Microsoft Word and the Google toolbar (D) Instant 15. To reload a Web page, press the ……… button.
messaging and the Google toolbar (E) Microsoft (A) Redo
Power Point and Microsoft Excel Ans : (D) (B) Reload (C) Restore (D) Ctrl (E) Refresh Ans : (E)

Karan Dhami-8
16. Which of the following could be digital input 25. A sales clerk at a checkout counter scanning a tag
devices for computers ? (A) Digital camcorder (B) on an item rather than keying it into the system, is
Microphone (C) Scanner (D) All of the above (E) using— (A) input automation (B) item data
None of these Ans : (D) automation (C) scanning automation (D) source data
automation (E) None of these Ans : (C)
17. The………enables you to simultaneously keep
multiple Web pages open in one browser window. (A) 26. A(n)……is composed of several computers
tab box (B) pop-up helper (C) tab row (D) address bar connected together to share resources and data. (A)
(E) Esc key Ans : (A) Internet (B) network (C) backbone (D) hyperlink (E)
protocol Ans : (B)
18. You can use the………bar to type a URL and
display a Web page, or type a keyword to display a 27. Which of the following is a storage device that
list of related Web pages. (A) menu (B) Title (C) uses rigid, permanently installed magnetic disks to
Search (D) Web (E) Address Ans : (E) store data/information— (A) floppy diskette (B) hard
disk (C) permanent disk (D) optical disk (E) None of
19. Storage media such as a CD read and write these Ans : (B)
information using— (A) a laser beam of red light (B)
magnetic dots (C) magnetic strips (D) All of these (E) 28. Microsoft Office is an example of a— (A) closed-
None of these Ans : (D) source software (B) open-source software (C)
horizontal-market software (D) vertical-market
20. Vendor-created program modifications are called software (E) compiler Ans : (A)

Subscribe To Our Youtube Channel - Click Here 29. A popular way to learn about computers without
501 must do Computer awareness questions ever going to a classroom is called— (A) i-learning
More about Computer Awareness, General (B) isolated learning (C) e-learning (D) close learning
Knowledge, Quant, Verbal, Logic and DI on Subscribe To Our Youtube Channel - Click Here
cetking.com To join Shortcuts, Mocks, GDPI, Classes 501 must do Computer awareness questions
and more on 09594441448 Cetking.com More about Computer Awareness, General
(A) patches (B) antiviruses (C) holes (D) fixes (E) Knowledge, Quant, Verbal, Logic and DI on
overlaps Ans : (D) cetking.com To join Shortcuts, Mocks, GDPI, Classes
and more on 09594441448 Cetking.com
21. Cache and main memory will lose their contents (E) Distance Learning Ans : (C)
when the power is off. They are— (A) dynamic (B)
static (C) volatile (D) non-volatile (E) faulty Ans : (C) 30. A person who used his or her expertise to gain
access to other people’s computers to get information
22. The collection of links throughout the Internet illegally or do damage is a— (A) spammer (B) hacker
creates an interconnected network called the— (A) (C) instant messenger (D) programmer (E) analyst
WWW (B) Web (C) World Wide Web (D) All of the Ans : (B)
above (E) Wide Area Web
31. Which of the following is an example of storage
Ans : (D) devices ? (A) Magnetic disks (B) Tapes (C) DVDs
(D) All of these (E) None of these Ans : (D)
23. Every computer has a(n) ………; many also have.
(A) operating system, a client system (B) operating 32. The………folder retains copies of messages that
system; instruction sets (C) application programs; an you have started but are not yet ready to send. (A)
operating system (D) application programs; a client Inbox (B) Outbox (C) Drafts (D) Sent Items (E)
system (E) operating system; application programs Address Book Ans : (C)
Ans : (E)
33. Which of the following is an example of an
24. Main memory works in conjunction with— (A) optical disk ? (A) Digital versatile disks (B) Magnetic
special function cards (B) RAM (C) CPU (D) Intel disks (C) Memory disks (D) Data bus disks (E) None
(E) All of these Ans : (C) of these Ans : (A)

Karan Dhami-9
34. The main job of a CPU is to— (A) carry out 42. When speaking of computer input and output,
program instructions (B) store data/information for input refers to— (A) any data processing that occurs
future use (C) process data and information (D) Both from new data input into the computer (B) retrieval of
(A) and (C) data or information that has been input into the
(E) None of these Ans : (D) computer (C) data or information that has been
entered into the computer (D) the transmission of data
35. ……are attempts by individuals to obtain that has been input into the computer (E) Both (C)
confidential information from you by falsifying their and (D) above Ans : (E)
identity. (A) Phishing trips (B) Computer viruses (C)
Spyware scams (D) Viruses (E) Phishing scams Ans : 43. A ……… is a set of rules. (A) resource locator
(E) (B) domain (C) hypertext (D) URL (E) protocol Ans :
(E)
36. An example of a processing device would be—
(A) a magnetic ink reader (B) a tablet PC (C) special 44. The connection between your computer at home
function cards (D) scanners (E) keyboards Ans : (B) and your local ISP is called— (A) the last mile (B)
the home stretch (C) the home page (D) the backbone
37. Which of the following is not a type of computer (E) the vital mile Ans : (C)
software which can be bought ? (A) Off-the-shelf (B)
Tailor-made (C) Custom-developed (D) Off-the-shelf 45. All of the logic and mathematical calculations
with alterations (E) All of these can be purchased Ans done by the computer happen in/on the— (A) system
: (D) board (B) central control unit (C) central processing
unit (D) mother board (E) memory Ans : (C)
38. You can use………to copy selected text, and
……… to paste it in a document. (A) CTRL + C, 46. There are several primary categories of
CTRL + V (B) CTRL + C, CTRL + P (C) CTRL + S, procedures. Which of the following is not a primary
CTRL + S (D) SHIFT + C, ALT + P (E) CTRL + D, category of procedures ? (A) Testing (B) Backup and
CTRL + A Ans : (A) recovery (C) Firewall development (D) Design (E)
None of these Ans : (C)
39. Video processors consist of ……… and ……,
which store and process images. (A) CPU and VGA 47. The operating system called UNIX is typically
(B) CPU and memory (C) VGA and memory (D) VGI used for— (A) desktop computers (B) laptop
and DVI computers (C) supercomputers (D) Web servers (E)
Subscribe To Our Youtube Channel - Click Here All of these Ans : (E)
501 must do Computer awareness questions
More about Computer Awareness, General 48. The………file format is a method of encoding
Knowledge, Quant, Verbal, Logic and DI on pictures on a computer. (A) HTML (B) JPEG (C)
cetking.com To join Shortcuts, Mocks, GDPI, Classes FTP (D) URL (E) DOC Ans : (B)
and more on 09594441448 Cetking.com Subscribe To Our Youtube Channel - Click Here
(E) VGA and VGI Ans : (C) 501 must do Computer awareness questions
More about Computer Awareness, General
40. The main memory of a computer can also be Knowledge, Quant, Verbal, Logic and DI on
called— (A) primary storage (B) internal memory (C) cetking.com To join Shortcuts, Mocks, GDPI, Classes
primary memory (D) All of these (E) None of these and more on 09594441448 Cetking.com
Ans : (C)
49. Press………to move the insertion point to the
41. Computer software can be defined as— (A) the Address box, or to highlight the URL in the Address
computer and its associated equipment (B) the box. (A) ALT + D (B) ALT + A (C) SHIFT + TAB
instructions that tell the computer what to do (C) (D) TAB + CTRL (E) CTRL + S Ans : (A)
computer components that act to accomplish a goal
(D) an interface between the computer and the 50. Computer systems are comprised of— (A)
network (E) the interaction between the computer and hardware, programs, information, people and
its database Ans : (B) networks (B) hardware, software, procedures,
networks and people (C) hardware, programs,
information, people and procedures (D) hardware,
Karan Dhami-10
programs, processors, procedures, networks and 8. A (n)…………….allows network users to share a
people (E) hardware, programs, processors, single copy of software, which resides on the network
procedures and people Ans : (A) server. (1) single-user license agreement (2) network
site license (3) end-user license agreement (4)
business software license (5) None of these
IBPS CLERKS COMPUTER BASED EXAM
PRACTICE MCQs 9. A polymorphic virus— (1) modifies its program
code each time it attaches itself to another program or
1. A passive threat to computer security is— (1) file (2) is a malicious-logic program that copies itself
Malicious Intent (2) Sabotage (3) Accident Errors (4) repeatedly in memory or on a disk drive until no
Espionage Agents (5) None of these memory or disk space remains (3) a malicious-logic
program that hides within or looks like a legitimate
2. The Secure Electronic Transaction (SET) program (4) infects a program file, but still reports the
specification— (1) is a notice, issued and verified by size and creation date of the original, uninfected
a certificate authority, that guarantees a user or program (5) None of these
Web site is legitimate (2) provides private-key
encryption of all data that passes between a client and 10. Microwave transmission is used in environments
a server (3) allows users to choose an encryption where installing physical transmission media is— (1)
scheme for the data that passes between a client difficult or impossible and where lineof-sight
and a server transmission is unavailable (2) easy or promising and
(4) uses a public-key encryption to secure credit-card where line-ofsight transmission is unavailable (3)
transaction systems (5) None of these difficult or impossible and where lineof-sight
transmission is available (4) easy or promising and
3. ……………allows wireless mobile devices to where line-ofsight transmission is available (5) None
access the Internet and its services such as the Web of these
and e-mail— (1) TCP/IP (2) Ethernet (3)WAP (4)
Token ring (5) None of these 11. Which is NOT a good Web security strategy? (1)
Restrict access to the Web server; keep a minimum
4. 'DOS' floppy disk does not have— (1) A Boot number of ports open (2) Limit the users who can
Record (2) A File Allocation Table (3) A Root load software, edit or add files. (3) Add demo
Directory (4) Virtual Memory (5) BIOS programs, so users can test system without accessing
production data. (4) Remove unnecessary compilers
5. 'MICR' technology used for clearance of cheques and
by banks refers to— (1) Magnetic Ink Character interpreters. (5) None of these
Recognition (2) Magnetic Intelligence Character
Recognition (3) Magnetic Information Cable 12. The altering of data so that it is not usable unless
Recognition (4) Magnetic Insurance Cases the changes are undone is— (1) Biometrics (2)
Recognition (5) None of these Compression (3) Encryption (4) Ergonomics (5) None
of these
6. All the information collected during database
development is stored in a— (1) repository (2) data 13. The word FIP stands for— (1) File Translate
warehouse (3) RAD (4) CASE (5) None of these Protocol (2) File Transit Protocol (3) File Typing
Protocol (4) File Transfer Protocol (5) None of these
7. The……………….component is used by the data
analyst to create the queries that access the database. 14. Voice mail— (1) is the exchange of text messages
(1) data extraction (2) end-user query tool (3) end- and computer files transmitted via a communications
user presentation tool (4) data store (5) None of these network such as a local area network or the Internet
(2) permits users to converse in real time with each
Subscribe To Our Youtube Channel - Click Here other via the computer while connected to the Internet
501 must do Computer awareness questions (3) functions much like an answering machine,
More about Computer Awareness, General allowing callers to leave a voice message for the
Knowledge, Quant, Verbal, Logic and DI on called party (4) involves using video and computer
cetking.com To join Shortcuts, Mocks, GDPI, Classes technology to conduct a meeting between participants
and more on 09594441448 Cetking.com at geographically separate locations (5) None of these
Karan Dhami-11
(3) Servlet Response (4) Http Servlet Response (5)
15. A communication processor that connects None of these
dissimilar networks by providing the translation from 26. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ translates and executes program
one set of protocol to another is— (1) Bridge (2) at run time line by line 1) Compiler 2) Interpreter 3)
Gateway (3) Router (4) Modem (5) All of these Linker 4) Loader 5) None
27. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ is an OOP principle 1) Structured
16. Which of the following is a general purpose programming 2) Procedural programming 3)
programming language, designed by Sun Inheritance 4) Linking 5) None
Microsystems, and well suited for use on the Web? 28. COBOL is widely used in _ _ _ _ _ _ _
(1) VB Script (2) Java Script (3) CSS (4) Java (5) applications 1) Commercial 2) Scientific 3) Space 4)
None of these Mathematical 5) None
29. RAM stands for 1) Random origin money 2)
17. This.............tier processes HTTP protocol, Random only memory 3) Read only memory 4)
scripting tasks, performs calculations, and provides Random access memory 5) None
access to data. (1) Client (2) Applications/Web server 30. 1 Byte = ? 1) 8 bits 2) 4 bits 3) 2 bits 4) 9 bits 5)
(3) Enterprise server (4) DBA (5) None of these None
31. SMPS stands for 1) Switched mode power supply
18. RSA is— (1) Symmetric Cryptosystem (2) 2) Start mode power supply 3) Store mode power
Asymmetric Cryptosystem (3) Block Cypher (4) supply 4) Single mode power supply 5) None
Digital Signature (5) None of these 32. The device used to carry digital data on analog
lines is called as 1) Modem 2) Multiplexer 3)
19. A DVD-RAM is similar to a………………except Modulator 4) Demodulator 5) None
it has storage capacities up to 5.2 GB. (1) CD-R (2) 33. VDU is also called 1) Screen 2) Monitor 3) Both
floppy disk (3) CD-RW (4) hard disk (5) None of 1 & 2 4) printer 5) None
these 34. BIOS stands for 1) Basic Input Output system 2)
20. When you are selecting a mouse for a particular Binary Input output system 3) Basic Input Off system
computer system, what is the most important 4) all the above 5) None
consideration? (1) The type of drivers that come with 35. Father of ‘C’ programming language 1) Dennis
the mouse (2) The length of the mouse cord (3) The Ritchie 2) Prof Jhon Kemeny 3) Thomas Kurtz 4) Bill
type of connector the mouse is equipped with (4) The Gates 5) None
number of buttons the mouse has (5) None of these 36. The 16 bit Microprocessor means that it has 1) 16
21. How is power supplied to a low-power USB address lines 2) 16 Buses 3) 16 Data lines 4) 16 routes
device? (1) Through a power cable (2) From an 5) None
external power supply (3) Directly from the 37. Data going into the computer is called 1) Output
computer's power supply 2) algorithm 3) Input 4) Calculations 5) flow chart
(4) Through the USB cable (5) None of these 38. Which of the following refers to a small, single-
22. All of the following are basic principles of net site network? 1) LAN 2) DSL 3) RAM 4) USB 5)
works,except— (1) each computer must have a CPU
network card (2) there must be communications 39. Microsoft Office is 1) Shareware 2)Public domain
media connecting the network hardware devices (3) software 3) Open-sourse software 4) A vertical
there must be at least one connecting device (4) each market application 5) An application suite
computer must have software that supports the 40. How many options does a BINARY choice offer
movement of information (5) None of these 1) None 2) One 3) Two 4) it depends on the amount
23. The………….data mining technique derives rules of memory on the computer 5) It depends on the
from real-world case examples. (1) Rule discover (2) speed of the computer’s processor
Signal processing (3) Neural nets (4) Case-based 41. A collection of program that controls how your
reasoning (5) None of these computer system runs and processes information is
24. …………….are used to identify a user who called 1) Operating System 2) Computer 3) Office
returns to a Website. (1) Cookies (2) Plug-ins (3) 4) Compiler 5) Interpreter
Scripts (4) ASPs (5) None of these 42. Computer connected to a LAN (Local Area
25. Which one of the following objects is passed to a Network) can 1) run faster 2) go on line 3) share
Java Bean when one of its properties is set via a JSP information and /or share peripheral equipment 4) E-
action? (1) Servlet Request (2) Http Servlet Request mail 5) None

Karan Dhami-12
43. Information travels between components on the semiconductor memory (D) has modular
mother board through 1) Flash memory 2) CMOS 3) construction (E) None of these ANSWER: (D)
Bays 4) Buses 5) Peripherals
44. How are data organized in a spreadsheet? 1) Lines 10. Which of the following is the smallest and
& spaces 2) Layers & Planes 3) Height & Width 4) fastest computer imitating brain working? (A)
Rows & Columns 5) None Supercomputer (B) Quantum Computer (C)
45. The blinking symbol on the computer screen is Param-10,000 (D) IBM chips (E) None of
called the 1) mouse 2) logo 3) hand 4) palm 5) cursor these ANSWER: (B)
ANSWERS : 1. (1) 2. (4) 3. (3) 4. (4) 5. (1) 6. (2) 7.
(2) 8. (2) 9. (1) 10. (4) 11. (4) 12. (3) 13. (1) 14. (3) 11. The only things moving around inside a
15. (2) 16. (2) 17. (1) 18. (4) 19. (3) 20. (3) 21. (4) 22. computer are (A) 1s and 0s (B) electrons (C) bytes
(2) 23. (3) 24. (1) 25. (3) 26. (2) 27. (1) 28. (3) 29. (1) (D) proton (E) All of the above ANSWER: (B)
30. (3) 31. (1) 32. (3) 33. (3) 34. (1) 35. (3) 36. (1) 37.
(3) 38. (4) 39. (1) 40. (3) 41. (4) 42. (3) 43. (4) 44. (4) 12. Which part of the computer were is used for
45. (5) calculating and comparing? (A) Disk unit (B)
Control unit (C) ALU (D) Modem
1.Main memory is (A) Random Access Memory (E) None of these ANSWER: (C)
(B) Read only Memory (C) Serial Access Memory
(D) Read Access Memory (E) None of these 13. How many full adders are needed to add two 4-
ANSWER: (A) bit numbers with a parallel adder? (A) 8 (B) 4 (C)
2. Program is (A) a series of actions proposed in 2 (D) 16 (E) None of these ANSWER: (B) 14.
order to achieve a certain result (B) loosely, a What digits are representative of all binary numbers?
routine (C) to design, write and test a program (A) 0 (B) 1 (C) Both (A) and (B) (D) 3
(D) loosely, to write a routine (E) None of these (E) None of these ANSWER: (C)
ANSWER: (E)
3. In MS-Access, a table can have ____ primary 15. To locate a data items for storage is (A) Field
key / keys (A) One (B) Two (C) Three (D) (B) Feed (C) Database (D) Fetch (E) None of these
Four (E) None of these ANSWER: (A) ANSWER: (D)
4. As compared to the secondary memory, the
primary memory of a computer is (A) Large (B) 16. Off-line operation is the operation of devices
Cheap (C) Fast (D) Slow (E) None of these without the control of (A) Memory (B) CPU
ANSWER: (C) (C) ALU (D) Control unit (E) None of these
5. Computer memory (A) performs all ANSWER: (B)
calculations (B) receives input data (C) is 17. How much megabit of data is typically stores in
extremely limited (D) is better than human memory bubble device? (A) 6 (B) 1 (C) 10 (D) 4
(E) None of these ANSWER: (B) (E) None of these ANSWER: (B)
6. Multiprocessor is a computer system (A) 18. A peripheral device in which a large number of
Where many CPU under a common control (B) cartridges or reels of magnetic tape are stored in cells
Consisting of more than one input devices under in a storage matrix is (A) Key board (B)
common control. (C) Where many output devices Monitor (C) Printer (D) Automated tape
under common control. (D) All of the above (E) library. (E) None of these ANSWER: (D)
None of these ANSWER: (A) 19. A device designd to read information encoded
7. Technique to implement virtual memory where ito a small plastic card is (A) Light pen (B)
memory is divided into units of fixed size memory is Punched card (C) Badge reader (D) Magnetic tape
(A) Paging (B) Defragments (C) Segmentation (E) None of these ANSWER: (C)
(D) activation (E) None of these ANSWER: (A) 20. A data structure consisting of several fields,
8. A VDU is used for (A) Input device some or all of which are instances of the same data
(B) Output device (C) Vice data entry device structure is called as (A) Field (B) Bead (C)
(D) Both (A) and (B) (E) None of these ANSWER: Database (D) Data collection (E) None of these
(D) ANSWER: (B)
21. A type of line printer that uses an embossed
9. IBM 7000 digital computer (A) belongs to steel band to form the letters printed on the pap
second generation (B) uses VLSI (C) employs (A) Golf ball printer (B) Dot-matrix printer (C)

Karan Dhami-13
Laser printer (D) Band printer (E) None of these by person and machine. (A) Document reader
ANSWER: (D) (B) Distributed system (C) Artificial intelligence
22. Which of the following statement is wrong (A) (D) Document sorter (E) None of these ANSWER:
Windows XP is an operating system (B) Linux is (A)
owned and sold by Microsoft (C) Photoshop is a 33. A compiler means (A) A person who
graphical design tool by Adobe (D) Linux is free and compiles source programs (B) The same thing as a
open source software (E) None of these ANSWER: programmer (C) Key punch operator (D) A
(B) program which translates source program into object
23. Operating system of a computer (A) Enables program (E) None of these ANSWER: (D)
the programmer to draw a flow chart (B) Links a 34. An assembler is a (A) Program (B)
program with subroutine with references (C) Person who assemble the parts (C) Symbol
Provides a layer, user friendly interface (D) All of (D) Language (E) None of these ANSWER: (A)
the above (E) None of these ANSWER: (C)
24. ENIAC belonged to which generation of 35. Which of the following languages is not well
computer (A) First (B) Third (C) Second suited for computation? (A) PASCAL (B)
(D) Fourth (E) None of these ANSWER: (A) FORTRAN (C) Machine (D) C (E) None of these
ANSWER: (C)
25. The term ‘Operating System’ means (A) A 36. Which one of the following is not a broadband
set of programs which control computer working communication medium (A) Microwave (B)
(B) The way a user operates the computer system Fibre optic cable (C) Twisted pair (D) Coaxial cable
(C) Conversion of high level language to machine (E) None of these ANSWER: (C)
language (D) The way computer operator works 37. Which of the following performs modulation
(E) None of these ANSWER: (A) and demodulation (A) Coaxial cable (B)
26. Wild card operators specifies (A) can be Satellite (C) Modem (D) Optical fibre (E) None
used when writing into multiple files (B) allows of these ANSWER: (C)
several files to be read simultaneously (C) Provide 38. Which one of the following is not an application
an easy way of groups of related files (D) Are only software package (A) Redhat Linux (B)
used when printing the contents of a file (E) None Microsoft Office (C) Adobe PageMaker (D)
of these ANSWER: (C) Open Office (E) None of these ANSWER: (A)
27. The time interval between successive elements
of a discrete time signal is (A) Access time (B) 39. Can you tell what passes into and out from the
Seek time (C) Real time (D) Epoch (E) None of computer via its ports? (A) Data (B) Bytes (C)
these ANSWER: (D) Graphics (D) Pictures (E) None of these ANSWER:
28. An error in computer data is called (A) Chip (B)
(B) Bug (C) Bit (D) Byte (E) All of these 40. The ALU of a computer responds to the
ANSWER: (B) commands coming from (A) primary memory
29. A code that is written into a serially accessed (B) control section (C) external memory
memory is (A) Gray code (B) EOD (C) Bar (D) cache memory (E) None of these ANSWER:
code (D) Gray code (E) None of these ANSWER: (B)
(B) 41. The act of retrieving existing data from memory
30. Which of the following is form of semi is called (A) read-out (B) read from (C) read (D)
conductor memory in which it is possible to change All of the above (E) None of these ANSWER: (D)
the contents of selected memory locations by
applying suitable electrical signals. (A) CAM (B) 42. A directly accessible appointment calendar is a
ROM (C) EAROM (D) ANACUS (E) None of feature of a ……. resident package. (A) CPU (B)
these ANSWER: (C) memory (C) Buffer (D) ALU (E) None of
31. A connection between two end points, either these ANSWER: (B)
physical or logical, over which data may travel in 43. Perforated paper used as input or output media
both directions simultaneously is called... (A) Dump is known as (A) Paper tape (B) Magnetic tape
point (B) Datalink (C) Duplex (D) Networks (E) (C) Punched paper tape (D) Card punch (E)
None of these ANSWER: (C) None of these ANSWER: (A)
32. Which of the following is a machine for reading 44. Which of the following is another name fortape
documents that are encoded in a way that is readable transport (A) Core memory (B) Card punch

Karan Dhami-14
(C) Tape drive unit (D) Magnetic disk (E) None of 6. The OSI model is divided into _______ processes
these ANSWER: (C) called layers. (A) five (B) six (C) seven (D) eight (E)
45. Control of computer system or subsystem None of these ANS (C)
operation byan operator who may intervene at 7. System software is the set of programs that enables
arbitary times is (A) Manual control (B) your computer's hardware devices and ______
Mapping (C) Shift register (D) ALU (E) None software to work together. (A) management (B)
of these ANSWER: (A) processing (C) utility (D) application (E) None of
46. A device that both transmits and receives data, these ANS (D)
is (A) Transducer (B) Trapdoor (C) 8. ________ are specially designed computer chips
Translator (D) Transceiver (E) None of these reside inside other devices, such as your car or your
ANSWER: (D) electronic thermostat. (A) Servers (B) Embedded
47. A memory that is capable of determining computers (C) Robotic computers (D) Mainframes
whether a given datum is contained in one of its (E) None of these ANS (B)
addresses is (A) ROM (B) PROM (C) CAM 9. The following are all computing devices ,
(D) RAM (E) None of these ANSWER: (C) except......... (A) notebook computers (B) cellular
48. The invention of the slide rule is attributed to telephones (C) digital scanners (D) personal digital
(A) Babbage (B) Oughtred (C) Pascal (D) assistants (E) None of these ANS (C)
Napier (E) None of these ANSWER: (B) 10. in a ring topology , the the computer in possession
49. Each model of a computer has a unique (A) of the ______ can trasmit data (A) packet (B) data
Assembly language (B) Machine language (C) (C) access method (D) token (E) None of these ANS
High level language (D) All of the above (E) None (D)
of these ANSWER: (B) 11. This part of operating system manages the
50. Which of the following circuit is used as a essential peripherals, such as the keyboard, screen ,
‘Memory device’ in computers? (A) Rectifier (B) disk drives, and parallel and serial ports ____ (A)
Flip-Flop (C) Comparator basic input/output system (B) secondary input/output
(D) Attenuator (E) None of these ANSWER: (B) system (C) peripheral input/output system (D)
marginal input/output system (E) None of these ANS
1. Programs from the same developer , sold bundled (A)
together , that provide better integration and share 12. ________ Viruses are often transmitted by a
common features , toolbars and menus are known floppy disk left in the floppy drive (A) Trojan horse
as .... (A) software suites (B) integrated software (B) Boot sector (C) Script (D) Logic bomb (E) None
packages (C) software processing packages (D) of these ANS (B)
personal information managers (E) none of these 13. ________ controls the way in which the computer
ANS (A) system functions and provides a means by which
2. A data warehouse is which of the following ? (A) users can interact with the computer (A) The platform
Can be updated by the end users (B) Contains (B) Application software (C) Operating system (D)
numerous naming conventions and formats (C) The motherboard (E) None of these ANS (C)
Organized around important subject areas (D)
Contains only current data (E) None of these ANS (C) 14. Servers are computers that provide resources to
other computers connected to a ___________ (A)
3. ______________ servers store and manages files mainframe (B) network (C) supercomputer (D) client
for network users. (A) Authentication (B) Main (C) (E) None of these ANS (B)
Web (D) File (E) None of these ANS (D) 15. A goal of data mining includes which of the
4. All of the following are examples of real security following? (A) To explain some observed event or
and privacy risks Except _____ (A) hackers (B) spam condition (B) To confirm that data exists (C) To
(C) viruses (D) identify theft (E) None of these ANS analyze data for expected relationships (D) To create
(B) a new data warehouse (E) None of these ANS (A)
5. ___________ terminals (formerly known as cash
registers) are often connected to complex inventory 16. URL stands for ........ (A) Universal Research List
and sales computer systems . (A) Data (B) Sales (C) (B) Universal Resource List (C) Uniform Resource
Query (D) (Point-of-sale (POS) (E) None of these Locator (D) Uniform Research Locator (E) None of
ANS (B) these ANS (C)

Karan Dhami-15
17. A database management system (DBMS) is the number of entities (C) minimize the number of
a ............ (A) hardware system used to create , tables (D) minimize the number of redundancy (E)
maintain and provide controlled access to a database None of these ANS (D)
(B) hardware system used to create, maintain, and 26. Granting an outside organization access to
provide uncontrolled access to a database. (C) internet web pages is often implemented using a (n)
software system used to create, maintain, and provide ____ (A) extranet (B) intranet (C) internet (D) hacker
uncontrolled access to a database. (D) software (E) None of these ANS (A)
system used to create, maintain, and provide 27. Which term identifies a specific computer on the
controlled access to a database. (E) None of these web and the main page of the entire site (A) URL (B)
ANS (D) Web site address (C) Hyperlink (D) Domain name (E)
18. Which of the following is NOT a goal of None of these ANS (A)
transaction processing system ? (A) Capture , process 28. The code that relational database management
and store transactions (B) Produce a variety of systems use to perform their database task is referred
documents related to routine business activities (C) to as ..... (A) QBE (B) SQL (C) OLAP (D) Sequel
Reduce manual effort associated with processing Server (E) None of these ANS (B)
business transactions (D) Produce standard reports 29. Chip is a common nickname for a (n): (A)
used for management decision making (E) None of transistor (B) resistor (C) integrated circuit (D)
these ANS () semiconductor (E) ANS (c)
19. A Proxy server is used for which of the
following? (A) To provide security against 30. The purpose of the primary key in a database is
unauthorized users (B) To process client requests for to: (A) unlock the database (B) provide a map of the
web pages (C) To process client requests for database data (C) uniquely identify a record (D) establish
access (D) To provide TCP/IP (E) None of these ANS constraints on database operations. (E) None of these
(B) ANS (B)
20. When data changes in multiple lists and all lists 31. A _________ contains specific rules and words
are not updated, this causes: (A) data redundancy (B) that express the logical steps of an algorithm. (A)
information overload (C) duplicate data (D) data programming language (B) syntax (C) programming
inconsistency (E) None of these ANS (D) structure (D) logic chart (E) None of these ANS ()
21. _____________ are words that a programming
language has set aside for its own use. (A) Control 32. The design of the network is called the network:
worlds (B) Reserved words (C) Control structures (D) (A) architecture (B) server (C) transmission (D) type
Reserved keys (E) None of these ANS (B) (E) None of these ANS (A)
33. The most frequently used instructions of a
22. What is the primary difference between a virus computer program are likely to be fetched from: (A)
and a worm? (A) A worm has the ability to self the hard disk (B) cache memory (C) RAM (D)
propagate from an infected user's computer to other registers (E) None of these ANS (B)
computers (B) A worm is usually written by a 34. The ____________ contains data descriptions and
cracker: Script bunnies do not have the skills to defines the name, data type, and length of each field
develop a worm program (C) A virus is very harmful in the database. (A) data dictionary (B) data table (C)
to the computers it infects : a worm is not a serious a data record (D) data field (E) None of these ANS (A)
problem (D) Anti-virus software is effective in
fighting viruses but not worms (E) None of these 35. Personal logs or journal entries posted
ANS () on the Web are known as: (A) listservs (B) Webcasts
23. ______ describe what is database fields. (A) (C) blogs (D) subject directories (E) None of these
Structures (B) Field markers (C) Field definition (D) ANS (C)
Field names (E) None of these ANS (D) 36. A(n) _______ uses pictures (called icons) and
24. You must install a (n) ____________ on a menus displayed on the screen to send commands to
network if you want to share a broadband Internet the computer system. (A) command - based user
connection. interface (B) GUI (C) system utility (D) API (E)
(A) router (B) modem (C) node (D) cable (E) None of None of these ANS (B)
these ANS (A) 37. The _____ manual tells you how to use a software
25. A goal of normalization is to __________ (A) program. (A) documentation (B) programming (C)
minimize the number of relationships (B) minimize technical (D) user (E) None of these ANS ()

Karan Dhami-16
38. Which of the following is NOT a type of 50. Which of the following would most likely NOT
broadband Internet connection? (A) Cable (B) DSL be a symptom of a virus? (A) Existing program files
(C) Dial-up (D) Satellite (E) None of these ANS (C) and icons disappear. (B) The CD-ROM stops
functioning. (C) The Web browser opens to an
39. Software, such as viruses, worms and Trojan unusual home page. (D) Odd messages or images are
horses, that has a malicious intent, is known as: (A) displayed on the screen. (E) None of these ANS (B)
spyware (B) adware (C) spam (D) malware (E) None
of these ANS (D) 40. Making a field ______ means 1. A passive threat to computer security is— (1)
that it cannot be left blank. (A) numeric (B) required Malicious Intent (2) Sabotage (3) Accident Errors
(C) calculated (D) validated (E) None of these ANS (4) Espionage Agents (5) None of these
(B) 2. The Secure Electronic Transaction (SET)
41. _________ is the process of finding errors in specification— (1) is a notice, issued and verified by
software code. (A) Debugging (B) Compiling (C) a certificate authority, that guarantees a user or Web
Testing (D) Running (E) None pf these ANS () site is legitimate (2) provides private-key encryption
of all data that passes between a client and a server
42. ____________ are viruses that are triggered by (3) allows users to choose an encryption scheme for
the passage of time or on a certain date. (A) Boot- the data that passes between a client and a server (4)
sector viruses (B) Macro viruses (C) Time bombs (D) uses a public-key encryption to secure credit-card
Worms (E) None of these Ans (C) transaction systems (5) None of these
43. Linux is a (n) ____________ operating system. 3. ……………allows wireless mobile devices to
(A) open-source (B) Microsoft (C) Windows (D) access the Internet and its services such as the Web
Mac (E) None of these ANS (A) and e-mail— (1) TCP/IP (2) Ethernet (3)WAP (4)
44. What is a backup? (A) Restoring the information Token ring (5) None of these
backup (B) An exact copy of a system's information 4. 'DOS' floppy disk does not have— (1) A Boot
(C) The ability to get a system up and running in the Record (2) A File Allocation Table (3) A Root
event of a system crash or failure (D) All of these (E) Directory (4) Virtual Memory (5) BIOS
None of these ANS (D) 5. 'MICR' technology used for clearance of cheques
45. Which of the following places the common data by banks refers to— (1) Magnetic Ink Character
elements in order from smallest to largest (A) Recognition
character, file, record, field, database (B) character, (2) Magnetic Intelligence Character Recognition (3)
record, field, database, file (C) character, field, Magnetic Information Cable Recognition (4)
record, file, database (D) Bit, byte, character, record, Magnetic Insurance Cases Recognition (5) None of
field, file, database, (E) None of these ANS (C) these
6. All the information collected during database
46. The internet is ...... (A) a large network of development is stored in a— (1) repository (2) data
networks (B) an internal communication system for a warehouse (3) RAD (4) CASE (5) None of these
business (C) a communication system for the Indian 7. The……………….component is used by the data
government (D) All of these (E) None of these ANS analyst to create the queries that access the database.
(D) (1) data extraction (2) end-user query tool (3) end-
47. ____________ are lists of commands that appear user presentation tool (4) data store (5) None of these
on the screen. (A) GUIs (B) Icons (C) Menus (D) 8. A(n)…………….allows network users to share a
Windows (E) None of these ANS (C) single copy of software, which resides on the network
48. Which of the following statements is FALSE server. (1) single-user license agreement (2) network
concerning file names? (A) Files may share the same site license (3) end-user license agreement (4)
name or the same extension but not both (B) Every business software license (5) None of these
file in the same folder must have a unique name (C) 9. A polymorphic virus— (1) modifies its program
File extension is another name for file type (D) The code each time it attaches itself to another program or
file extension comes before the dot (.) followed by the file (2) is a malicious-logic program that copies itself
file name (E) None of these ANS (D) repeatedly in memory or on a disk drive until no
49. Verification of a login name and password is memory or disk space remains (3) a malicious-logic
known as: (A) configuration (B) accessibility (C) program that hides within or looks like a legitimate
authentication (D) logging in (E) None of these ANS program (4) infects a program file, but still reports the
(C)

Karan Dhami-17
size and creation date of the original, uninfected 18. RSA is— (1) Symmetric Cryptosystem (2)
program (5) None of these Asymmetric Cryptosystem (3) Block Cypher (4)
10. Microwave transmission is used in environments Digital Signature (5) None of these
where installing physical transmission media is— (1)
difficult or impossible and where lineof-sight 19. A DVD-RAM is similar to a………………except
transmission is unavailable (2) easy or promising and it has storage capacities up to 5.2 GB. (1) CD-R (2)
where line-ofsight transmission is unavailable (3) floppy disk (3) CD-RW (4) hard disk (5) None of
difficult or impossible and where lineof-sight these
transmission is available (4) easy or promising and 20. When you are selecting a mouse for a particular
where line-ofsight transmission is available (5) None computer system, what is the most important
of these consideration? (1) The type of drivers that come with
11. Which is NOT a good Web security strategy? (1) the mouse (2) The length of the mouse cord (3) The
Restrict access to the Web server; keep a minimum type of connector the mouse is equipped with (4) The
number of ports open (2) Limit the users who can number of buttons the mouse has (5) None of these
load software, edit or add files. (3) Add demo 21. How is power supplied to a low-power USB
programs, so users can test system without accessing device? (1) Through a power cable (2) From an
production data. (4) Remove unnecessary compilers external power supply (3) Directly from the
and interpreters. (5) None of these computer's power supply (4) Through the USB cable
12. The altering of data so that it is not usable unless (5) None of these
the changes are undone is— (1) Biometrics (2) 22. All of the following are basic principles of net
Compression (3) Encryption (4) Ergonomics (5) None works, except— (1) each computer must have a
of these network card (2) there must be communications
13. The word FIP stands for— (1) File Translate media connecting the network hardware devices (3)
Protocol (2) File Transit Protocol (3) File Typing there must be at least one connecting device (4) each
Protocol (4) File Transfer Protocol (5) None of these computer must have software that supports the
movement of information (5) None of these
14. Voice mail— (1) is the exchange of text messages 23. The………….data mining technique derives rules
and computer files transmitted via a communications from real-world case examples. (1) Rule discover (2)
network such as a local area network or the Internet Signal processing
(2) permits users to converse in real time with each (3) Neural nets (4) Case-based reasoning (5) None of
other via the computer while connected to the Internet these
(3) functions much like an answering machine, 24. …………….are used to identify a user who
allowing callers to leave a voice message for the returns to a Website. (1) Cookies (2) Plug-ins (3)
called party (4) involves using video and computer Scripts (4) ASPs (5) None of these
technology to conduct a meeting between participants 25. Which one of the following objects is passed to a
at geographically separate locations (5) None of these Java Bean when one of its properties is set via a JSP
action? (1) Servlet Request (2) Http Servlet Request
15. A communication processor that connects (3) Servlet Response (4) Http Servlet Response (5)
dissimilar networks by providing the translation from None of these
one set of protocol to another is— (1) Bridge (2) Answers : 1. (1) 2. (4) 3. (3) 4. (4) 5. (1) 6. (2) 7. (2)
Gateway (3) Router (4) Modem (5) All of these 8. (2) 9. (1) 10. (4) 11. (4) 12. (3) 13. (1) 14. (3) 15.
(2) 16. (2) 17. (1) 18. (4) 19. (3) 20. (3) 21. (4) 22. (2)
16. Which of the following is a generalpurpose 23. (3) 24. (1) 25. (3)
programming language, designed by Sun
Microsystems, and well suited for use on the Web? 26. Which of the following is an example of an input
(1) VB Script (2) Java Script (3) CSS (4) Java (5) device?  scanner (correct)  speaker  CD 
None of these printer
17. This.............tier processes HTTP protocol,
scripting tasks, performs calculations, and provides 27. All of the following are examples of storage
access to data. (1) Client (2) Applications/Web server devices EXCEPT: hard disk drives.  printers.
(3) Enterprise server (4) DBA (5) None of these (correct)  floppy disk drives.  CD drives.

28. The ____________, also called the brains of the


computer, is responsible for processing data.
Karan Dhami-18
 motherboard  memory  RAM  central 40. ____________ is the science revolving around the
processing unit (CPU) (correct) use of nano structures to build devices on an
extremely small scale.  Nanotechnology (correct)
29. The CPU and memory are located on the:  Micro-technology  Computer forensics 
 expansion board.  motherboard. (correct)  Artificial intelligence
storage device.  output device. 41. Which of the following is the correct order of the
four major functions of a computer?  Process Ã
30. Word processing, spreadsheet, and photo-editing Output à Input à Storage  Input à OutputÃ
are examples of:  application software. (correct)  Process à Storage  Process à Storage à Input Ã
system software.  operating system software.  Output  Input à Process à Output à Storage
platform software. (correct)
31. ____________ is a set of computer programs used 42. ____________ bits equal one byte.  Eight
on a computer to help perform tasks.  An (correct)  Two  One thousand  One million
instruction  Software (correct)  Memory  A
processor 43. The binary language consists of ____________
digit(s).  8  2 (correct)  1,000  1
32. System software is the set of programs that
enables your computers hardware devices and 44. A byte can hold one ____________ of data.
____________ software to work together.   bit  binary digit  character (correct) 
management  processing  utility  application kilobyte
(correct)
45. ____________ controls the way in which the
33. The PC (personal computer) and the Apple computer system functions and provides a means by
Macintosh are examples of two different:  which users can interact with the computer.  The
platforms. (correct)  applications.  programs.  platform  The operating system (correct) 
storage devices. Application software  The motherboard
34. Apple Macintoshes (Macs) and PCs use different
____________ to process data and different operating 46. The operating system is the most common type of
systems.  languages  methods  CPUs (correct) ____________ software.  communication 
 storage devices application  system (correct)  word-processing
software
35. Servers are computers that provide resources to
other computers connected to a:  network. (correct) 47. ____________ are specially designed computer
 mainframe.  supercomputer.  client. chips that reside inside other devices, such as your car
or your electronic thermostat.  Servers 
36. Smaller and less expensive PC-based servers are Embedded computers (correct)  Robotic computers
replacing ____________ in many businesses.   Mainframes
supercomputers  clients  laptops  mainframes 48. The steps and tasks needed to process data, such
(correct) as responses to questions or clicking an icon, are
37. ____________ are specially designed computers called:  instructions. (correct)  the operating
that perform complexcalculations extremely rapidly. system.  application software.  the system unit.
 Servers  Supercomputers (correct)  Laptops
 Mainframes 1. Which of the following is/are characteristics of
Computer? (A) Diligence (B) Versatility (C) Reliability
38. DSL is an example of a(n) ____________ (D) All of the Above
connection.  network  wireless  slow Answer
 broadband (correct) (D) All of the Above
2. Faulty inputs lead to faulty results. It is known as
_______ (A) Diligence (B) Versatility (C) GIGO (D) None
39. The difference between people with access to of the Above
computers and the Internet and those without this Answer
access is known as the: digital divide. (correct)  (C) GIGO
Internet divide.  Web divide.  broadband divide. 3. GIGO stands for______ (A) Garbage In Garbage Out
(B) Gateway In Gateway Out (C) Gopher In Gopher Out
(D) Geographic In Geographic Out
Karan Dhami-19
Answer Answer
(A) Garbage In Garbage Out (B) Stored program
4. The capacity to perform multiple tasks simultaneously is 4. Which of the following was a small experimental
termed as ______ (A) Diligence (B) Versatility (C) machine based on Neumann’s stored program concept?
Reliability (D) All of the Above (A) Analytical engine (B) Pascaline (C) Manchester Mark
Answer I (D) None of the Above
(B) Versatility Answer
5. A computer does not suffer from tiredness and lack of (C) Manchester Mark I
concentration. It is known as _______ (A) Diligence (B) 5. Third Generation computers were based on _______ (A)
Versatility (C) GIGO (D) None of the Above IC (B) Vacuum tube (C) transistor (D) None of the Above
Answer Answer
(A) Diligence (A) IC
6. First Generation computers used ______ for Circuitry 6. In EDSAC, an addition operation was completed in
and ________ for memory (A) Transistor and Magnetic _____ micro seconds. (A) 4000 (B) 3000 (C) 2000 (D)
Core (B) IC and Magnetic Memory (C) Vacuum tubes and 1500
Magnetic drum (D) IC and Magnetic Core Answer
Answer (D) 1500
(C) Vacuum tubes and Magnetic drum 7. ULSI stands for______ (A) Ultra Large Scale
7. Second Generation computers were based on _______ Integration (B) Ultimate Large Scale Integration (C) Upper
(A) IC (B) Vacuum tube (C) transistor (D) None of the Large Scale Integration (D) Ultra Large Script Integration
Above Answer
Answer (A) Ultra Large Scale Integration
(C) transistor 8. Which of the following is fourth generation computer?
8. FLOPS stands for______ (A) Floating Point Operation (A) INTEL 4004 (B) IBM 360
Per Second (B) File Processing Operation Per Second (C) (C) IBM 1401 (D) None of the Above
Floating Processing Operation Per Second (D) File Answer
Loading Operation Per Second (A) INTEL 4004
Answer 9. IC is made up of _________ (A) microprocessor (B)
(A) Floating Point Operation Per Second vacuum tube (C) transistor (D) None of the Above
9. Which language was used to program Second Answer
Generation computers? (A) Binary Coded language (B) (C) transistor
Assembly language (C) Machine language (D) None of the 10. Father of modern computer______ (A) Charles
Above Babbage (B) Alan Turing (C) Ted Hoff (D) None of the
Answer Above
(B) Assembly language Answer
10. EDSAC stands for________ (A) Electronic Delay (B) Alan Turing
Storage Automatic Computer (B) Electronic Discrete 1. A hybrid computer is the one having combined
Storage Automatic Computer (C) Electronic Delay Serial properties of ________ (A) Micro & Mini computers (B)
Automatic Computer (D) Electronic Discrete Storage Mini & Super Computers (C) Mainframe & Super
Automatic Computer Computers (D) Analog & Digital computers
Answer Answer
(A) Electronic Delay Storage Automatic Computer (D) Analog & Digital computers
1. Instructions and data can be stored in the memory of 2. Which of the following uses a handheld Operating
Computer for automatically directing the flow of Systems? (A) Super Computer (B) Laptop (C) Mainframe
operations. It is called _____ concept. (A) Objective (D) PDA
Programming (B) Stored program Answer
(C) Both (A) and (B) (D) None of the Above (D) PDA
Answer 3. A _______ terminal can display images as well as text.
(B) Stored program (A) text (B) dumb (C) graphical (D) None of the Above
2. “Stored Program” concept was developed by ______ Answer
(A) Maurice Wilkes (B) Von Neumann (C) M.H.A. (C) graphical
Newman (D) None of the Above 4. The word length of Micro computers lies in the range
Answer between ________ (A) 8 and 16 bits (B) 8 and 21 bits (C)
(B) Von Neumann 8 and 24 bits (D) 8 and 32 bits
3. Electronic Discrete Variable Automatic Answer
Computer(EDVAC) was designed on __________ (D) 8 and 32 bits
concept. (A) Objective Programming (B) Stored program
(C) Both (A) and (B) (D) None of the Above

Karan Dhami-20
5. The fastest and most expensive computers are______ 6. The most famous Recurrent Neural Network is _______
(A) Super Computers (B) Quantum Computers (C) (A) Perceptrons (B) Radial Basis Networks (C) Hopfield
Mainframe Computers (D) Micro Computers net (D) None of the Above
Answer Answer
(A) Super Computers (C) Hopfield net
6. Which of the following is the smallest and fastest 7. Which neural network allows feedback signal? (A) Feed
computer imitating brain working? (A) Super Computer forward Neural Network (B) Recurrent Neural Network
(B) Quantum Computer (C) Mainframe Computer (D) (C) Both(A) & (B) (D) None of the Above
PDA Answer
Answer (B) Recurrent Neural Network
(B) Quantum Computer 8. Which of the following is/are application(s) of Neural
7. A _____ terminal does not process or store data. (A) Network? (A) Pattern recognition (B) Mobile Computing
dumb (B) intelligent (C) Both(A) & (B) (D) None of the (C) Speech reading(Lip-reading) (D) All of the Above
Above Answer
Answer (D) All of the Above
(A) dumb 9. Which algorithm is used in layered Feed forward Neural
8. The user generally applies _________ to access Network? (A) Back propagation algorithm (B) Binary
mainframe or super computer? (A) node (B) terminal (C) Search (C) Both(A) & (B) (D) None of the Above
desktop (D) None of the Above Answer
Answer (A) Back propagation algorithm
(B) terminal 10. Radial Basis Function (RBF) networks have _____
9. Desktop and Personal computers are also known layers. (A) One (B) Four (C) Two (D) Three
as_______ (A) Super Computer (B) Quantum Computer Answer
(C) Mainframe Computer (D) Micro Computer (D) Three
Answer 1. The chip used in computers, is made of ______ (A)
(D) Micro Computer Silicon (B) Iron Oxide (C) Chromium (D) None of the
10. Graphical terminals are divided into two types. They Above
are _____ (A) text and dumb (B) dumb and intelligent (C) Answer
vector mode and raster mode (D) None of the Above (A) Silicon
Answer 2. Fourth Generation computers were based on _______
(C) vector mode and raster mode (A) IC (B) Vacuum tube (C) transistor (D)
1. Which language is used for Artificial Intelligence (AI)? Microprocessors
(A) FORTRAN (B) COBOL (C) C (D) PROLOG Answer
Answer (D) Microprocessors
(D) PROLOG 3. The first computer language developed was______ (A)
2. Who coined the term “Artificial Intelligence”? (A) COBOL (B) PASCAL
Charles Babbage (B) Alan Tuning (C) Von Neumann (D) (C) BASIC (D) FORTRAN
John McCarthy Answer
Answer (D) FORTRAN
(D) John McCarthy 4. The first calculator that can perform all four arithmetic
3. _________ is a computational model based on the operations(Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication, Division)
structure of biological neural networks? (A) Artificial was known as______ (A) Pascaline (B) Slide Rule (C)
Neural Network (ANN) (B) Biological Network (C) Step Reckoner (D) None of the Above
Both(A) & (B) (D) None of the Above Answer
Answer (C) Step Reckoner
(A) Artificial Neural Network (ANN) 5. The first computer spreadsheet program was_________
4. A neural network in which the signal passes in only one (A) Lotus 1-2-3 (B) MS Excel (C) Visicalc (D) None of
direction is called _____ (A) Feed forward Neural the Above
Network (B) Recurrent Neural Network (C) Both(A) & Answer
(B) (D) None of the Above (C) Visicalc
Answer 6. Which of the following is an example for fourth
(A) Feed forward Neural Network generation language(4GL)? (A) COBOL (B) PowerBuilder
5. _________ is an artificial neural network with multiple (C) FORTRAN (D) None of the Above
hidden layers between the input and output layers? (A) Answer
Deep neural network (B) Shallow neural network (C) (B) PowerBuilder
Both(A) & (B) (D) None of the Above 7. VDU stands for________ (A) Video Display Unit (B)
Answer Visual Display Unit (C) Video Divide Unit (D) None of
(A) Deep neural network the Above

Karan Dhami-21
Answer 9. ALU and Control Unit have special purpose locations
(B) Visual Display Unit called _______ (A) Registers (B) Mother Board (C)
8. Which language is directly understood by the computer Sockets (D) None of the Above
without translation program? (A) BASIC (B) Assembly Answer
language (C) Machine language (D) C language (A) Registers
Answer 10. The communication line between CPU memory and
(C) Machine language Peripherals is called a _________ (A) Registers (B)
9. Herman Hollerith developed a machine called________ Mother Board (C) Bus (D) None of the Above
(A) Pascaline (B) Analytical engine (C) Census Tabulator Answer
(D) Tabulating Machine (C) Bus
Answer 1. A communication system that transfers data between the
(D) Tabulating Machine components inside a computer or between computers is
10. Electronic Delay Storage Automatic called _______ A. Port B. Bus C. Registers D. None of the
Computer(EDSAC) was invented by _________ Above
(A) Herman Hollerith (B) JW Mauchy (C) John Von Answer
Neumann (D) None of the Above B. Bus
Answer 2. Which bus connects all the internal components of a
(C) John Von Neumann computer such as CPU and memory to the main
1. Which registers can interact with secondary memory? board(motherboard)? A. Expansion Bus B. External Bus
(A) Register (B) Memory Address Register(MAR) (C) C. Internal Bus D. None of the Above
Instruction Register(IR) (D) None of the Above Answer
Answer C. Internal Bus
(B) Memory Address Register(MAR) 3. A bus that connects a computer to Peripheral devices is
2. Which Flip Flop is used to store data in registers? (A) D called _______ A. System Bus B. Memory Bus C. Front-
Flip Flop (B) JK Flip Flop (C) RS Flip Flop (D) None of Side Bus D. External Bus
the Above Answer
Answer D. External Bus
(A) D Flip Flop 4. External Bus is also referred as _________ A. System
3. ISP stands for______ (A) Instruction Standard Bus B. Memory Bus C. Front-Side Bus D. Expansion Bus
Processing (B) Instruction Standard Processor (C) Answer
Information Set Processing (D) Instruction Set Processor D. Expansion Bus
Answer 5. The Command to access the memory or the I/O device
(D) Instruction Set Processor is carried by ______ A. Address Bus B. Data Bus C.
4. The decoded instruction is stored in ______ (A) Control Bus D. None of the Above
Register (B) Memory Address Register(MAR) (C) Answer
Instruction Register(IR) (D) None of the Above C. Control Bus
Answer 6. A computer bus that is used to specify a Physical
(C) Instruction Register(IR) address? A. Address Bus B. Data Bus C. Control Bus D.
5. Which is not an integral part of computer? (A) CPU (B) None of the Above
Monitor (C) Mouse (D) UPS Answer
Answer A. Address Bus
(D) UPS 7. A bus that transfer data from one component to another
6. The most frequently used instructions of a computer or between computers is called _________ A. Address Bus
program are likely to be fetched from ______ (A) Hard B. Data Bus C. Control Bus D. None of the Above
disk (B) ROM (C) RAM (D) Cache Answer
Answer B. Data Bus
(D) Cache 8. RISC stands for________ A. Reverse Instruction Set
7. The primary aim of computer process is to convert the Computer B. Reverse Information Set Computer C.
data into ______ (A) table Reduced Information Set Computer D. Reduced
(B) graph (C) file (D) information Instruction Set Computer
Answer Answer
(D) information D. Reduced Instruction Set Computer
8. The main circuit-board of the system unit is _______ 9. ________ is a register for Short-term, intermediate
(A) RAM (B) Mother Board (C) Hard disk (D) None of storage of arithmetic and logic data in a Computer’s CPU.
the Above A. Accumulator B. Bus C. Buffer D. None of the Above
Answer Answer
(B) Mother Board A. Accumulator

Karan Dhami-22
10. _________ is a group of commands for a CPU in 10. Which of the following bus structure is usually used to
machine language. A. Information Set B. Instruction Set C. connect I/O devices? A. Single bus B. Multiple bus C. Star
Buffer D. None of the Above bus D. None of the Above
Answer Answer
B. Instruction Set A. Single bus
1. Von Neumann Architecture is a _______ A. Multiple 1. An interface that provides I/O transfer of data directly to
Instruction Multiple Data(MIMD) B. Single Instruction and form the memory unit and peripheral is termed
Multiple Data(SIMD) C. Multiple Instruction Single as________ A. DDA B. Serial interface C. Direct Memory
Data(MISD) D. Single Instruction Single Data(SISD) Access (DMA) D. None of the Above
Answer Answer
D. Single Instruction Single Data(SISD) C. Direct Memory Access (DMA)
2. Programming that actually controls the path of signals 2. A basic instruction that can be interpreted by computer
or data within computer is called________ A. Assembly generally has ________ A. An operand and an address B.
language Programming B. Machine language decoder and an accumulator C. Sequence register and
Programming C. Micro Programming D. None of the decoder D. None of the Above
Above Answer
Answer A. An operand and an address
C. Micro Programming 3. The load instruction is mostly used to designate a
3. CISC stands for _________ A. Compound Instruction transfer from memory to a processor register known
Set Computer B. Complex Information Set Computer C. as_________ A. Accumulator B. Instruction Register C.
Compound Information Set Computer D. Complex Program counter D. Memory address Register
Instruction Set Computer Answer
Answer A. Accumulator
D. Complex Instruction Set Computer 4. The communication between the components in a
4. The register which holds the address of the location to microcomputer takes place via the address and ______ A.
or from which data are to be transferred is known I/O bus B. Data bus C. Address bus D. None of the Above
as_______ Answer
A. Instruction Register B. Control register C. Memory B. Data bus
Address Register D. None of the Above 5. The operation executed on data stored in registers is
Answer called_______ A. Macro-operation B. Micro-operation C.
C. Memory Address Register Bit-operation D. None of the Above
5. An interrupt can be temporarily ignored by the counter Answer
is called _______ A. Maskable Interrupt B. Non-maskable B. Micro-operation
Interrupt C. vectored Interrupt D. None of the Above 6. Which register keeps tracks of the instructions in the
Answer program stored in memory? A. Address Register B. Index
A. Maskable Interrupt Register C. Program Counter D. None of the Above
6. The computer performs all mathematical and logical Answer
operations inside its _______ A. Visual Display Unit B. C. Program Counter
Memory Unit C. Output Unit D. Central Processing Unit 7. In which addressing mode the operand is given
Answer explicitly in the instruction? A. Absolute
D. Central Processing Unit B. Immediate C. Indirect D. Direct
7. Which of the following Unit can be used to measure the Answer
speed of a computer? A. BAUD B. SYPS B. Immediate
C. MIPS D. None of the Above 8. When necessary, the results are transferred from the
Answer CPU to main memory by _______ A. I/O devices. B. CPU.
C. MIPS C. Shift registers. D. None of the Above.
8. The circuit used to store one bit of data is known Answer
as_____ A. Encoder B. OR C. Flip Flop D. None of the C. Shift registers.
Above 9. A group of bits that tell the computer to perform a
Answer specific operation is known as_______ A. Instruction code
C. Flip Flop B. Micro-operation C. Accumulator D. Register
9. The control unit controls other units by generating Answer
control and _______ A. Command Signals B. Timing A. Instruction code
signals C. Transfer signals D. None of the Above 10. The average time required to reach a storage location
Answer in memory and obtain its contents is called_____. A.
B. Timing signals Latency time. B. Access time. C. Turnaround time. D.
Response time.
Answer

Karan Dhami-23
B. Access time. 1. The pattern of printed lines on most products are called
1. The addressing mode which makes use of in-direction ________ A. OCR B. prices C. bar codes D. None of the
pointers is ______ A. Offset addressing mode B. Relative Above
addressing mode C. Indirect addressing mode D. None of Answer
the Above C. bar codes
Answer 2. MICR stands for ____________ A. Magnetic Ink
C. Indirect addressing mode Colour Recognition B. Magnetic Ink Code Recognition C.
2. Which addressing mode is most suitable to change the Magnetic Ink Computer Recognition D. Magnetic Ink
normal sequence of execution of instructions? A. Character Recognition
Immediate B. Indirect C. Relative D. None of the Above Answer
Answer D. Magnetic Ink Character Recognition
C. Relative 3. The OCR recognises the _______ of the characters with
3. Which of the following is used as an intermediate to the help of light source. A. Size B. Shape C. Colour D.
extend the processor BUS? A. Gateway B. Router C. None of the Above
Connector D. Bridge Answer
Answer B. Shape
D. Bridge 4. Which Unit is used to measure the speed of a printer? A.
4. The method of accessing the I/O devices by repeatedly DPI B. CPM C. PPM D. None of the Above
checking the status flags is_________ A. Memory-mapped Answer
I/O B. Program-controlled I/O C. I/O mapped D. None of C. PPM
the Above 5. Which of the following groups consist of only Input
Answer devices? A. Mouse, Keyboard, Monitor B. Mouse,
B. Program-controlled I/O Keyboard, Printer C. Mouse, Keyboard, Plotter D. Mouse,
5. The process where in the processor constantly checks Keyboard, Scanner
the status flags is called as _________ A. Polling B. Answer
Inspection C. Reviewing D. None of the Above D. Mouse, Keyboard, Scanner
Answer 6. USB refers to a ______ A. storage device B. processor
A. Polling C. port type D. None of the Above
6. The branch logic that provides decision making Answer
capabilities in the control unit is known as_______ A. C. port type
conditional transfer B. unconditional transfer C. Both (A) 7. OCR is used for the preparation of _________ A.
and (B) D. None of the above electricity bills B. telephone bills C. insurance premium D.
Answer All of the Above
B. unconditional transfer Answer
7. Interrupts that are initiated by an instruction are_______ D. All of the Above
A. internal B. external 8. A joystick is primarily used to/for ________ A. print
C. hardware D. software text B. draw picture C. computer gaming D. None of the
Answer Above
D. software Answer
8. Interrupts which are initiated by an I/O drive are C. computer gaming
___________ A. internal B. external C. Both (A) and (B) 9. The ______ may also be called the screen or monitor. A.
D. All of the above Scanner B. Display C. Hard Disk D. None of the Above
Answer Answer
B. external B. Display
9. Content of the program counter is added to the address 10. What type of devices are computer speakers or
part of the instruction in order to obtain the effective headphones? A. Input B. Output C. Input/Output D. None
address is called_______ A. relative address mode. B. of the Above
index addressing mode. C. register mode. D. implied Answer
mode. B. Output
Answer 1. Which of these is a pointing and drop device? A.
A. relative address mode. Scanner B. Printer
10. A register capable of shifting its binary information C. Keyboard D. Mouse
either to the right or the left is called a_________ A. Answer
parallel register. B. serial register. C. shift register. D. D. Mouse
storage register. 2. A parallel port is most often used by ________ A.
Answer Scanner B. Printer C. Keyboard D. Mouse
C. shift register. Answer
B. Printer

Karan Dhami-24
3. A hard copy would prepared on a _______ A. Dot D. Circuit Board
matrix Printer B. Plotter C. Type Writer Terminal D. All 5. A ___________ is used to create a digital representation
of the above of a printed document or photograph. A. Video Digitizer
Answer B. Scanner
D. All of the above C. Monitor D. None of the Above
4. External devices such as printers, keyboards and Answer
modems are known as _________ A. Special Buys B. Add B. Scanner
on Devices C. Peripherals D. All of the above 6. The wheel located between the two standard buttons on
Answer a mouse is used to ________ A. click in Web pages. B.
C. Peripherals scroll. C. click and select items. D. jump to different Web
5. The higher the resolution of a monitor, the _________ pages
A. larger the pixels. B. closer together the pixels. C. Answer
further apart the pixels. D. less clear the screen is. B. scroll.
Answer 7. Any data and instruction entered in the memory of a
B. closer together the pixels. computer is__________ A. Storage B. Output C. Input D.
6. In laser printers, printing is achieved by deflecting laser Information
beam on to __________ surface of a drum. A. Magnetic B. Answer
Electric C. Photosensitive D. None of the Above C. Input
Answer 8. Which input device resembles an upside-down mouse?
C. Photosensitive A. Trackball B. Pointing stick C. Track pad D. Touch pad
7. The rate at which scanning is repeated in a CRT is Answer
called ________ A. Resolution B. Refresh rate C. A. Trackball
Bandwidth D. None of the Above 9. Bar-code readers use light to read ______ A. UPCs B.
Answer UPSs C. POSs D. optical marks
B. Refresh rate Answer
8. An example of peripheral equipment is _______ A. A. UPCs
Printer B. CPU 10. The display size of a monitor is measured _________
C. Spread Sheet D. None of the Above A. diagonally. B. horizontally. C. vertically. D. None of
Answer the Above
A. Printer Answer
9. Trackball is an example of a/an _____ A. Output device A. diagonally.
B. Printing device C. Pointing device D. None of the 1. The computer or system peripherals that receives data
Above from processing unit are called ___________ A. Input
Answer Devices B. Output Devices C. Both (A) and (B) D. None
C. Pointing device of the Above
10. Which is the best position for operating the mouse? A. Answer
Tail away from the user B. Tail facing the right C. Tail B. Output Devices
facing the left D. Tail towards the user 2. A displaying screen in which text is presented in one
Answer colour and background is of any other colour is called
D. Tail towards the user ________ A. monochrome screen
1. First Computer mouse was built by_______ A. Douglas B. high resolution screen C. low resolution screen D.
Engelbart B. William English C. Robert Zawacki D. Von medium resolution screen
Neumann Answer
Answer A. monochrome screen
A. Douglas Engelbart 3. LED stands for _________ A. Low Emission Display B.
2. Which of the following is not a hardware? A. Processor Liquid Emitting Display C. Less Emitting Diode D. Light
B. Printer C. Mouse D. Java Emitting Diode
Answer Answer
D. Java D. Light Emitting Diode
3. The transfer of data from a CPU to peripheral devices of 4. A marker on the computer screen used to show the
computer is achieved through ________ A. Modem B. current position is called _________ A. coloured marker
Interface C. Buffer D. I/O Ports B. position checker C. cursor D. None of the Above
Answer Answer
D. I/O Ports C. cursor
4. A thin plate or board that contains electronic 5. Which of the following device is used to enter the text
components is called ___________ A. Hard Disk B. RAM and numerical data in a computer? A. Plotter B. Scanner
C. ROM D. Circuit Board C. Printer D. Keyboard
Answer Answer

Karan Dhami-25
D. Keyboard 7. Laser printers and Ink-jet printers are an example of
6. Printer resolution is usually measured in ________ A. _______ A. Impact B. Non Impact C. Both (A) and (B) D.
Characters Per Minute (CPM) B. Pixels Per Inch (PPI) C. None of the Above
Pages Per Minute (PPM) D. Dots Per Inch (DPI) Answer
Answer B. Non Impact
D. Dots Per Inch (DPI) 8. Which of the following is used as principal flight
7. _______ is an input device that converts analog control in the cockpit of many air crafts? A. Graphic
information into digital form. A. Plotter B. Track Ball C. Tablet B. Joy Stick C. Bar Code reader D. Magnetic Stripe
Light Pen D. Digitizer reader
Answer Answer
D. Digitizer B. Joy Stick
8. __________ is a special type of optical scanner used to 9. TFT stands for ________ A. Thick Film Transistor B.
recognize the type of mark made by Pen or Pencil. A. Thin Film Transistor
Optical Character Reader B. Bar code Reader C. Optical C. Thin Film Transmitter D. Thick Film Transmitter
Mark Reader D. None of the Above Answer
Answer B. Thin Film Transistor
C. Optical Mark Reader 10. Which of the following is used at Point of Sales to
9. Which of the following is non-emissive display? A. input product information? A. Graphic Tablet B. MICR C.
LED B. LCD C. Both (A) and (B) D. None of the Above Bar Code reader D. Magnetic Stripe reader
Answer Answer
B. LCD C. Bar Code reader
10. __________ printers print the characters by striking 1. Which input device is used for inserting pin numbers for
them on the ribbon which is then pressed on the paper. A. credit cards? A. Graphic Tablet B. Numeric pad C. Bar
Impact B. Non Impact C. Both (A) and (B) D. None of the Code reader D. Magnetic Stripe reader
Above Answer
Answer B. Numeric pad
A. Impact 2. _________ is a device used for reading bar coded data
1. Which input device is used to read information on a (contains light and dark lines). A. Graphic Tablet B.
credit card? A. Graphic Tablet B. Numeric Keyboard C. Numeric pad C. Bar Code reader D. Magnetic Stripe
Bar Code reader D. Magnetic Stripe reader reader
Answer Answer
D. Magnetic Stripe reader C. Bar Code reader
2. LCD stands for _________ A. Light Crystal Display B. 3. Which input device is usually a standard feature of
Low Crystal Display C. Less Crystal Display D. Liquid laptops? A. Graphic Tablet B. Numeric Keyboard C. touch
Crystal Display pad D. Magnetic Stripe reader
Answer Answer
D. Liquid Crystal Display C. touch pad
3. Which of the following works as mouse? A. Keyboard 4. __________ are devices that convert electrical energy
B. Scanner C. Track ball D. None of the Above into light. A. Emissive Displays B. Non-Emissive Displays
Answer C. Both (A) and (B) D. None of the Above
C. Track ball Answer
4. The work done by a computer operator is displayed in A. Emissive Displays
which part of computer? A. CPU B. VDU C. ALU D. 5. Which of the following input device is used in Banks to
None of the Above read magnetised characters on a Cheque? A. OCR B.
Answer MICR C. Bar Code reader D. Magnetic Stripe reader
B. VDU Answer
5. Which involves photo scanning of the text character by B. MICR
character, analysis of the scanned in image , and then 6. _________ printers print the characters without using
translation of the character image into character code? A. ribbon and it can print a complete page at a time. A.
OCR B. OMR C. Bar code Reader D. None of the Above Impact B. Non Impact C. Both (A) and (B) D. None of the
Answer Above
A. OCR Answer
6. In OCR processing, When a character is recognized, it is B. Non Impact
converted into_______ code. A. binary B. ASCII C. Both 7. Impact printers can be divided into ______ types. A.
(A) and (B) D. None of the Above Four B. Six C. Three D. Two
Answer Answer
B. ASCII D. Two

Karan Dhami-26
8. ________ printers are the printers that print one 10. Which refers to the diagonal distance between two
character at a time. A. Laser B. Drum C. Chain D. Dot coloured pixels? A. Refresh rate B. Dot Pitch C. Both (A)
Matrix and (B) D. None of the Above
Answer Answer
D. Dot Matrix B. Dot Pitch
9. Which of the following is an example for Character 1. ________ is an input device that accepts input when the
printer? A. Laser B. Drum user places a fingertip on the computer screen. A. Joy
C. Chain D. Daisy Wheel Stick B. Light Pen C. Trackball D. Touch Screen
Answer Answer
D. Daisy Wheel D. Touch Screen
10. Which of the following is an example for line printer? 2. Optical Character Recognition (OCR) is also known as
A. Laser B. Drum C. Daisy Wheel D. Dot Matrix _________ A. Intelligent Code Recognition B.
Answer Intermediate Code Recognition C. Intermediate Character
B. Drum Recognition D. Intelligent Character Recognition
1. Non-Impact Printers use ________ technologies. A. Answer
electrostatic and chemical B. thermal C. inkjet D. All of D. Intelligent Character Recognition
the Above 3. __________ is a handheld electro-optical pointing
Answer device. It is also called mouse pen. A. Joy Stick
D. All of the Above B. Light Pen C. Trackball D. Touch Screen
2. Which printers produce output by mechanical contact Answer
between the print head and paper? A. Impact B. Non- B. Light Pen
impact C. Both (A) and (B) D. None of the Above 4. Joystick allows movements in _____ directions. A. Up
Answer and Down B. Left an Right C. Both (A) and (B) D. None
A. Impact of the Above
3. ______ is a computer printer for printing vector Answer
graphics. A. Plotter B. Projector C. Both (A) and (B) D. C. Both (A) and (B)
None of the Above 5. A basic touch screen has three main components. It
Answer includes touch sensor, controller and ________ A.
A. Plotter transmitter B. receiver C. software driver D. None of the
4. Plotter can be divided into _________ types. A. Three Above
B. Six C. Four D. Two Answer
Answer C. software driver
D. Two 6. __________ an external bus standard used for
5. The refresh rate of monitor is measured in _______ A. transferring data to and from digital devices. A. Serial Port
byte B. seconds C. Hertz D. None of the Above B. Firewire C. Parallel Port D. USB
Answer Answer
C. Hertz D. USB
6. In DLP Projector, DLP stands for________ A. Direct 7. ________ printer is also called pin printer. A. Laser B.
Light Processing B. Direct Low Processing C. Digital Low Drum C. Daisy Wheel D. Dot Matrix
Processing D. Digital Light Processing Answer
Answer D. Dot Matrix
D. Digital Light Processing 8. Which of the following is also known as reflective
7. __________ is an interface for connecting eight or more scanner? A. Handheld scanner B. Flatbed scanner C. Drum
data wires. A. Serial Port B. Fire wire C. Parallel Port D. scanner D. None of the Above
None of the Above Answer
Answer B. Flatbed scanner
C. Parallel Port 9. A scanner that is moved by hand over the material being
8. ________ is a high-speed real-time interface for serial captured is known as ________ A. Sheetfed scanner B.
bus and it has data transfer up to 400 Mbps. A. Serial Port Flatbed scanner C. Drum scanner D. Handheld scanner
B. Fire wire C. Parallel Port D. None of the Above Answer
Answer D. Handheld scanner
B. Fire wire 10. MICR reads the characters by examining their shapes
9. __________ transmits one bit of data through a single in _________ form.
wire. A. Serial Port B. Fire wire C. Parallel Port D. None A. binary B. ASCII C. matrix D. None of the Above
of the Above Answer
Answer C. matrix
A. Serial Port 1. Where would you find the letters “QWERTY”? A. Joy
Stick B. Light Pen C. Numeric Pad D. Keyboard

Karan Dhami-27
Answer 2. _________ is a device which recognises physical or
D. Keyboard behavioural traits of the individual. A. Smart Card Reader
2. What does a light pen contain? A. lead B. ink C. light B. Optical Character Reader(OCR) C. Optical Mark
sensing elements D. None of the Above Reader(OCR) D. Biometric Sensor
Answer Answer
C. light sensing elements D. Biometric Sensor
3. _________ is a protocol designed for recording and 3. Printer resolution is a numerical measure of print quality
playing back music on digital synthesizers. A. Musical that is measured in _______ A. Pages Per Minute (PPM)
Interface B. Graphical User Interface (GUI) C. Musical B. Lines Per Minute (LPM)
Digital Instrument Interface (MIDI) D. None of the Above C. Characters Per Second (CPS) D. Dots Per Inch (DPI)
Answer Answer
C. Musical Digital Instrument Interface (MIDI) D. Dots Per Inch (DPI)
4. Which is an interactive device that facilitates touch 4. The toner or ink in a Laser printer is________ A. dry B.
sensation and fine-motion control in Robotics and Virtual wet C. Either (A) or (B) D. None of the Above
reality? A. Light Pen B. Joystick C. Data Glove D. None Answer
of the Above A. dry
Answer 5. A thermal transfer printer is a ________ printer that
C. Data Glove uses heat to register an impression on paper. A. Impact B.
5. Special I/O devices such as, Joy stick, Data Glove are Non-impact C. Both (A) and (B) D. None of the Above
involved in ______________ applications. A. Photonics B. Answer
Haptics C. Agnostic D. None of the Above B. Non-impact
Answer 6. Thermal transfer printer can be divided into ______
B. Haptics Haptics – Science of applying touch sensation types. A. Three B. Four C. Six D. Two
and control to interact with computer applications Answer
6. Which device typically attachable to computer keyboard D. Two Direct Thermal Printer, Thermal Wax transfer
that allows a blind people to read? A. Light Pen B. Printer
Joystick C. Touch screen D. Braille display 7. Direct Thermal printer does not use _________ A. heat
Answer B. coated paper C. ribbon D. None of the Above
D. Braille display Answer
7. Many Dot Matrix printers are ________ A. uni- C. ribbon
directional B. bi-directional C. multi-directional D. None 8. Which of the following type of printer uses a thermal
of the Above transfer ribbon that contains wax-based ink? A. Direct
Answer Thermal B. Thermal Wax transfer C. Both (A) and (B) D.
B. bi-directional None of the Above
8. Which is a hardware component or system of Answer
components that allows a human being to interact with a B. Thermal Wax transfer
computer? A. Interface device (IDF) B. Graphical User 9. __________ is a device that performs a variety of
Interface (GUI) C. Musical Digital Instrument Interface functions that would otherwise be carried out by separate
(MIDI) D. None of the Above peripheral devices. A. Single Function Peripheral B. Multi
Answer Function Peripheral C. Dual Function Peripheral D. None
A. Interface device (IDF) of the Above
9. Which is an escape code language used to send Answer
commands to the printer for printing documents? A. B. Multi Function Peripheral
Postscript B. PCL C. Both (A) and (B) D. None of the 10. Impact printer(s) is/are _______ A. Dot Matrix printer
Above B. Line printer C. Daisy Wheel printer D. All of the Above
Answer Answer
B. PCL D. All of the Above
10. PCL stands for _________ A. Print Code Language 1. The term ________ refers to data storage systems that
B. Printer Code Language C. Printer Character Language make it possible for a computer or electronic device to
D. Printer Command Language store and retrieve data. A. input technology B. output
Answer technology C. storage technology D. None of the Above
D. Printer Command Language Answer
1. ________ is a printer language that uses English phrases C. storage technology
and programmatic constructions to describe the appearance 2. _________ is the time from the start of one storage
of a printed page to the printer. A. Postscript B. PCL C. device access to the time when the next access can be
Both (A) and (B) D. None of the Above started. A. Mode B. Access time C. capacity D. None of
Answer the Above
A. Postscript Answer

Karan Dhami-28
B. Access time C. Buffer Flush
3. The memory unit that communicates directly with the 4. Which is a general term for all forms of solid state
CPU is called ________ A. Secondary or Auxiliary memory that do not need to have their memory contents
Memory periodically refreshed. A. Volatile memory B. Non
B. Primary or Main Memory C. Both (A) and (B) D. None Volatile memory C. Both (A) and (B) D. None of the
of the Above Above
Answer Answer
B. Primary or Main Memory B. Non Volatile memory
4. Which memory stores large amount of data and the data 5. _________is computer storage that only maintains its
can not be processed directly by the CPU? A. Secondary data while the device is powered. A. Volatile memory B.
or Auxiliary Memory B. Primary or Main Memory C. Non Volatile memory C. Both (A) and (B) D. None of the
Both (A) and (B) D. None of the Above Above
Answer Answer
A. Secondary or Auxiliary Memory A. Volatile memory
5. Which of the following is/are hard disk performance 6. _________ is a type of non-volatile memory that erases
parameter? A. Seek time B. Latency period C. Access time data in units called blocks. A. Flash memory B. Virtual
D. All of the above memory C. Buffer D. None of the Above
Answer Answer
D. All of the above A. Flash memory
6. A disk’s content that is recorded at the time of 7. _____________is a feature of an operating system that
manufacture and that cannot be changed or erased by the allows a computer to compensate for shortages of physical
user is ________ A. Write only B. Read Only C. Both (A) memory by temporarily transferring pages of data from
and (B) D. None of the Above RAM to disk storage. A. Flash memory B. Virtual memory
Answer C. Buffer D. None of the Above
B. Read Only Answer
7. Which of the following memories uses a MOS capacitor B. Virtual memory
as its memory cell? A. SRAM B. DRAM C. ROM D. 8. ________ is the process of dividing the disk into tracks
FIFO and sectors. A. Formatting B. Tracking C. Allotting D.
Answer None of the Above
B. DRAM Answer
8. A nibble is equal to _______ A. 4 bits B. 8 bits C. 16 A. Formatting
bits D. 32 bits 9. The primary device that a computer uses to store
Answer information is _______ A. Floppy Disk B. Monitor C.
A. 4 bits Hard Drive D. None of the Above
9. A byte can represent any number between 0 and Answer
_______ A. 312 B. 255 C. 1024 D. 1025 C. Hard Drive
Answer 10. A removable magnetic disk that holds information is
B. 255 __________ A. Floppy Disk B. Hard Drive C. Monitor D.
10. Which of the following memory chip is faster? A. None of the Above
DRAM Answer
B. SRAM C. Both (A) and (B) D. None of the Above A. Floppy Disk
Answer 1. Which of the following is a type of RAM used
B. SRAM specifically for video adapters or 3D accelerators? A.
1. The term ‘giga byte’ equals to ________ A. 1024 byte DRAM B. SRAM C. SGRAM D. VRAM
B. 1024 KB C. 1024 GB D. 1024 MB Answer
Answer D. VRAM (Video RAM)
D. 1024 MB 2. Which of the following is clock-synchronized RAM that
2. _________ is a data area shared by hardware devices or is used for video memory? A. DRAM B. SRAM C.
program processes that operate at different speeds or with SGRAM D. None of the Above
different sets of priorities. A. Flash memory B. Virtual Answer
memory C. Buffer D. None of the Above C. SGRAM (Synchronous Graphics RAM)
Answer 3. _________is a copy of Basic Input/Output Operating
C. Buffer System (BIOS) routines from Read Only Memory (ROM)
3. _________ is the transfer of computer data from a into a special area of RAM so that they can be accessed
temporary storage area to the computer’s permanent more quickly.
memory. A. Flash B. Virtual C. Buffer Flush D. None of A. Dynamic RAM B. Shadow RAM C. Synchronous
the Above Graphics RAM D. Video RAM
Answer Answer

Karan Dhami-29
B. Shadow RAM C. EPROM
4. Which memory does not use capacitor in its memory 5. ____________ is a type of non-volatile memory
cell? A. SRAM B. DRAM C. ROM D. None of the Above composed of a thin layer of material that can be easily
Answer magnetized in only one direction. A. Bubble memory B.
A. SRAM RAM C. SRAM D. None of the Above
5. Information stored in RAM need to be ________ A. Answer
Check B. modify C. refresh periodically D. None of the A. Bubble memory
Above 6. The magnetic storage chips used to provide non-volatile
Answer direct access storage of data and that have no moving parts
C. refresh periodically are known as________ A. Magnetic core memory B.
6. Memory is made up of _________ A. set of wires B. Magnetic tape memory C. Magnetic disk memory D.
large number of cells C. set of circuits D. None of the Magnetic bubble memory
Above Answer
Answer D. Magnetic bubble memory
B. large number of cells 7. ___________ is a very high speed memory placed in
7. ________ is the ability of a device to ‘jump’ directly to between RAM and CPU. A. Magnetic disk B. Magnetic
the requested data A. Sequential access B. Random access drum C. Virtual memory D. Cache memory
C. Quick access D. None of the Above Answer
Answer D. Cache memory
B. Random access 8. EDODRAM stands for _________ A. Extended Digital
8. Virtual memory is _________ A. an extremely large Output Dynamic RAM B. Extended Dynamic Output
main memory B. an extremely large secondary memory C. Digital RAM C. Extended Data Output Digital RAM D.
a type of used in super computers D. an illusion of Extended Data Output Dynamic RAM
extremely large main memory Answer
Answer D. Extended Data Output Dynamic RAM
D. an illusion of extremely large main memory 9. A byte is a collection of _______ A. 4 bits B. 12 bits C.
9. Which of the following is an example of optical disk? 6 bits D. 8 bits
A. Magnetic disk B. Memory disk C. Digital Versatile Answer
Disk D. None of the Above D. 8 bits
Answer 10. Which of the following terms is the most closely
C. Digital Versatile Disk related to main memory? A. Non Volatile
10. Cache and main memory will not be able to hold their B. Permanent C. Temporary D. None of the Above
contents when the power is off. They are ________ A. Answer
Static C. Temporary
B. Dynamic C. Non Volatile D. Volatile 1. Under virtual storage ________ A. Two or more
Answer programs are stored in primary storage B. Only active
D. Volatile pages of a program in primary storage C. Inter-program,
1. The hardware in which data may be stored for a interference may occur D. None of the Above
computer system is called ________ A. Registers B. Bus Answer
C. Control Unit D. Memory B. Only active pages of a program in primary storage
Answer 2. Comparing with secondary storage, primary storage is
D. Memory ______ A. Slow and expensive B. Slow and inexpensive
2. Which of the following memory is capable of operating C. Fast and inexpensive D. Fast and expensive
at electronics speed? A. Magnetic disk B. Magnetic drum Answer
C. Semiconductor memory D. None of the Above D. Fast and expensive
Answer 3. Technique of placing software/programs in a ROM
C. Semiconductor memory semiconductor chip is called ______ A. PROM B.
3. Memories in which any location can be reached in a EPROM C. Firmware D. None of the above
fixed amount of time after specifying its address is called Answer
________ A. Sequential Access Memory B. Random C. Firmware
Access Memory C. Quick Access Memory D. Mass 4. The ______ can be programmed one time either the
storage manufacturer or the computer user.Once programmed it
Answer cannot be modified. A. PROM B. EPROM C. RAM D.
B. Random Access Memory ROM
4. Which of the following is the user programmed Answer
semiconductor memory? A. SRAM B. DRAM C. EPROM D. ROM
D. None of the Above 5. Technique to implement virtual memory where memory
Answer is divided into units of fixed size memory is _________ A.

Karan Dhami-30
Paging B. De-fragments C. Segmentation D. None of the 5. ______ is RAM that combines the fast read and write
above access of Dynamic RAM A. VRAM B. WRAM C.
Answer MRAM D. FRAM
A. Paging Answer
6. Storage device where time to retrieve stored information D. FRAM Ferroelectric RAM
is independent of address where it is stored is called 6. _________is a form of non-volatile storage that operates
_______ A. Random Access Memory B. Secondary by changing the resistance of a specially formulated solid
Memory C. System D. None of the above dielectric material. A. VRAM B. WRAM
Answer C. MRAM D. RRAM
A. Random Access Memory Answer
7. A memory in CPU that holds program instructions, D. RRAM Resistive RAM
input data, intermediate results and the output information 7. Which of the following memories has the shortest
produced during processing is __________ A. System B. access time? A. Cache memory B. Magnetic Bubble
Primary Memory C. Secondary Memory D. None of the Memory C. Magnetic Core Memory D. None of the above
above Answer
Answer A. Cache memory
B. Primary Memory 8. Which of the following is mandatory for every disk? A.
8. Technique of using disk space to make programs believe root B. sub C. bare D. None of the above
that the system contains more Random Access Answer
Memory(RAM) than is actually available is called ______ A. root
A. Random Access Memory B. Primary Memory C. 9. Which of the following is the smallest measure of
Secondary Memory D. Virtual Memory storage? A. KB B. MB C. TB D. Byte
Answer Answer
D. Virtual Memory D. Byte
9. CPU performs read/write operations at any point in time 10. Kilobyte equals to how many bytes? A. 1000 B. 1064
in _____ A. PROM B. EPROM C. RAM D. ROM C. 1024 D. None of the above
Answer Answer
B. EPROM C. 1024
10. A storage device or medium where the access time is 1. _________ is a generic term for organized collection of
dependent upon the location of the data is called ________ computer data and instructions. A. firmware B. Software
A. Parallel access B. Serial access C. Both (A) and (B) D. C. hardware D. None of the above
None of the above Answer
Answer B. Software
B. Serial access 2. Software refers to ____ A. firmware B. physical
1. The instructions for starting the computer are house on components that a computer is made of C. programs D.
________ A. Hard Disk B. CD-ROM C. Read Only None of the above
Memory chip D. All of the above Answer
Answer C. programs
C. Read Only Memory chip 3. Software can be categorized as ________ A. Firmware
2. EAROM stands for ______ A. Electrically Altered Read and Hardware B. System software and Firmware C.
Only Memory B. Electrically Accepted Read Only Application software and Hardware D. System software
Memory C. Electronically Alterable Read Only Memory and Application Software
D. Electrically Alterable Read Only Memory Answer
Answer D. System software and Application Software
D. Electrically Alterable Read Only Memory 4. This type of software works with end users, application
3. _______ is a method of storing data bits using magnetic software and computer hardware to handle the majority of
charges instead of the electrical charges used by DRAM. technical details. A. Communications software B.
A. VRAM B. WRAM Application software C. Utility software D. System
C. MRAM D. None of the above software
Answer Answer
C. MRAM Magneto resistive RAM D. System software
4. _______ is a high-performance video RAM that is dual 5. ___________programs perform day to day tasks related
ported. A. VRAM B. WRAM C. MRAM D. None of the to the maintenance of the computer system. A. Operating
above system B. System Utilities C. Language translators D.
Answer Application software
B. WRAM Window RAM Answer
System Utilities

Karan Dhami-31
6. Application software A. is designed to help 6. A ________ is a special program that processes
programmers B. is used to control the operating System C. statements written in a particular programming language
performs specific task for computer users D. is used for and turns them into machine language. A. Compiler B.
making design only Device Driver C. Assembler D. None of the above
Answer Answer
C. performs specific task for computer users A. Compiler
7. It is the set of programs that enables your computers 7. ___________ is a software used to compose, format,
hardware device and application software to work edit, and print electronic documents. A. Spreadsheets B.
together. A. Operating system B. Helper software C. Word Processor C. Image Editors D. None of the above
System software D. Application software Answer
Answer B. Word Processor
C. System software 8. Which of the following is/are example(s) of Word
8. Which of the following is/are an example(s) of System Processors? A. Microsoft Word B. WordPerfect C. Both
Software? A. Device Drivers B. Language translators C. (A) and (B) D. None of the above
System Utilities D. All of the above Answer
Answer C. Both (A) and (B)
D. All of the above 9. ______are designed specifically for capturing, creating,
9. ______ is the first layer of software loaded into editing and manipulating images? A. Spreadsheets B.
computer memory when it starts up. A. Device Drivers B. Word Processor C. Image Editors D. None of the above
Language translators C. System Utilities D. Operating Answer
system C. Image Editors
Answer 10. Which of the following is/are example(s) of
D. Operating system Spreadsheets? A. Microsoft Excel
10. ______ are system programs, which are responsible for B. Lotus 1-2-3 C. Both (A) and (B) D. None of the above
proper functioning of devices. A. Device Drivers Answer
B. Language translators C. System Utilities D. Operating C. Both (A) and (B)
system 1. Which refers to any program that is not copy righted? A.
Answer Freeware B. Shareware C. Open Source Software D.
A. Device Drivers Public Domain Software
1. A _________ helps in converting programming Answer
languages to machine language. A. Operating system B. D. Public Domain Software
System Utilities C. Language translator D. Application 2. Which term is commonly used for copyrighted software
software given away free by its author? A. Freeware B. Shareware
Answer C. Open Source Software D. Public Domain Software
C. Language translator Answer
2. Which of the following is/are example(s) of an A. Freeware
Operating System? A. UNIX B. Linux C. Windows XP D. 3. __________ is the software which comes with the
All of the above permission for people to redistribute copies for a limited
Answer period. A. Freeware B. Shareware C. Open Source
D. All of the above Software D. Public Domain Software
3. Language Translators can be divided into three major Answer
categories.They are _________ A. Compiler, Operating B. Shareware
System and Assembler B. Compiler, Device Driver and 4. Linux is a type of ___________ A. Freeware B.
Assembler C. Compiler, Interpreter and System Utility D. Shareware C. Open Source Software D. Public Domain
Compiler, Interpreter and Assembler Software
Answer Answer
D. Compiler, Interpreter and Assembler C. Open Source Software
4. Which of the following language is the closest to the 5. Which of the following is application software? A.
machine code? A. Compiler B. Interpreter C. Assembler Database Management System B. Spreadsheets C. Image
D. None of the above Editor D. All of the above
Answer Answer
C. Assembler D. All of the above
5. Which analyses and executes the source code in line-by- 6. ___________ is a combination of software permanently
line manner, without looking at the entire program? A. stored in the memory. A. Freeware B. Shareware C. Open
Compiler B. Interpreter C. Assembler D. None of the Source Software D. Firmware
above Answer
Answer D. Firmware
B. Interpreter

Karan Dhami-32
7. ____________ represents the majority of software A. Exit User License Agreement B. Exit Utility License
purchased from software publishers. Agreement C. End Utility License Agreement D. End User
A. Commercial Software B. Proprietary Software C. Open License Agreement
Source Software D. Firmware Answer
Answer D. End User License Agreement
A. Commercial Software 8. If you borrow and copy a friend’s software in violation
8. Which of the following software is also called as Closed of the licensing agreement, what kind of piracy is that? A.
Source Software? A. Commercial Software B. Proprietary Internet Downloading B. Hard Disk loading C. Softloading
Software C. Open Source Software D. Firmware D. Renting
Answer Answer
B. Proprietary Software C. Softloading
9. ____________ is a collection of one or more files that 9. Softloading is also called __________ A. End User
correct flaws in the performance, reliability or security of a Piracy B. Softlifting C. Both (A) and (B) D. None of the
specific software product. A. Software Update B. Software above.
Piracy C. Software patch D. None of the above Answer
Answer C. Both (A) and (B)
C. Software patch 10. __________ is a content distribution protocol enables
10. Which of the following is System Software? A. efficient software distribution and peer-to-peer sharing of
Microsoft Word B. Microsoft Excel very large files by enabling users to serve as network
C. Adobe Photoshop D. Windows 7 redistribution points. A. Freeware B. BitTorrent
Answer C. CorelDraw D. None of the above.
D. Windows 7 Answer
1. Which of the following is/are example(s) of Image B. BitTorrent
Editors? A. Adobe photoshop B. Adobe Illustrator C.
CorelDraw D. All of the above 1. Where would you find the letters QUERTY? (1)
Answer Mouse (2) Screen (3) Numeric Keypad (4)
D. All of the above Keyboard (5) None of these
2. ____________ distributed as freeware, but it requires 2. How did the computer mouse get its name? (1) It's
the user to view advertisements to use the software. A. cable looks like a tail (2) Because it squeaks when
Adware B. Abandonware C. Donationware D. All of the moved (3) It has ears (4) Teeth outside mouth (5)
above None of these
Answer
A. Adware 3. What are you most likely to use when playing (1)
3. Adware is some times called ________ A. Shareware B. Touch screen a computer game? (2) Light pen (3)
Abandonware C. Donationware D. Spyware notepad (4) Joystick (5) None of these
Answer 4. A digitising tablet can be used for? (1) Tracing
D. Spyware diagrams (2) Printing letters (3) Reading barcodes (4)
4. ________ is the unauthorized copying of an Playing (5) None of these
organization’s internally developed software or the illegal 5. Which of the following is a pointing device (1)
duplication of commercially available software. A. Hard disk . (2) CD-ROM drive (3) Touch screen
Software license B. Software Piracy C. Both (A) and (B) used for computer input. (4) RAM (5) None of these
D. None of the above.
Answer 6. What does a light pen contain? (1) Refillableink (2)
B. Software Piracy Light sensitive elements (3) Pencil lead (4) Blue Ink
5. Which of the following activity can be termed as (5) None of these
Software Piracy? A. Softloading B. Hard Disk loading C. 7. What would be the best way to move around a 3D
Internet Downloading D. All of the above environment? (1) Use a tracker ball (2) Use a
Answer keyboard. (3) Use a space mouse (4) Use Joystick (5)
D. All of the above None of these
6. __________ means sharing a program with someone 8. What input device can be used for marking (1)
who is not authorized by the license agreement to use it. A. Optical mark reader (2) Bar code reader (3) Mouse a
Softloading B. Hard Disk loading C. Internet Downloading multiple choice test? (4) All of the above (5) None of
D. Renting these
Answer 9. What input device could tell you the price of (1)
D. All of the above Mouse a bar of chocolate? (2) All of the above (3)
7. EULA is a legal agreement between a software producer Optical mark reader (4) Bar code reader (5) None of
and a user. What does EULA stand for? these

Karan Dhami-33
10. Where would you find a magnetic strip? (1) 27. Formatting a disk results in all the data being...? (1)
Speakers (2) Credit card (3) Smart card (4) All of Saved to the disk (2) Copied from the disk (3) Deleted
the above (5) None of these from the disk (4) All of the above (5) None of these
11. Hard copy is a term used to describe...? (1) Printed
output (2) Writing on a hard board (3) Storing 28. Which storage device has the largest capacity in Mb's?
information on the hard disk (4) All of the above (5) (1) A floppy disk (2) A CD-ROM (3) Magnetic tape
None of these storage (4) All of the above (5) None of these
12. What do the abbreviations VAB stand for? (1) Voice
activated broadcasting (2) Visual audio board (3) 29. Which storage device cannot be erased? (1) A CD-
Voice answer back (4) All of the above (5) None of ROM (2) None of these (3) Magnetic tape storage (4)
these All of the above- (5) A floppy disk
13. What are the individual dots which make up a picture 30. Where should floppy disks be stored? (1) By a sunny
on the monitor screen called? (1) Coloured spots (2) window (2) In a drawer (3) All of the above (4) By
All of the above (3) Pixies (4) Pixels (5) None of magnet objects (5) None of these
these 31. Who is accredited with developing the architecture of
14. A daisy wheel is a type of...? (1) None of these (2) the modern computer? (1) Sir Clive Sinclair (2) Bill
Storage device (3) Pointing device (4) All of the above Gates (3) All of the above (4) None of these (5) John
(5) Printer Von Neumann
15. Factory production lines can be automated using...? 32. Which bus carries information between processors
(1) Machine tools (2) VDUs (3) Plotters (4) All of and peripherals? (1) Autobus (2) Data bus (3)
the above (5) None of these Address bus (4) All of the above (5) None of these
16. An impact printer creates characters by using...? (1)
An inked ribbon and print head (2) Electrically charged 33. Which bus controls the sequencing of read/write
ink (3) An ink pen (4) All of the above (5) None of operations? (1) Control bus (2) Address bus (3) Data
these bus (4) All of the above (5) None of these
17. What would you NOT use with a flatbed plotter? (1)
A pen (2) Eraser (3) Paper (4) All of the above (5) 34. The contents of these chips are lost when the computer
None of these is switched off? (1) RAM chips (2) ROM chips (3)
18. What would be the best way to move around a 3D DRAM chips (4) All of the above (5) None of these
environment? (1) Electrostatic plotters (2) None of
these (3) Thermal printers (4) All of the above (5) 35. What are responsible for storing permanent data and
Robots instructions? (1) RAM chips (2) All of the above (3)
19. What do you need for an ink jet printer? (1) A drum DRAM chips (4) ROM chips (5) None of these
(2) A cartridge (3) A ribbon (4) All of the above (5)
None of these 36. Which parts of the computer perform arithmetic
20. A laser printer does NOT use? (1) A calculations? (1) Registers (2) ALU (3) Logic bus (4)
photoconductive drum (2) A print head (3) A laser beam All of the above (5) None of these
(4) All of the above (5) None of these 37. What are small high speed memory units used for
21. The amount of data that a disk may containis known as storing temporary results? (1) All of the above (2)
the disk's...? (1) Volume (2) Size (3) All of the Registers (3) Control unit (4) CPUs (5) None of
above (4) Storage capacity (5) None of these these
38. What maintains the status of the last operation carried
22. You can protect a floppy disk. (1) Read (2) Read out by the ALU? (1) Instruction pointer . (2) Status
and Write (3) Write (4) All of the above (5) None of register (3) Accumulator (4) All of the above (5)
these 23. Information on a hard disk is usually backed-up None of these
using a..? (1) CD-ROM (2) Magnetic tape (3) 39. How many bits of information can each memory cell
Floppy disk (4) All of the above (5) None of these in a computer chip hold? (1) 8 bits (2) 1 bit (3) Obits
(4) All of the above (5) None of these
24. Magnetic storage devices can represent binary 0 by
the absence of...? (1) A magnetic field (2) Magnetic 40. What type of computer chips are said to be volatile?
tape (3) Static electricity (4) All of the above (5) None (1) ROM chips (2) RAM chips (3) DRAM (4) All
of these of the above (5) None of these –
25. Magnetic tape is a..? (1) Random access medium (2)
A parallel access medium (3) Serial access medium (4) 41. An example of an embedded system is ...? (1) A CD-
All of the above (5) None of these ROM (2) A machine tool (3) A calculator (4) All of
26. Hard disks can have a storage capacity in the region the above (5) None of these
of...? (1) 1Gb (2) 1.44Mb (3) 720K (4) All of the
above (5) None of these

Karan Dhami-34
42. Which computers use single chip processors? (1) All 57. A single binary digit is known as (1) MB (2) byte
of the above (2) Parallel computers (3) Cray computers (3) KB (4) bit (5) None of these
(4) Personal computers (5) /tone of these
43. Travel agents use this computer system when reserving 58. Internet Safety relates to__________. (1) only
flights. (1) Supercomputer (2) Mainframe computer (3) those who buy products online (2) only those who sign
Personal computer (4) All of the above (5) None of up for chat rooms (3) only those who do their banking
these online (4) everyone who uses a computer that can conned
44. Which computers are used in the weather forecasting to the Internet (5) None of these
industry? (1) Super computers (2) Notebook computers 59. A file name extension for Word 2007 files is ___. (1)
(3) Jon Von Neumann computers (4) All of the above .gif (2) .txt (3) .docx (4) .exe (5) None of
(5) None of these these 60. A KB represents____bytes (1) 8 (2)
45. Which computers are connected to many terminals and 1,000,000,000 (3) 1,000,000 (4) 1,000 (5) None of
can multitask? (1) Minicomputers (2) LEO 1 these
computers (3) All of the above (4) None of these (5) 61. How many Bytes in a Megabyte (MB)? (1)
Personal computers running MS-DOS 1,000,000 (2) 1,024,000 (3) 1,048,576 (4) 1,000,024
(5) None of these
46. Vacuum tube based electronic computers are...? (1) 62. Which QBasic statement is W'-'rnost evil? (1)
Second generation (2) Hoover generation (3) First PRINT (2) LOCATE (3) GOTO (4) RANDOMIZE
generation (4) All of the above (5) None of these (5) None of these
63. What does ALU stand for? (1) Arithmetic Logic Unit
47. Which generation of computer was developed from (2) Asymmetrical Localizing Unit (3) Because his legs
microchips? (1) Third generation (2) Second are in the way (4) Awfully Long-winded Unionist (5)
generation (3) Fourth generation (4) All of the above None of these
(5) None of these 64. How many pins on a standard DDR RAM Dimm? (1)
48. Which generation of computer uses more than one 64 (2) 256 (3) 168 (4) 184 ' (5) None
microprocessor? (1) Second generation (2) Third of these
generation (3) None of these (4) All of the above (5) 65. Which Platform(s) can a Pentium III Processor beused
Fifth generation in? (1) Socket 370 / Socket mPGA 370 / Slot 1 (2)
49. Which generation of computer developed using Socket 462 / Slot A /Socket 8 (3) Socket 5 / Socket 7
integrated circuits? (1) Second generation (2) Fifth /Socket 3 (4) Slotl/Slot A/Socket A (5) None of these
generation (3) Thirtl generation (4) All of the above (5)
None of these 67. If a computer is constantly rebooting itself, what is
50. Which of these is actually a very basic computer? (1) most commonly the problem? (1) Insufficient Power-
a toaster (2) a stove (3) a light bulb (4) a calculator Supply Unit (2) Bad Sectors on Hard Drive (3)
(5) None of these Processor Overheating (4) Defective/Bad Memory (5)
51. Imagine that a user has a WORD document open at a None of these
workstation and that workstation is unexpectedly 68. What does the company name 'AMD' stand for? (1)
disconnected from the school network and from the Always Making Dough (2) Advanced Micro Devices (3)
Internet. Where should the user BEST save her work? (1) Alternating Micron Deficiencies (4) A Mad Device (5)
USB key (2) P drive (3) None of these (4) S drive None of these
(5) H drive 69. How many pins does Ethernet use in the RJ-45
52. Computer memory that temporarily stores information Connection? (1) 3 (2) 2 (3) 6 (4) 4 (5) None of
is called the ____. (1) RAM (2) CPU (3) ROM (4) IBM these
(5) None of these 70. What does SSE stand for in Intel's SSE Technology?
53. The brain of the computer is called the _____. (1) (1) Sophisticated Software Enhancer (2) Streaming
IBM (2) ROM (3) RAM (4) CPU (5) None of Simmd Extensions (3) Some Stupid Enhancer (4)
these Simplistic Software Extensions (5) None of these
54. The operating system is also called the ______
between the user and the computer. (1) interrelate (2) 73. Which does NOT belong to a Intel Pentium 4
interface (3) interference (4) intermediate (5) None of Platform? (1) DDRSDRAM (2) EDO/Fast-Page Ram
these (3) SDRAM (4) Rambuss (5) None of these
55. When installing a peripheral you also usually need to
install a _____ . (1) port (2) server (3) driver (4) 75. What Video Card is Best Suited for 3D Games? (1)
password (5) None of these ATI 3D Charger (2) nVidia GeForce 256 DDR (3)
56. Computers use which of the following number ATI Radeon 9700 Pro (4) 3DFX VooDoo 5 (5) None
systems to store information? (1) base 4 (2) base 2 of these
(3) base8 (4) base 10 (5) None of these

Karan Dhami-35
76. What platform does the AMD K6 3+ Processor 88 The language that the computer can understand and
Belong to? (1) Sockets (2) Socket7 (3) Slot A (4) execute is called ____ (1) System program (2)
Slotl (5) None of these Application software (3) Machine language (4) All of
77. What platform can the VIA/Cyri III Processor Be used the above (5) None of these
in jut c the following? (1) Slot 1 (2) Socket A (3) Slot A 89. Which of the following devices can be used to directly
(4) Socket 7 (5) None of these input printed text (1) MICR (2) OMR (3) OCR (4)
78. What motherboard manufacturer is the most All of the above (5) None of these
popular out of the following? (1) Abit (2) AOpen (3) 90. A floppy disk contains (1) Circular tracks only (2)
IWill (4) Asus (5) None of these Both circular tracks and sectors (3) Sectors only (4) All
of the above (5) None of these
79. What is the BEST ram solution for the Intel 91. CD-ROM is a (1) Semiconductor memory (2)
Pentium 4 Processor? (1) SDRAM (2) DDR None of these (3) Magnetic memory (4) All of the
SDRAM (3) EDO/Fast Page Ram (4) Rambuss (5) above (5) Memory register
None of these 92. Actual execution of instructions in a computer takes
80. How did the SHIFT key get it's name? (1) From the place in , (1) Control Unit (2) ALU (3) Storage unit
Latin word for large, Shiftius, which v as the first language (4) All of the above (5) None of these
ever used on acomouter. (2) Because it shifts the ASC11 93. Which of the following is used as a primary storage
table by a value of 32. (3) It was a carry-over from device (1) Magnetic tape (2) PROM (3) Floppy disk
typewriters which had both upper and lower case letters on (4) None of these (5) All of the above
each print head and used a mechanical shifting of the print 94. Information retrieval is faster from (1) Floppy disk
head to differentiate. (4) <font color=red>(Bad pun (2) Hard disk (3) Magnetic tape (4) All of the above
alert!)</font color=red> Because the Capitol is full of (5) None of these
shifty characters. (5) None of these 95. Operating system is (1) A collection of software
routines (2) A collection of input-output devices (3) A
81. If an 8-bit integer has a maximum of 256 possible collection of hardware components (4) All of the above
values, what is the highest possible value of a 16 bit (5) None of these
integer? (1) 512 (2) 257 (3) 65536 (4) 65535 (5) 96. Operating system (1) Provides a layered, user-
None of these friendly interface . (2) Link a program with the
subroutines it references (3) Enables a programmer to
32. What does BASIC stand for? (1) Basically, it's just draw a flowchart (4) All of the above (5) None of these
your basic computer language, so they named it BASIC. 97. Execution of two or more programs by a single CPU
(2) Beginner's All-purpose Symbolic Instruction Code (3) is known as: (1) Multiprocessing (2) Time sharing (3)
Binary Analysis System Interpretation Commandset (4) Multiprogramming (4) None of these (5) All of these
Byte Arranging Software for Improved Coding (5) None 98. Modem stands for (1) A type of secondary
of these memory (2) Mainframe operating device memory (3)
83. What does ASCII stand for? ' (1) Array of Simple Modulator demodulator (4) All of the above (5) None
Character Iteration Indices (2) Another Stupid Character of these
Identification Idea (3) Alternate Source Code Image 99. Typical data transfer rate in LAN are of the order of
Improvement (4) None of these (5) American (1) Kilo bits per sec (2) Bits per sec (3) Mega bits per
Standard Code for Information Interchange sec (4) All of the above (5) None of these
100. Ethernet uses (1) Ring topology (2) Bus topology
84. The access method used for magnetic tape is_____ (1) (3) Mesh topology (4) All of the above (5) None of
Direct (2) Random (3) All of the above (4)Sequential these
(5) None of these 101. Wide area networks (WANs) always require (1)
85. By .Processing we understand ____ (1) String None of these (2) High speed processors (3) Same type
manipulation only (2) None of the above (3) (4) All of the above (5) High bandwidth
Processing string of only words (4) Processing string of communication source link 102. Typical bandwidth of
numbers and special symbols (5) None of these optical fibers is (1) Order of GHz (2) Order of KHz (3)
Order of Hz (4) None of these (5) All of the above
86. The difference between memory and storage is that the 103. A large number of computers in a wide geographical
memory is ___ and storage is ____ (1) Slow, fast (2) area can be efficiently connected by (1) Twisted pair
Temporary, permanent (3) Permanent, temporary (4) lines (2) Coaxial cables (3) All of the above (4) None
All of the above (5) None of these of these (5) Communications satellites
87. Which of the Following holds the ROM, CPU, RAM 104. Which of the following topologies is not of broadcast
and expansion cards " (1) Hard disk (2) Floppy disk type? (1) Star (2) None of these (3) Ring (4) All of
(3) All of the above (4) Mother board (5) None of the above (5) Bus
these ( 105. Bug means (1) A difficult syntax error in a program
(2) Documenting programs using an efficient

Karan Dhami-36
Documentation too (3) A logical error in a program (4) 121. Which of the following holds the ROM, CPU, RAM
All of the above (5) None of these and expansion cards (1 ) Mother board (2) Cache
106.The part of machine level instruction, which tells the memory (3) Hard disk (4) All of the above (5) None
central processor what was to be Done is (1) Operation of these
code (2) Address (3) All of the above (4) Operand 122. The errors that can be pointed out by the compiler are
(5) None of these (1) Logical errors (2) Semantic errors (3) Syntax
107. Indicate which , of the following is not true about errors (4) All of the above 5) None of these
4GL. (1) Many database management system packages 123. A computer cannot "boot" if it does not have the (1)
support 4GLs (2) 4GL does not support a high -level of Compiler (2) Loader (3) None of these (4)
screen interaction (3) A 4GL is a software tool which is Assembler (5) Operating system
written, possibly, in some third generation language (4) 124. WAN hardware includes (1) EOF (2) Bridger and
All of the above (5) None of these modems (3) Multiplexors and routers (4) All of above
108. Indicate which of the following, best describes the (5) None of these
term "software" (1) Systems programs only (2) 125.Third generation computers (1) Were the first to use
Application programs only (3) All of the above (4) built-in error detecting device (2) Used transistors
Both (1) and (2) (5) None of these instead of vaccum tubes (3) Were the first to use neural
109. A translator is best described as (1) A hardware network (4) None of these (5) All of the above
component (2) A system software (3) An Application 126. A Winchester disk is a (1) None of these (2)
software (4) All of the above (5) None of these Removable disk (3) Flexible disk (4) All of the above
(5) Disk stack
110. Indicate which of the following is not true about an 127. A computer can be defined as an electronic device
interpreter (1) Interpreter analyses each source statement that can be(choose the most precise definition): (1) carry
every time it is to be executed (2) Interpreter is a kind of out arithmetical operation (2) accept and process data
translator (3) Interpreter generates an object program using a set of stored instructions (3) carry out logical
from the source program (4) All of the above (5) None function (4) present information on.a VDU (5) None of
of these these
111. The errors that can be pointed out by the compiler are 128. The Central Processing Unit: (1) is operated from
(1) All of the above (2) Semantic errors (3) Logical the control panel. (2) is controlled by the input data
errors (4) Syntax errors (5) None of these entering the system (3) controls all input, output and
112. C is (1) An assembly language (2) A machine processing. (4) controls the auxiliary storage unit (5)
language (3) A third generation high level language (4) None of these
All of the above (5) None of these 129.Computer follows a simple principle called GIGO
113. A graph preapared by a computer (1) is its which means: (1) garbage in garbage out (2) garbage
output (2) None of these (3) is a hard copy (4) all of input good output (3) great instructions great output (4)
the above (5) is the piece of information to use good input good output. (5) None of these
114. Which of the following does not represent on I/O 130. The term 'baud' is a measure of the: (1) memory
device (1) speaker which beeps (2) ALU (3) plotter capacity (2) speed at which data travels over the
(4) joystick (5) None of these communication line (3) instruction execution time (4)
115. The communication line between the CPU, all of the above (5) None of these
memory and peripherals is called a (1) all of these (2) 131. A bootstrap is: (1) a memory device (2) a device
line (3) media (4) Bus (5) None of these to support the computer (3) an error correction technique
116. Memories which can be read only are called.............. (4) a small initialization program to start up a computer
memories (1) ROM (2) RAM (3) PROM (4) (5) None of these
EPROM (5) None of these 132.Which of the following is not hardware: (1)
117. Example of non-numerical data is (1) All of the Magnetic tape (2) Printer (3) Assembler (4) VDU
above (2) Examination score (3) Bank balance (4) terminal (5) None of these
Employee address (5) None of these 133. Pick out the wrong definition : (1) EDP- acronym
118. One thousand byte; opresenta (1) Megabyte (2) for Electronic Data Processing (2) COBOL-a language
Gigabyte (3) None of these (4) All of the above (5) used for business data processing (3) Control unit - heart
Kilobyte of a computer. (4) None of these (5) Access time-time
119. The language that the computer . can understand and needed to access the output
execute is called (1) Application software (2) Machine 134. Terminal is a: (1) point at which data enters or
language (3) System program (4) All of the above (5) leaves the computer (2) device to give power supply to
None of these computer (3) the last instruction in a program (4) any
120. A step by step procedure used to solve a problem is input /output device. (5) None of these
called (1) Operating system (2) None of these (3)
Application Program (4) All of the above (5) Algorithm 135. Multiple choice examination answer sheets can be
evaluated automically by (1) Optical Character Reader

Karan Dhami-37
(2) Optical Mark Reader (3) Magnetic tape reader (4) 160. ASCII code isa......... bit code. (1) 1 (2) 2 (3) 9
Magnetic ink character reader. (5) None of these (4) 8 (5) 7
136. An operating system (1) is not required on large 162.The decimal number is converted in to excess 3
computers (2) is always supplied with the copmuter (3) codes by adding, to each decimal digit. (1) 4 (2) 8 (3)
consists of programs that help in the operation of 3 (4) 2 (5) 7
computer. (4) is always supplied with the BASIC (5) 163. 110+110=............ (1) 3 (2) 0 (3) 1 (4) 2 (5)
None of these None of these
137. Which of the following would cause quickest acess 164. 12+12=........... (1) 1 (2) 0 (3) 2 (4) 3 (5) None of
(1) direct access from a magnetic tape (2) direct these
access from a cassette tape (3) direct access from a 165.The digital system usually operated on.........system.
floppy disk (4) direct access from a hard disk (5) None of (1) decimal (2) binary (3) octal (4) hexadecimal
these (5) None of these
138. The process of retaining data for future use is called 166. The binary system use powers of..........for positional
(1) reading (2) storing (3) writing (4) coding (5) values. (1) 16 (2) 10 (3) 8 (4) 2
None of these 167. After counting 0, 1, 10, 11, 'the next binary number is
139. A file is corrected immediately after the input of a (1) 100 (2) 12 (3) 101 (4) 110 (5) None of
transaction.This is an example of (1) on-line updating (2) these
batching (3) sorting (4) off-line updating (5) None of 170. In logic algebra, variables can assume only two
these values:either..........or 1. (1) 2 (2) 4 (3) 3 (4) 0 (5) None
140. Magnetic tapes are good storage media for (1) of these
backup and low volume data (2) None of these (3) 171. A logic gate is an electronic circuit which (1) None
storing original but low volume data (4) storing original of these (2) allows electron flow only in one direction (3)
but high volume data (5) backup and high volume data works on binary algebra (4) alternates between 0&1
values (5) makes logic decisions
141.Which of the following is a computercode (1) 172. In positive logic, logic gate 1 corresponds to (1)
EPROM (2) JAVA (3) All of the above (4) positive voltage (2) zero voltage level (3) higher
EBCDIC (5) None of these voltage level (4) lower voltage level (5) None of these
142. Data is generally coded in 8-bit units, such a unit is
also called (1) k (2) byte (3) field (4) 173. In negative logic, the logic state 1 corresponds to (1)
Word (5) None of these lower voltage level (2) negative logic (3) zero voltage
143. Half adder is logic CKT that adds. .........Digit at a (4) more negative voltage (5) None of these
time (1) three (2) one (3) Two (4) zero (5) 175. An X-OR gate produces an output only when it's two
None of these inputs are (1) high (2) low (3) None of these (4)
147. In 1st Complement a number which is Subtracted same (5) different
from other number is known as.......... (1) Carry (2) 176. An AND gate (1) is equivalent to a series switching
subtrahend (3) All of this (4) minuend (5) None of circuit (2) implements logic addition (3) is an any-or-
these all gate (4) is equivalent to a parallel switching circuit
148. In a 2nd Complement a number which is subtracted (5) None of these
from other number is known as........... (1) Carry (2) 178. The only function of a NOT gate is to (1) stop a
Minuend (3) Subtrahend (4) All of this (5) None of signal (2) recomplement a signal (3) act as a universal
these set (4) invert an input signal (5) None of these
149. In 2nd Complement a number which is subtracted 179. A NOR gate is ON only when all it's inputs are (1)
from other number is known as............. (1) Minuend (2) OFF (2) positive (3) higb (4) ON (5) None
Subtrahend (3) Carry (4) All of this (5) None of of these
these 181.Karnaugh map (K-map) technique provides a
156...........Are used for converting one type of number systematic method for simplifying ——— (1)
system in to other form. (1) half adder (2) logic gate multiplexers (2) logic gates (3) All of these (4) None
(3) Encoder (4) FA (5) None of these of these (5) Boolean expressions

157.......... Are used for converting one type of number 184. A octal is group of —— 1's (1) 2 (2) 6 (3) 8
system in to the other form (1) logic gate (2) Decoder (4) 4 (5) None of these
(3) half adder (4) Full adder (5) None of these 187. A Register is a group of — — (1) Flip-flops (2)
158. Multiplexer means................. (1) One in to many OR & AND gate (3) OR gates (4) All of these (5)
(2) All of these (3) many in to many (4) many in to None of these
one (5) None of these 192.The First Microprocessor was ______ (1) 8080
159. Multiplexers is also known as. (1) adder (2) (2) Intel 4004 (3) 8085 (4) 4008 (5) None of these
demux (3) mux (4) subtracter (5) None of these

Karan Dhami-38
193. 8085 was introduced in ___ (1) 1971 (2) 1972 216.The Binary system has base ___ . (1) 2 (2) 8
(3) 1976 (4) 1978 (5) None of these (3) 10 (4) 16 (5) None of these
217. The Octal Number system has base ______ (1) 2
194. In 1978 Intel introduced the 16 bit Microprocessor (2) 10 (3) 10 (4) 8 (5) None of these
8086 now called as_____ (1) APX80 (2) M6800 218. The Decimal Number system has base ___ . (1) 8
(3) ZylogzSOOO (4) Intel 8086 (5) None of these (2) 10 (3) 16 (4) 2 (5) None of these
219.The Hexadecimal Number system has base_. (1)
195.Which is a 8 bit Microprocessor ______ (1) Intel 2 (2) 10 (3) None of these (4) 8 (5) 16
4040 (2) Motorala MC-6801 (3) Pentium-I (4) 8088 225. Hexadecimal number system has ..... symbols. (1)
(5) None of these 16 (2) 12 (3) 15 (4) 10 (5) None of these
196. Pentium-l, Pentium-ll, Pentium III and Pentium-IV 226.Octal number system has ..... symbols. (1) 15 (2)
are recently introduced microprocessor by______ (1) 16 (3) 10 (4) 8 (5) None of these
Motorala (2) None (3) Stephen Mors (4) Intel (5) 227. Binary number system has ..... symbols. (1) 15 (2)
None of these 2 (3) 16 (4) 10 (5) None qtthese
197. The address bus flow in ____ (1) unidirection k 228. Decimal n/mber system has ..... symljfls. (1) 15
(2) bidirection (3). Mulidirection (4) Circular (5) (2) 16 (3) 10 (4) 2 (5) None of these
None of these 237. The binary equivalent of (64)10 , is : (1)
198. Status register is also called as _______ (1) 11000000 (2) 1100000 (3) 1100010 I (4) 1000000
Accumulator (2) None of these (3) Counter (4) (5) None of these
Stack (5) flags (1) 8 bit data 203. 238. The two kinds of main memory are: (1) ROM and
The First electronic computer was completed in ___ . (1) RAM (2) Random and sequential (3) Primary and
1941 (2) 1938 (3) 1946 (4) 1950 (5) None of secondary (4) All of above (5) None of these
these
204. The First Generation of computer appeared during 239.Which of the following will happen when data is
the period __ . (1) 1937 to 1949 (2) 1964 to 1974 (3) entered into a memory location? (1) It will add to the
1934 to 1944 (4) 1945 to 1954 (5) None of these content of the location (2) It will erase the previous
205.The Second Generation of computers used ___ (1) content (3) It will change the address of the memory
Transistors (2) IC-Chip (3) Vaccum tubes (4) location (4) It will not be fruitful if there is already some
Microprocessor chip (5) None of these data at the location (5) None of these
206. The fourth Generation began in________ (1) 1974
(2) 1965 (3) 1935 (4) 1975 (5) None of 240. A storage area used to store data to a compensate
these for the difference in speed at which the different units can
207. ____is used .to create Large program on internet (1) handle data is (1) Buffer (2) Memory (3)
C++ (2) HTML (3) Java script (4) C language (5) Accumulator (4) Address (5) None of these
None of these 241. To locate a data item for storage is (1) Field (2)
208.The Device which converts instructions into the binary Feed (3) Fetch (4) Database (5) None of these
form that is understood by the computer and supply to 242.Time during which a job is processed by the computer
the computer is known as___. (1) Memory (2) is (1) Delay times (2) Execution time (3) Real time
Output (3) Automatic (4) Input (5) None of these (4) Down time (5) None of these
209. Laptop PCs are also known as ___Computers (1) 243. A directly accessible appointment calendar is feature
Mainframe (2) Super (3) Notebook (4) personal (5) of a ... resident package (1) CPU (2) ALU (3)
None of these Buffer (4) Memory (5) None of these
210. The symbol is used to indicate a point at which 244. The term gigabyte refers to (1) 1 024 megabytes (2)
decision has to be made __ . (1) decision (2) Connector 1 024 kilobytes (3) 1024 bytes (4) 1 024 gigabyte (5)
(3) processing (4) Terminal (5) None of these None of these
211 . Windows 98 is ____________ (1) Graphics System 245. Which of the following processors use RISC
(2) None of these (3) Drawing system (4) Processing technology? (1) 486dx (2) 486SX (3) PowerPC
system (5) Operating System (4) 6340 (5) None of these
212. A common topology to any network is _ __ topology 247. The two major types of computer chips are (1)
(1) Star (2) Bus (3) Tree (4) Ring (5) External memory chip (2) Primary memory chip (3)
None of these Microprocessor chip (4) None of these (5) Both 2 and
213. A flip flop has ____ stable status (1) Two (2) 3
five (3) four (4) Three (5) None of these 248. As compared to the secondary memory, the primary
214. Flip flop is also called as _____ (1) Stable (2) Tri memory of a computer is (1) Large (2) Cheap (3)
stable (3) bistable (4) not stable (5) None of these Slow (4) Fast (5) None of these
215. The number system that we use in our day to day life 249. Which of the following is a way to access secondary
is called the Number System __ . (1) Octal (2) memory? (1) Action method (2) Transfer method (3)
Decimal (3) hexadecimal (4) Binary (5) None of these

Karan Dhami-39
Density method (4) None of these (5) Random access 266. A typical personal computer used for business
memory . purposes would have... of RAM. (1) 4KB (2) 256 K
250. Which of the following memories allows (3) 64 K (4) 16 K (5) None of these
simultaneous read and write operations? (1) ROM (2)
EPROM (3) RAM (4) None of above (5) None of 267.Which computer memory is used for storing programs
these . and data currently being processed by the CPU? (1)
251. Which of the following memories has the shortest Mass memory (2) None of these (3) Non-volatile
access times? (1) Magnetic bubble memory (2) Cache memory (4) PROM (5) Internal memory
memory (3) Magnetic core memory (4) RAM (5)
None of these 268.Which of the following is a sec-ondary memory
253. A set.of information that defines the status of device? (1) Disk (2) Keyboard (3) ALU (4) All of
resources allocated to a process is (1) Process control (2) the above (5) None of these
ALU (3) Register Unit (4) None of these (5) Process 269. The difference between memory and storage is that
description memory is ......and storage is... (1) Permanent, temporary
254.Any method for controlling access to or use of .. (2) Temporary, permanent (3) Slow, fast (4) All of
memory is known (1) Memory map (2) None of these above (5) None of these
(3) Memory management (4) Memory instruction (5) 270. Which of the following regis-ters is used to keep
Memory protection track of address of the memory location where the next
255. A type of core store that has a lower access time than instruc-tion is located? (1) Memory address register (2)
the de-vices used for working store in the same Memory data register (3) Instruction register (4) None
processor is known as (1) Core memory (2) Address of these (5) Program counter
register (3) Fast core (4) Buffer (5) None of these 271. How many'address lines are needed to address each
memory location in a 2048 x 4 memory chip? (1) 10
257. A disk storage medium in the form of an assembly (2) 12 (3) 8 (4) 11 (5) None of these
contain-ing a single rigid magnetic disk permanently is (1)
Fixed disk (2) Card reader (3) Card punch (4) Disk 272.The memory which is pro-grammed at the
cartridge (5) None of these time it is manufactured (1) PROM (2) RAM (3)
258. A memory that is capable of determining whether a POM (4) EPROM (5) None of these
given da-tum is contained in one of its address is (1)
ROM (2) CAM (3) PROM (4) RAM (5) None of 273. Registers, which are partially visible to users and
these used to hold conditional, are known as (1) PC (2)
259. A method of implementing a memory management General purpose register (3) Memory address registers
system is (1) All of the above (2) Bridgeware (3) (4) Flags (5) None of these
Broadband coaxial system (4) Buddy system (5) None 274. The two basic types of record access methods are: (1)
of these Online and real time (2) Sequential and indexed (3)
260. A plastic card similar to a credit card but having some Direct and immediate (4) Sequential and random (5)
memory and a microprocessor embedded within it is (1) None of these
Chip card (2) Card punch (3) Magnetic tape (4) None 275.Which of the following memo-ries needs
of these (5) Punched paper tape refresh? (1) DRAM (2) SRAM (3) ROM (4) All of
261. The use of spooler programs and/or .........Hardware above (5) None of these
allows personal computer operators to do the processing 276. Access time is (1) seek time (2) seek time + latency
work at the same time a printing operation is in progress time (3) seek time - latency time (4) latency time (5)
(1) Registered mails . (2) Buffer (3) CPU (4) None of these
Memory (5) None of these 277. Seek time is (1) time to position the head over
262.Which chips using special ex-ternal equipment can proper cylinder (2) time to position the head over proper
reprogram (1) PROM (2) ROM (3) SAM (4) RAM sector (3) time to position the head over proper track (4)
(5) None of these none of above (5) None of these
263. Interface electronic circuit is used to interconnect I/O 278.A name or number used to identify a storage location
de-vices to a computer's CPU or (1) ALU (2) Register devices? (1) A byte (2) A record (3) All of above
(3) Buffer (4) Memory (5) None of these (4) An address (5) None of these
279. Which of the following regis-ters is loaded with the
264. Which term is used to describe RAM? (1) Dynamic contents of the memory location pointed by the PC? (1)
RAM (DRAM) (2) Static RAM (SRAM) (3) Videc Memory address registers (2) Instruction register (3)
RAM (VRAM) (4) None of these (5) All of the above Memory data registers (4) Program counter (5) None of
265. Which is the type of memory for information that these
does not change on your computer? (1) ROM (2) 280. Codes consisting of bars or lines of varying widths or
RAM (3) ERAM (4) RW/RAM (5) None of these lengths that are computer-readable are known as— (1) an

Karan Dhami-40
ASCII code (2) a magnetic tape (3) a bar code (4) an 249.(5) 250.(3) 251.(2) 252.(1) 253.(5) 254.(5) 255.(2)
OCR scanner (5) None of these 256.(1) 257.(4) 258.(2) 259.(4) 260-(5) 261 .(2) 262.(1)
281. A __ represents approximately one billion memory 263;(4) 264.(5) 265.(1 266.(2) 267.(5) 268.(1) 269.(2) 270.
location. (1) kilobyte (2) gigabyte (3) megabyte (5) 271 .(4) 272.(3) 273.(2) 274.(4) 275.(1) 276. (2) 277.
(4) terabyte (5) None of these (3) 278.(4) 279.(2) 280. (3) 281. (2) 282.(5) 283.(4) 284.
282. In a database ___ fields store numbers used to (1) 285. (2) 286. (4) 287. (3)
perform calculation. (1) Next (2) Key (3) Computer Networks
Alphanumeric (4) None of these (5) Numeric 1. _____terminals (formerly known as cash registers) are
283. A (n)_ is a program that makes the computer easier to often connected to complex inventory and sales computer
use. (1) Operating system (2) Application (3) Network systems. (1) Point-of-sale (POS) (2) Data (3) Sales (4)
(4) Utility (5) None of these Query (5) None of these
284. Storage that retains its data after the power is turned 2. Smaller and less expensive PC-based servers are
off is referred to as (1) non-volatile storage (2) replacing ____ in many busi-nesses. (1) supercomputers
volatile storage (3) sequential storage (4) direct (2) mainframes (3) laptops (4) clients (5) None
storage (5) None of these of these
285. Which of the following is the largest unit of storage ? 3. DSL is an example of a(n) _____ connection. (1)
(1) KB (2) GB (3) MB (4) TB (5) None of network (2) wireless (3) slow (4) None of these (5)
these broadband
286. 286. The person contributing the idea of the stored 4. A term used to describe interconnected computer
program was (1) Daniel Thomas (2) Charles Babbage configuration is (1) Micro program sequence (2)
(3) Howard Aiken (4) John Neumann (5) Modulation (3) Multiprocessing (4) Multiprogramming
Dennis Ritenie. (5) None of these
287. Which of the following refers to the memory in your 5. What is required when more than one person uses a
computer? (1) USB (2) DSL (3) RAM central computer at the same time? (1) Light pen (2)
(4) LAN (5) CPU Mouse (3) Terminal (4) Digitizer (5) None of
1.(4) 2.(1) 3-(4) 4.(1) 5-(3) 6-(2) 7-(3) 8.(1) 9-(4) 10.(2) these
11. (1) 12.(3) 13.(4) 14.(5) 15.(2) 16.(1) 17-(3) 18.(5) 19. 6. Multi user systems provided cost savings for small
(2) 20.(1) 21. (4) 22.(3) 23.(1) 24.(2) 25.(3) 26.(1) 27.(3) business because they use a single pro-cessing unit to link
28.(2) 29.(5) 30-(2) 31 .(5) 32.(2) 33.(1) 34.(1) 35-(4) 36. several (1) Personal computers (2) Dumb terminals (3)
(2) . 37.(4) 38.(3) 39.(1) 40.(2) 41. (3) 42.(4) 43.(3) 44.(1) Workstations (4) Mainframes (5) None of these
45.(5) 46.(3) 47.(1) 48.(5) 49.(3) 50.(4) 51.(5) 52.{1) 53. 7. A dumb terminal has (1) An embedded micro-
(4) 54,(2) 55.(3) 56.(2) 57.(4) 58. (2) 59.(3) 60.(4) 61. (2) proces- (2) Extensive memory (3) A keyboard and
62. (3) 63.(1) 64.(4) 65.(1) 66.(5) 67.(1) 68.(2) 69.(4) 70. screen (4) Independeh I processing (5) None of these
{2) 71 .(3) 72.(1) 73-(2) 74.(4) 75.(3) 76.(2) 77.J1) 78.(4) 8. What is the full form of USB as used in computer
79.(1) 80.(3) 81 .(4) 82.(2) 83.(5) 84.(4) 85,(3) 86.(2) 87. related activities ? (1) Universal Serial Bus (2) Ultra
(4) 88.(3) 89.(1) 90.(2) 91 .(5) 93.(1) 93.(4) 94.(2) 95.(1) Serial Block (3) United Service Block (4) Universal
96.(2) 97.(4) 98.(3) 99.(1) 100.(2) 101 .(5) 102.(4) 103.(5) Security Block (5) None of these
104.(2) 105.(3) 10G.(4) 107.(2) 108.(4) 109.(3) 110.(1) 9. A device that connects to a network without the use pf
111- (4) 112.(3) 113.(5) 114,{2) 115.(4) 116.(1) 117.(4) cables is said to be— (1) distributed (2) open source
118.(5) 119.(2) 120.(5) 121.(1) 122.(3) 123.(5) 124.(3) (3) centralized (4) wireless (5) None of these
125.(4) 12G.(5) 127 .(2) 128.(3) 129.(1) 130.(2) 131 .(4)
132.(3) 133.(5) 134.(1) 135.(2) 136.(3) 10. A ___ is a collection of com-puters and device
137.(4) 138.(2) 139.(1) 140.(5) 141 .(4) 142.(2) 143.(3) connected together. (1) network (2) memory card (3)
144.(5) 145.(1) 146.(3) 147.(4) 148.(3) 149.(1) 150~(3) protocol (4) central processing unit (5) None of these
151 .(2) 152.(2) 153.(1) 154.(4) 155.(2) 156.(3) 157 .(2) Allahabad Bank Clerk Exam, 31.08.2008
158.(4) 159.(3) 160.(5 161 .(2) 162.(3) 163.(4) 164.(1)
165.(2) 166.(4) 167-(1) 168,(2)169.(3) 170.(4) 171 .(5) 11. Multiplexing involves_ path and _ channel. (1) one,
172.(3) 173.(1) 174.{2) 175.(5) 176.(1) 177.(3) 178.(4) one (2) multiple, one (3) one, multiple (4) multiple,
179.(1) 180.(4) 181 .(5) 182.(2) 183.(1) 184.(3) 185.(2) multiple (5) None of these
186.(4) 187.(1) 188.(3) 189.(3) 190.(1) 191 ,(4) 192.{2) 12. Which one amongst them is not an inter network ? (1)
193.(3) 194.(1) 195.(2) 196.(4) 197.(1) 198.(5) 199.(4) LAN (2) WAN (3) MAN (4) All are internet works
200.(2) 201 .(3) 202.(4) 203.(3) 204.(4) 205.{1) 206.(2) (5) None of these
207.(3) 208.(4) 209.(3) 210.(1) 211. (5) 212.(1) 213.(4) 13. A proxy server is used for which of the following ? (1)
214.(3) 215.(2) 216.{1) 217.(4) 218.(2) 219.(5) 220.(3) To provide security against unauthorized users (2) To
221 .(1) 222.(2) 223.(3) 224.(4) 225.(1) 226.(4) 227.(2) provide TCP/IP (3) To process client requests for
228.(3) 229.(5) 230.(1) 231 .(2) 232.(4) 233.(5) 234.(1) datab'ase access (4) To process client requests for Web
235.(3) 236.(2) 237.(4) 238.(1) 239.(2) 240.(1) 241 .(3) pages (5) None of these
242.(2) 243.(4) 244.(1) 245.(3) 246.(4) 247.(5) 248.(4)

Karan Dhami-41
14. The ability to easily add addi-tional users means that a 28. Network components are connected to the same
net work is (1) secure (2) dedicated (3) decentralized cable in the— topology, (1) mesh (2) ring (3) bus
(4) scalable (5) None of these (4) star (5) mixed
15. If you wish to extend the length of the network without 29. Two or more computers connected to each other
having the signal degrade, you would use a (1) repeater for shar-ing information form a —— (1) pipeline
(2) switch (3) gateway (4) router (5) None of (2) router (3) server (4) tunnel (5) network
these
16. A(n) __ is a private corporate network, used 30. Office LANs that are spread geographically apart on a
exclusively by company employees. (1) intranet (2) large scale can be connected using a corporate —— (1)
local area network (3) peer-to-peer (4) Internet (5) CAN (2) WAN (3) DAN (4) LAN (5) TAN
None of these 31. For separating channels in FDM, it is necessary to use
17. A characteristic of a file server is which of the (1) Differentiation (2) Bandpass filters (3) Time slots
following ? (1) Acts as a fat client and is limited to one (4) All of the above (5) None of these
PC (2) Manages file operations and is limited to one PC 32. Encryption and decryption are functions of (1)
(3) Acts as a fat client and is shared on a network (4) Transport layer (2) None of these (3) Presentation layer
Manages file operations and is shared on a network (5) (4) Allot the above (5) Session layer
None of these
18. Which of the following terms is just the connection of 33. Which type of switching uses the entire capacity of a
networks that can be joined together? (1) Virtual private dedicated link? (1) Datagram Packet Switch-ing (2)
network (2) Internet (3) None of these (4) Extranct Virtual Circuit Packet Switching (3) Circuit switching
(5) Intranet (4) Message Switching (5) None of these
19. Servers are computers that provide resources to the
other computers connected to a _ (1) Mainframe (2) 34. A peimanent virtual circuit involves (1) All of the
Network (3) Super computer (4) Client (5) None of above (2) Data transfer (3) Connection release (4)
these Connection establishment (5) None of these
20. The most important or power-ful computer in a typical
network is (1) desktop (2) network cliejit (3) network 35. X.21 protocol consists of (1) Only physical level (2)
station (4) network server (5) None of these Frame and packet levels (3) Physical, frame and
pack-et levels (4) Physical and frame levels (5) None of
21. To make a notebook act as a desktop model, the these
notebook can, be connected to a__ which is connected to a 36. In OSI network architecture, the dialogue control and
monitor and other devices. (1) bay (2) network (3) token management are responsibility of (1) transport
port (4) docking station (5) None of these layer (2) network layer (3) session layer (4) data link
layer (5) none of above
22. A set of rules that computer on a network use to 37. In OSI network architecture, the routing is performed
communicate with each other are called (1) Protocol (2) by (1) data link layer (2) network layer (3) .transport
Regulations (3) Rules (4) Netiquettes (5) None of layer (4) session layer (5) none of above
these 38. Which of the following performs modulation and
23. Which of the following refers to a small, single site demodulation? (1) modem (2) satellite (3)
network? (1) CPJ (2) DSL (3) RAM (4) USB (5) coaxial cable (4) fiber optics (5) none of the above
LAN
24. Computer connected to a LAN {Local Area Network) 39. The process of converting analog signals into digital
can (1) share information and/or share peripheral signals so they can be processed by a receiving computer
equipment (2) go on line (3) run faster (4) E-mail is referred to as: (1) modulation (2) digitising (3)
(5) None of these synchronizing (4) demodulation
25. The __ is a device that connects n inputstom outputs, 40. How many OSI layers are covered in the X.25
(1) Crosspoint (2) Crossbar (3) None of these (4) standard? (1) Two (2) Seven (3) Three (4)
RAM (5) Modem Six (5) None of above
26. The sharing of a medium and its path by 2 or more 41. Layer one of the OSI model is (1) transport layer (2)
devices is called _. (1) Multiplexing (2) Encoxing (3) link layer (3) physical layer (4) network layer (5)
Line discipline (4) Modulation (5) None of these none of above .
42. The x.25 standard specifies a (1) technique for start-
27. Which multiplexing technique transmits ariatog signals stop data (2) technique for dial access (3) data bit rate
? (1) Asynchronous TDM (2) Synchronous TDM (3) (4) DTE/DCE interface (5) none of above
FDM (4) Both (2) and (3) (5) None of these
43. Which of the following communication modes
support -two-way traffic but in only one direction at a

Karan Dhami-42
time? (1) half duplex (2) simplex (3) three-quarters 55. Which data communication method is used to transmit
duplex (4) all of the above (5) none of the above the data over a serial communication link? (1) simplex
(2) half-duplex (3) None of above (4) band c (5)
44. Wh ch of the following might be used by a company to full-duplex
satisfy following communications needs? (1) front end 56. What is the minimum number of wires needed to send
processor (2) all of the above (3) controller (4) data over a serial communication link layer? (1) 2 (2)
concentrator ,, (5) multiplexer 1 (3) 4 (4) 6 (5) none of above
57. Which of the following types of channels moves data
45. The interactive transmission of data within a time relatively slowly? (1) narrow band channel (2) voice
sharing system may be best suited to (1) simplex lines band challen (3)- wide band channel
(2) biflex-lines (3) full duplex lines (4) half-duplex 58. Most data communications involving telegraph lines
lines use: (1) simplex lines (2) wideband channel (3) dialed
46. Which of the following statement is incorrect? (1) service (4) narrowband channel
Batch processing is the prefered processing mode for 59. A communications device that combines transmissions
telecommunication operation. (2) Half duplex line is a from several I/O devices into one line is a (1)
communication line in which data can move in two concentrator (2) modifier (3) full-duplex line (4)
directions, but not at the same time. (3} Teleprocessing multiplexer
combines telecommunications and DP techniques in online 60. How much power (roughly) a light emitting diode can
activities (4) The difference between synchronous and couple into an optical fiber? (1) 100 picowatts (2) 440
asynchronous trans mission is the clocking derived from microwatts (3) 100 microwatts (4) 10 miliwatts
the data in synchronous transmission.
61. The synchronous modems are more costly than the
47. Which of hte fallowing is considered a broad band asynchronous modems because (1) they contain clock
communication channel? (1) coaxial cable (2) fiber recovery circuits (2) they produce large volume of data
optics cable (3) all of above (4) microwave circuits (3) they transmit the data with stop and start bits (4)
they operate with a larger bandwidth (5) none of above
48. Which of the following is not a transmission medium?
(1) telephone lines (2). modem (3) coaxial cables (4) 62. Which of the following statement is correct? (1)
microwave systems terminal section of a synchronous modem contains the
scrambler (2) transmission section of a synchronous
49. Which of the following does not allow multiple uses or modern contains the scrambler (3) receiver section of a
devices to share one communication line? (1) synchronous modem contains the scrambler (4) control
concentrator (2) multiplexer (3) doubleplexer (4) section of a synchronous modem contains the scrambler
controller (5) none of the above
50. Which of the following signal is not standard RS 232- 63. In a synchronous modem, the digital-to-analog
C signal? (1) CIS (2) RTS (3) VDR (4) converter transmits signal to the (1) demodulator (2)
DSR modulator (3) equilizer (4) terminal (5) none of aobve
51. Which of the following statement is incorrect? (1) 64. Which of the following communications lines is best
Multiplexers are designed to accept data from several I/O suited to interactive processing appJIcatjons? (1) narrow
devices and transmit a unified stream of. data on one band channel (2) simplex lines (3) mixed band
communication tine (2) RTS/CTS is the way the terminal channels (4) full duplex lines (5) none of the above
indicates ringing (3) RTS/CTS is the way the DTE
indicates that it is ready to transmit data and the way the 65. A remote batch-processing I operation in which data is
DCW indicates that it is ready to accept data (4) HDLC solely input to a central computer would require (1)
is a standard synchronous communication protocol. telegraphp line (2) none of the above (3) mixed bad
channel (4) all of above (5) simplex lines
52. Which of the following is an advantage to using fiber
optics data transmission? (1) resistance to data theft (2) 66. A band is always equivalent to (1) a byte (2) a bit
fast data transmission rate (3) all of above (4) low (3) 100 bits (4) none of the above . (5) all of above
noise level 53. Which of the following is required to
communicate between two computers? (1) all of above 67. The loss in signal power as light travels down the fiber
including access to transmission medium (2) protocol (3) is called (1) interruption (2) progragation (3)
communication hardware (4) communications software scattering (4) attenuation (5) none of the above

54. The transmission signal coding method of Tl carrier is 68. Avalanche photodiode receivers can detect bits of
called (1) NRZ (2) Bipolar (3) Manchester (4) transmitted data by receiving (1) 200 photons (2) 100
Binary photons (3) 2000 photons (4) 300 photons' (5) none
of the above

Karan Dhami-43
69. Communiction circuits that transmit data in both between an interface (3) between peers (4) across an
directions but not at the same time are operating in (1) a interface (5) none of the above
simplex mode (2) all the options (3) a full duplex mode 85. __ is used in operating system to separate mechanism
(4) a half duplex mode (5) an asynchronous mode from policy (1) Two level implementation (2) Single
70. An example of a medium speed, switched level implementation (3) Multi level implementation (4)
communications service is (1) series 1000 (2) data All of the above (5) none of the above
phone 50 (3) All of the above (4) ODD (5) none of 86. The operating system creates. (1) Virtual computers
the above (2) All the above (3) Virtual device (4) Virtual space
71. In communication satellite,multiple repeaters are (5) none of the above
known as (1) detector (2) modulator (3) transponders 87. from the physical computer__shares characteristics
(4) stations (5) none of the above with both hardware and software (1) All the above (2)
72. While transmitting-odd-parity coded symbols, the Software (3) Data (4) Operating system (5) none
number of zeros in each symbol is (1) odd (2) of the above
unknown (3) a and b both (4) even (5) none of the 88. Multiprogramming systems: (1) Are easier to develop
above 73. Data communications monitors available on the than single programming systems (2) Execute more jobs
software marked include (1) TOTAL (2) ENVIRON/1 in the same time period (3) Execute each job faster (4)
(3) BPL (4) Tel net (5) none of the above Are used only one large mainframe computers. (5) none
of the above
74. An exajnple of an analog communication method is (1) 89. Which is the first program run on a computer when the
laser beam (2) microwave (3) voice grade telephone computer boots up? (1) Operating system (2) System
line (4) none of the above (5) all of the above software (3) System operations (4) All the above . (5)
none of the above
75. Number of bits per symbol used in Baudot code is . (1) 90. Which is built directly on the hardware? (1)
7 (2) 9 (3) 8 (4) 5 (5) none of the above Computer Environment (2) Application Software (3)
Data base System (4) Opera ti ng System (5) none of
76. What is the main difference between DDCMP and the above
SDLC? . (1) DDCMP has a message header (2) 91. Which of the following-Operating System does not
DDCMP does not need special hardware to final the implement multitasking truly? ^ (1) Windows 98 (2)
beginning of a message (3) SDLC has a IP address (4) Windows NT (3) Windows XP (4) none of the above
SDLC does not use CRC (5) none of the above (5) MS DOS
92. Which runs on computer hardware and serve as
77. An example of digital, ratherthan analog, platform for other software to run on? (1) Application
communication is (1) DOS (2) DDD (3) WATS Software (2) Opera ti ng System (3) System Software
(4) DOT (5) none of the above (4) All the above (5) none of the above
78. Terminals are required for (1) real-time, batch 93. Which Is the layer of a computer system between the
processing & time-sharing (2) real time, timesharing & hardware and the user program (1) Operating
distributed message processing (3) real-time, time environment (2) System environment (3) Operating
sharing & message switching (4) real time, distributed system (4) All the above (5) none of the above
processing & manager inquiry (5) none of the above 94. The primary purpose of an operating system Is: (1)
79. The receive equilizer reduces delay distortions using a To make computers easier to use (2) To allow peopleto
(1) gearshift (2) descrambler (3) tapped delay lines use the computer, (3) To keep systems programmers
(4) difference engine (5) none of the above employed (4) To make the most efficient use of the
80. Ina synchronous modem, the receive equilizer is computer hardware (5) none of the above
known as (1) impariment equilizer (2) adaptive 95. When a computer is first turned on or restarted, a
equilizer (3) statistical equilizer (4) compromise special type of absolute.loader called _ is executed (1)
equilizer (5) none of the above Compile and Go loader (2) Bootstrap loader (3) Boot
81. The channel in the data-communication model can be loader (4) Relating loader (5) none of the above
(1) postal mail services (2) telephone lines (3) none of 96. Which of the following Operating systems is better for
the above (4) radio lines (5) all the above Implementing a Client-Server network (1) MS DOS (2)
82. A data terminal serves as an (1) Effector (2) sensor Windows 2000 (3) Windows 98 (4) Windows 95 (5)
(3) neither a nor b (4) both a and b (5) none of the none of the above
above 97. The operating system manages (1) all the above (2)
83. Which of the following transmission systems provide Processes (3) Disks and I/O devices/ (4) Memory (5)
the highest data rate to in individual device? (1) none of the above
telephone lines (2) computer bus (3) voice and mode 98. Usually, in MSDOS, the primary hard disk drives has
(4) lease lines (5) none of the above . the drive letter __ (1) A (2) B (3) D (4) C (5)
84. A protocol is a set of rules governing a time sequence none of the above
of events that must take place (1) between modems (2)

Karan Dhami-44
99. What is the function of an operating system? (1) 7. What is the shortcut key you can press to create a
Manages computer's resources very efficiently (2) copyright symbol? (1) Alt+Ctrl+C (2) Alt + C (3) Ctrl
Takes care of scheduling jobs for execution (3) Manages + C (4) Ctrl + Shift + C (5) None of these
the flow of date and instructions (4) none of the above 8. How many columns can you insert in a word
(5) All of the above document in maximum? (1) 35 (2) 45 (3) 55 (4) 65
100. Which is not the function of the Operating System? (5) None of these
(1) Memory management (2) Disk management (3) 9. What is the smallest and largest font size available in
Virus Protection (4) Application management (5) none Font Size tool on formatting toolbar? (1) 8 and 72
of the above (2) 8 and 64 (3) 12 and 72 (4) 12&16 (5) None
101. Which Operating System doesn't support networking of these
between computers? (1) Windows 95 (2) Windows 3.1 10. What is the maximum font size you can apply for any
(3) Windows 2000 (4) Windows NT (5) none of the character? (1) 163 (2) 1638 (3) 16038 (4)
above 16388 (5) None of these
101.Which Operating System doesn't support long file 11. Which of the following is graphics solution for
names? (1) MS-DOS (2) OS/2 (3) Windows 95 (4) Word Processors? (1) Clipart (2) WordArt (3) Drop
Windows NT (5) none of the above Cap (4) All of above (5) None of these
103. Which file keeps commands to execute automatically 12. The keystrokes Ctrl + I is " used to (1) Increase
when OS Is started? (1) autoexec.bat (2) any batch file font size (2) Inserts a line break (3) Indicate the text
(3) command.com (4) config.sys (5) none of the should be bold (4) Applies italic format to selected text
above (5) None of these
104. What should be the extension to execute files? 13. A character that is raised and smaller above the
(1) .EXE (2) All of the above (3) .COM (4) .BAT baseline is known as (1) Outlined (2) Raised (3)
(5) none of the above Superscript (4) Subscript (5) None of these
1.(1) 2.(2) 3.{5) 4.(4) 5.(3) 6.(2) 7-{3) 8-(1) 9-(4) 10(1) 14.. What is the purpose of inserting header and footer in
ll.(3) 12.(1) 13.(4) 14.(4) 15.(2) 16.f1) 17.(4) 18.(5) document? (1) To enhance the overall appearance of the
19.(2) 20.(4) 21. (4) 22.(1) 23.(5) 24.(1) 25.(5) 26.(1) document (2) To mark the starting and ending of page (3)
27.(3) 28.(4) 29.{5) 30.(2) 31. (3) 32.(5) 33.{1) 34.{4) To make large document more readable To allow page
35.(1) 36.(3) 37.(2) 38.(1) 39.(2) 40.(3) 41. (3) 42.(4) headers and footers appear on document when printed (5)
43.(1) 44.(2) 45.(4) 46.(1) 47.(3) 48.(2) 49.{3) 50.(3) None of these
5l-(2) 52.(3) 53.(1) 54.(2) 55.(5) 56.(2) 57.(1) 58.{4) 15. Which of the following function key activates the
59.(4) 60.(3) 61-(1) 62.(2) 63.(3) 64.(4) 65.{5) 66.(4) speller? (1) F5 (2) F7 (1) F9 (4) Shift +F7 (5)
67.(4) 68.(1) 69.(4) 70.(4) 71. (3) 72.(2) 73.(2) 74.(5) None of these
75.(4) 76.(2) 77. (1) 78.(3) 79.{3) 80.(2) 81 .(5) 82.(4) 16. The minimum number of rows and columns in MS
83.(2) 84.(3) 85.(1) 86.(1) 87.(4) 88.(2) 89.(1) 90.(4) Word document is (1) 1and1 (2) 2 and 1 (3) 2 and 2 (4)
91 .(5) 92.(2) 93.(3^ 94.(4) 95.(2) 96.(2) 97.(1) 98.(4) 3 and 3 (5) None of these
99.(5) 100.(3) 101 .(2) 102.(1) 103.(1) 104.(2) 17. Thesaurus tool in MS Word is used for (1) Spelling
suggestions (2) Grammar options (3) Synonyms and
1. Pressing F8 key for three times select (1) A word (2) Antonyms words (4) All of above (5) None of these
A sentence (3) A paragraph (4) Entire document (5) 18. Why Drop Caps are used in document? (1 ) To drop
None of these all the capita! letters (2) To automatically begin each
2. What happens if you press Ctrl + Shift + F8? (1) It paragraph with capital letter (3) To begin a paragraph
activates extended selection (2) It activates the with a large dropped initial capital letter (4) All of above
rectangular selection (3) It selects the paragraph on which (5) None of these
the insertion line is. (4) Insert picture (5) None of these 19. A bookmark is an item or location in document that
3. How can you disable extended selection mode? (1) you identify as a name for future reference. Which of the
Press F8 again to disable (2) Press Del to disable (3) following task is accomplished by using bookmarks? (1 )
Press Esc to disable (4) Press Enter to disable (5) None To add anchors in web page (2) To mark the ending of a
of these 4. What does EXT indicator on status bar of MS paragraph of document (3) To quickly jump to specific
Word indicate? (1) It indicates whether the external text location in document (4) To add hyperlinks in
is pasted on document or not (2) It indicates whether webpage (5) None of these
extended add-ons are installed on MS Word or not (3) It 20. A word processor would most likely be used to do (1 )
indicates whether Extended Selection mode is turned on or Keep . n account of money spent (2) Do a computer
off (4) Jobs in printing (5) None of these search in media center (3) Maintain an inventory (4)
5. What is the maximum number of lines you can set for a Type a biography (5) None of these
drop cap? (1) 3 (2) 10 (3) 15 (4) 20 (5) None of 21. What happens when you click on Insert > > Picture >
these > Clip Art (1) It inserts a clipart picture into document
6. What is the default number of lines to drop for drop (2) It lets you choose clipart to insert into document (3)
cap? (1) 3 (2) 10 (3) 15 (4) 20 (5) None of these

Karan Dhami-45
It opens Clip Art taskbar (4) All of above (5) None of Correct entry. (4) Insert the symbol or type the text in a
these Word document first. Then, select the text or symbol and
22. Which option is not available in Insert Table Autofit click the Edit menu followed by Paste Special. Select New
behavior? (1) Fixed Column Width (2) AutoFit to AutoCorrect Entry and then click OK. (5) None of these
Contents (3) Autofit to Window (4) Autofit to Column 33. AutoCorrect was originally designed to replace __
(5) None of these words as you type. (1) Short, repetitive (2)
23. To autofit the width of column ' (1) Double click the Grammatically incorrect (3) Misspelled (4) All of the
right border of column (2) Double click the left border of above (5) None of these
column (3) Double click the column header (4) All of 34. Which of the following is the second step in creating a
above (5) None of these macro? (1) Start recording (2) Using your mouse or
24. From which menu you can insert Header and Footer? keyboard, perform the task you want to automate (3)
(1) Insert Menu (2) View Menu (3) Format menu (4) Assign a keyboard shortcut to the macro (4) Give the
Tools Menu (5) None of these macro a name (5) None of these
25. After typing header text, how can you quickly enter 35. If you will be displaying or printing your document on
footer text? (1) Press PageDown key and type the text another computer, you'll want to make sure and select the
for footer (2) Click on Switch between Heder & Footer ______ option under the 'Save' tab. (1) Embed Fonts (2)
then type the text (3) Both of above (4) Embed True Type Fonts (3) Save True Type Fonts (4)
By pressing F8 (5) None of these Save Fonts (5) None of these
26. Which of the following statement is false? (1) You 36. In Word, the mailing list is known as the (1)
can set different header footer for even and odd pages (2) Datasheet (2) Source . (3) Data source (4) Sheet (5)
You can set different page number formats for different None of these
sections (3) You can set different header footer for 37. Which of the following is not one of the three 'Mail
first page of a section (4) You can set different header Merge Helper' steps? (1) Merge the two files (2) Create
and footer for last page of a section (5) None of these the main document (3) Set the mailing list
27. Where can you change the vertical alignment? (1) parameters (4) Create the data source (5) None of these
Formatting toolbar (2) Paragraph dialog box (3) Page 38. Which of the following button will allow you to add,
Setup dialog box (4) Standard toolbar (5) None of delete, or change records in your Data Source? (1) 'Data
these Source1 button (2) 'Edit' button (3) 'Edit Data Source'
28. To get to the 'Symbol' dialog box, click on the __ button (4) 'Data editing' button • (5) None of these
menu and choose 'Symbol', (1) Insert (2) Format (3) 39. It is possible to __ (1) Create (2) Modify (3)
Tools (4) Table (5) None of these Sort all of the above (5) None of these
29. Which of the following symbol sets would be most 40. What is the default font size of a new Word document
likely to contain a mathematical symboL such as a degree based on Normal template? (1) 10pt (2) 12 pt (3) 14
sign, greater than or equal to, or a Greek letter? (1) pt (4) All of above (5) None of these
Wingdings (2) Wingdings 3 (3) Webdings (4) Symbol 41. What is the default font used in MS Word document?
(5) None of these (1) Times New Roman (2) Arial (3) Algerian (4)
30. When assigning a shortcut key to a symbol, you should Preeti (5) None of these
always try to select a key or key combination that is: (1) 42. Which tab in Font dialog box contains options to apply
unassigned (2) Located on the ten-key pad section of font effects? (1) Font tab (2) Character Spacing (3)
your keyboard. (3) Assigned to another task. (4) From Text Effects (4) Standard Toolbar (5) None of these
the same font family as the symbol. (5) None of these 43. If you need to double underline a woTd, how will you
31. Suppose you wanted to create j an AutoCorrect entry do that? (1) Go to Format menu and then Font option.
that would type the words 'We regret to , inform you that Open Underline Style and choose Double Underline (2)
your submission has been declined' Of the following From Format menu choose Font option and then from Font
choices, which would be the best name you could assign to tab open Underline Style and select Double Underline (3)
this entry? (1) Regret (2) Subdual (3) We regret to Select the text then choose Format > > Font and on Font
inform you that your submission has been declined (4) tab open Underline Style and choose Double Underline (4)
Import (5) None of these Click double underline tool on formatting toolbar (5)
32. If you want to convert a symbol or several lines of None of these
text into an AutoCorrect entry, you should: (1) Insert the 44. DropCap means (1) All Caps (2) Small Caps (3)
symbol or type the text in a Word document first. Then, Title case (4) All of above (5) None of these
select the text or symbol and go to the AutoCorrect dialog 45. What is the short cut key to open Font dialog box? (1)
box. (2) Click the Tools menu and choose AutoCorrect Ctrl + F (2) Alt + Ctrl + F (3) Ctrl'+D (4) Ctrl +
Options. Then, click the Insert menu and choose Symbol Shift + D (5) None of these
(or click the Format menu and choose Paragraph) to add 46. How can you access the font size tool on formatting
the symbol or paragraph to AutoCorrect. (3) AutoCorrect toolbar? (1) Ctrlt S (2) Ctrl + Shift + S (3) Ctrl + P
can only accommodate one line of text. It is not possible to (4) Ctrl + Shift + P (5) None of these
convert a symbol or multiple lines of text into an Auto

Karan Dhami-46
47. How can you make the selected character Down-arrow (3) Both of above (4) Press Alt + Right
superscripted? (1) 'Ctrl + - (2) Ctrl + Shift + = (3) Alt Arrow (5) None of these
-*- Ctrl -t- Shift + = (4) All of above (5) None of these 67. How can you break the current column and start a new
48. What does Ctrl + - key effect? (1) Superscript (2) column immediately? (1) Press Ctrl + Shift + Enter (2)
Subscript (3) All Caps (4) Shadow (5) None of Press Alt + Enter (3) Press Ctrl + Enter (4) Press Alt +
these Shift + Enter (5) None of these
50. How can you increase the font size of selected text by 68. What is the smallest width of a column? (1) 0" (2)
one point every time? ^1) By pressing Ctrl+ ] (2) By 0.5" (3) 0.5" (4) 1.5" (5) None of these
pressing Ctrl + [ (3) By pressing Ctrl + } (4) By 69. If the number of columns is selected 1 and the line
pressing Ctrl + { (5) None of these between check box is marked, where is the line drawn? (1)
51. Which of the following line spacing is invalid? (1) in the left margin (2) in the right margin (3) both in left
Single (2) Double (3) Triple (4) Multiple (5) and right margin (4) None of Above
None of these 70. The other Col# are inactive when you've select 3
54. On which toolbar can you find Format Painter tool? columns. How will you activate those boxes? (1)
(1) Standard toolbar (2) Formatting toolbar (3) double click on spacing box (2) double click on inactive
Drawing Toolbar (4) Picture Toolbar (5) None of these Col# (3) Remove mark from Line between checkbox
55. Which indent marker controls all the lines except first (4) Remove mark from Equal Column Width check box
line? (1) First Line Indent Marker (2) Left Indent (5) None of these
Marker (3) Hanging Indent Marker (4) Right Indent 71. How much space in minimum must be provided
Marker (5) None of these between columns? (1) 0" (2) 0.5" (3) 1" (4) 1.5" (5)
56. How can you remove tab stop markers from ruler? (1) None of these
Double click the tab marker and choose Clear All (2) 72. To open Columns dialog box quickly (1) double
Drag the tab stop marker out of the ruler (3) Right click click on the left margin area of ruler (2) double click the
the tab stop marker and choose remove (4) All of above space between area on ruler (3) double click the right
(5) None of these margin in ruler (4) All of above (5) None of these
57. Which operation you will perform if you need to move 73. Which of the following command is not available in
a block of text? (1) Copy and Paste (2) Cut and Paste Tools menu? (1) Auto text (2) Autocorrect (3) Auto
(3) Paste and Delete (4) Paste and Cut (5) None of summarize (4) Macro (5) None of these
these 74. To move the cursor page to page of document (1)
58. What is the extension of Word files? (1) RL (2) Ctrl+PgDn (2) Ctrl+PgUp (3) Both of above (4) Ctrl
DOT (3) DOC (3) TXT (5) None of these + RightKey (5) None of these
59. Which of the following option Is not available in 75. Text boundary can be displayed or hidden from (1)
Insert» Picture? (1) Chart (2) Word Art (3) Clip Art Auto text option from Insert menu (2) Options from
(4) Graph (5) None of these Tools menu (3) Customize from Tools menu (4) All of
60. To insert a drop cap in one of the paragraph you should above (5) None of these
access (1) Insert Menu (2) Format (3) Tools (4) All 76. Which of the following are word processing software?
of above (5) None of these (1) WordPerfect (2) Easy Word (3) MS Word (4)
61. How many different positions can you set for drop All of above (5) None of these
cap? (1) 1 (2) 2 (3) 4 (4) 6 (5) 77. MS Office provides help in many ways, which of these
None of these is one of them? (1) What is this? (2) Office Assistant
62. What is the maximum number of lines you can set for (3) Help menu (4) All of the above (5) None of these
lines to drop box? (1) 3 (2) 5 (3) 10 (4) 78. You wished to justify text over the height of paper,
15 (5) None of these which option will you choose (1) Page Setup from File
63. Which of the following can NOT be used to create menu (2) Paragraph from Format menu (3) From
parallel style column? (1) Format Tabs (2) Table Insert formatting toolbar . (4) Font from Format menu (5)
Table (3) Insert Textbox (4) Format Columns (5) None of these
None of these 79. Which of the following is not of the merge process?
64. Which of the following is used to create newspaper (1) Sort the data source records (2) Format a main
style columns? (1) Format Tabs (2) Table Insert Table document (3) Edit a data source (4) Merge the two files
(3) Insert Textbox (4) Format Columns (5) None of to print or create a new document (5) None of these
these 80. There can be many ways to insert page number in
65. Columns dialog box can be opened from (1) Format a document. Which of the following lets you insert
menu Columns submenu (2) Double click on column page number (1) Page number from Insert menu (2)
space in ruler (3) Press Alt+ O + C (4) All of above Page Setup from file menu (3) Footnote from Insert menu
(5) None of these (4) Both a & c (5) None of these
66. You can jump to the next column by (1) Clicking 81. Which is not a data source component? (1) mail
with your mouse on the next column (2) Press Alt + merge toolbar (2) header row (3) data fields (4) data
records (5) None of these

Karan Dhami-47
82. Which of the following is not the part of standard 96. In a document what is the maximum number of
office suite? (1) Word Processor (2) Database (3) columns that can be inserted in MS Word Table? (1) 35
Image Editor (4) File manager (5) None of these (2) 15 (3) 63 (3) 65 (5) None of these
83. Where can you find the Draw Table tool button? (1) 97. You can detect spelling and grammar errors by (1)
Standard toolbar (2) Formatting toolbar (3) Drawing Press Shift + F7 (2) Press Ctrl+ F7 (3) Press Ait+ F7
toolbar (4) Tables and Formatting toolbar (5) None of (4) Press F7 (5) None of these
these 98. A screen element of MS Word that is usually located
84. Which of the following option in File pull down menu below the title bar that provides categorized options is (1)
is used to close a MS Word document? (1) Quit (2) Menu mar (2) Tool Bar (3) Status Bar (4) All of the
Close (3) Exit (4) New (5) None of these above (5) None of these
85. You need to jump to the next column breaking current 99. Which of the following is not valid version of MS
column right at the cursor position. How can you break Office? (1) Off ice XP (2) Office Vista (3) Office
column? (1) Pressing Ctrl + Enter (2) Pressing Alt + 2007 (4) Office Classic (5) None of these
Shift + Enter (3) Break command from Insert menu 100. You cannot close MS Word application by (1)
(4) Both 2 and 3 (5) None of these Choosing File menu then Exit submenu (2) Press Alt+F4
86. Superscript, subscript, outline, emboss, engrave are (3) Click X button on title bar (4) From File menu
known as (1) font style (2) font effects (3) word art choose Close submenu (5) None of these
(4) text effects (5) None of these 101. The key F12 opens a (1) Save As dialog box (2)
87. Shimmer, Sparkle text, Blinking Background etc. are Open dialog box (3) Save dialog box (4) Close dialog
known as (1) font styles (2) font effects (3) word art box (5) None of these
(4) text effects (5) None of these 102. What is the short cut key to open the Open dialog
88. The feature of Word that automatically adjusts the box? (1) F12 (2) Shift F12 (3) Alt + F12 (4) Ctrl +
amount of space between certain combination of F12 (5) None of these
characters so that an entire word looks more evenly 103. A feature of MS Word that saves the document
spaced. What is that feature called? (1) Spacing (2) automatically after certain interval is available on Save tab
Scaling (3) Kerning (4) Positioning (5) None of on Options dialog box (2) Save As dialog box (3) Both
these of above (4) Save immediately (5) None of these
89. Which of the following is not available in Font 104. Where can you find the horizontal split bar on MS
Spacing? (1) Normal (2) Loosely (3) Condensed Wordscreen ? (1) On the left of horizontal scroll bar (2)
(4) Expanded (5) None of these On the right of horizontal scroll bar (3) On the top of
90. Which of.the following position-is not available for vertical scroll bar (4) On the bottom of vertical scroll bar
fonts on MS Word? (1) Normal (2) Raised (3) (5) None of these
Lowered (4) Centered (5) None of these 105. Which of the following is not available on the Ruler
91. What is the maximum scale percentage available in of MS Word screen? (1) Tab stop box (2) Left Indent
Scale drop down box? (1) 500 (2) 200 (3) 100 (4) (3) Right Indent (4) Center Indent (5) All of them
90 (5) None of these are available on ruler
92. Bold, Italic, Regular are known as (1) font styles (2) 106. What is place to the left of horizontal scroll bar? (1)
font effects (3) word art (4) text effects (5) None of Tab stop buttons (2) View buttons (3) Split buttons (4)
these Indicators (5) None of above
93. Uppercase on Change Case dialog box and All Caps on 107. Which file starts MS Word? (1) Winword.exe (2)
Fonts dialog box both converts selected text into Capital Word.exe (3) Msword.exe (4) Word2003.exe (5)
Letters. What's the difference between the two? (1) Both None of these 108. How many ways you can save a
are same. They are only two different ways of capitalize document? (1) 3 (2) 4 (3). 5 (4) 6 (5) None of
text. " (2) It is faster to convert from Change Case than these
from Font dialog box (3) Change Case makes conversion 109. If you want to keep track of different editions of a
permanent but All Caps on Font can always be reverted (4) document which features will you use? (1) Editions (2)
All Caps on Font dialog box makes the change permanent Versions (3) Track Change (4) All of above (5) None
where Change Case can be always reverted (5) Nohe of of these
these 110. Background color or effects applied on a document is
94. If you need to hide some paragraphs, how can you do not visible in (1) Web layout view (2) Print Layout
it? (1) From Paragraph dialog box (2) From Font view (3) Reading View (4) Print Preview V1 (5)
dialog box (3) From Options Dialog box (4) All of None of these
above (5) None of these 111. What is a portion of a document in which you set
95. Changing the appearance of a document is called (1) certain page formatting options? (1) Page (2)
Proofing (2) Editing (3) Formatting (4) All of Document (3) Section (4) Page Setup (5) None of
above these
112. Borders can be applied to (1) Cells (2) Paragraph
(3) Text (4) All of above (5) None of these

Karan Dhami-48
113. Which of the following is not a type of page margin? 131. Which key deletes the character to the right of the
(1) Left (2) Right (3) Center (4) Top (5) None cursor? (1) End (2) Backspace (3) Home (4)
of these Delete None of these
114. What is the default left margin in Word 2003 132.Which would you choose to save a document with a
document? (1) 1" (2) 1.25" (3) 1.5" (4) 2" new name? (1) Press Ctrl+S (2) Click File, Save (3)
(5) None of these ClickTools, Options, Save (4) Click File, SaveAs (5)
115. What is gutter margin? (1) Margin that is added to None of these
the left margin when printing (2) Margin that is added to 133. Which would you choose to move selected text from
right margin when printing (3) Margin that is added to one place to another? (1) Move and Paste (2) Copy and
the binding side of page when printing (4) Margin that is Paste (3) Cut and Paste (4) Delete and Paste (5) None
added to the outside of the page when printing (5) None of these
of these 134 How do you magnify your document? (1) View,
116. Portrait and Landscape are (1) Page Orientation Zoom (2) Format, Font (3) Tools, Options (4) Tools,
(2) Paper Size (3) Page Layout (4) All of above (5) Customize (5) None of these
None of these 135. Which enables you to move directly to specific
117. If you need to change the typeface of a document, location In a document? (1) Subdocuments (2)
which menu will you choose? (1) Edit (2) View (3) Bookmarks (3) Cross-references (4) Outlines (5)
Format (4) Tools (5) None of these None of these
118. Which of the following is not a font style? (1) Bold 136. What are inserted as cross-reference in Word? (1)
(2) Italics (3) Regular (4) Superscript (5) None of Placeholders (2) Bookmarks (3) Objects (4) Word
these fields (5) None of these
119. Single spacing in MS-WORD document causes _ 137.Which keystroke is used for updating a field? (1) F6
point line spacing? (1) 10 (2) 12 (3) 14 (4) 16 (5) None (2) F9 (3) F11 (4) F12 (5) None of these
of these 120.Which would you choose to display the 138. A master document contains.......... each of which
statistics about a document? . (1) tools, word count (2) contains a pointer to a file on a disk? (1) Placeholders (2)
insert, statistics (3) tools, spelling and grammar (4) subdocuments (3) bookmarks (4) references
tools, statistics (5) None of these 139.When typing in a word field manually, what must you
121.Which feature do you use to create a newspaper like press to insert the code's braces? (1) Ctrl + F6 (2)
document? (1) Bullets & numbering (2) Tables (3) Ctrl + F9 (3) Alt + Fll (4) Shift+F12 (5) None of
Columns (4) Tab stops (5) None of these these
122. Which would you choose to list Synonyms & 140. A word field may consist of an optional field
Antonyms of a selected word? (1) Tools, Spellings Instruction called a(n) (1) subdocument (2) symbol (3)
Grammar (2) Tools, Language (3) Tools, Options (4) signal (4) switch (5) None of these
Insert, Cross-reference (5) None of these 141.Footnotes, endnotes, and Indexes are all Inserted as
123. Which language does MS-Word use to create (1) bookgiarks (2) cross-references (3) hyperlinks
Macros? (1) Visual C++ (2) Visual Basic (3) FoxPro (4) word fields (5) None of these
(4) Access (5) None of these 142.Before creating a master document, «you must
124. What do you call 'a collection of character and switch to........ (1) Normal View (2) Outline ViJto (3)
paragraph formatting commands'? (1) the defaults (2) a Web Layout View (4) Print Layout View (5) None of
template (3) a style (4) a boiler plate (5) None of these
these 143. Before moving a subdocument to another loftetion
125. In MS Word, Ctrl+S is for..... (1) Scenarios (2) within a master document, you must switch to, (1)
Size (3) Save (4) Spelling Check (5) None of these Normal View (2) Outline View (3) Web Layout View
126. Which key is used to increase left indent? (1) (4) Print Layout View (5) None of these
Ctrl+L (2) Ctrl+M (3) Alt+L (4) F10 (5) None 144. Which of the following can be used to navigate
of these documents? (1) frames (2) hyperi inks (3) web
127.Which key is used to select all the text In the toolbar (4) all of the above (5) None of these
document? (1) Ctrl+T (2) Ctr+A (3) Ctrl+F 145. Which of the following can be used to divide a web
(4) Ctrl+N (5) None of these page Into areas? (1) frames (2) theme (3) tableof
128.To undo the last work, press..... (1) Ctrl+U (2) contents (4) none of theabove (5) None of these
Ctrl+Y , (3) Ctrl+Z (4) Ctrl+W (5) None of 146. By default, Word automatically formats each heading
these in a table of contents as... (1) bookmarks (2) cross-
129. Which enables us to send the same letter to different references (3) hyperlinks (4) word-fields (5) None of
persons ? (1) macros (2) template (3) mail merge (4) these
indent (5) None of these 147. The ability to combine name and addresses with a
130. Which key deletes the character to the left of the standard document is called (1) document formatting (2)
cursor? (1) End (2) Backspace (3) Home (4) data base management (3) mail merge (4) form letters
Delete (5) None of these (5) None of these

Karan Dhami-49
148.Which feature Is used for monitoring all document 164. What would you do when you want to update the data
changes? (1) Edit Document (2) Monitor Change (3) in an embedded worksheet range?. (1) double click the
Track Change (4) Track all (5) None of these worksheet range object (2) right click worksheet range
149.When typing in a word field manually, what must you objects choose format object (3) edit the data in the
press to insert the code's braces? (1) Ctrl + F6 (2) destination document (4) edit the data in the source
Ctrl + F9 (3) Alt + F11 (4) Shift+F12 (5) None of document. (5) None of these
these 165. Which can be used for quick access to commonly
150. A word field may consist of an optional field used commands and tools? (1) Status bar (2) Tool bar (3)
Instruction called a(n)A, (1) subdocument (2). symbol' Menu bar (4) Title bar (5) None of these
(3) signal (4) switch (5) None of these 166. With which view can you see how text and graphics
151.Footnotes, endnotes, and Indexes are all inserted as will appear on the printed page? (1) Normal (2) Print
(1) bookmarks (2) cross-references (3) hyperlinks (4) Layout (3) Outline (4) Web Layout (5) None of these
word fields (5) None of these 167. Which simplifies the process of formatting text If the
152. Before creating a master document, you must same formatting Is required In more than one location? (1)
switch to........ (1) Normal View (2) Out[ineView (3) Auto Text (2) Format Painter (3) Font dialog box,, (4)
Web Layout View (4) Print Layout View (5) None of None of the above (5) None of these
these 168. Which of the following Is best for quick copy
153. Before moving a subdocument to another location operation? (1) Copy and Paste (2) Windows Clipboard
within a master document, you must switch to, (1) (3) Drag and Drop (4) Auto Text (5) None of these
Normal View (2) Outline View (3) Web Layout View 169. Which simplifies the process of formatting text if the
(4) Print Layout View (5) None of these same formatting is required in more than one location'' (1)
154. Which of the following can be used to navigate Auto Text (2) Format Painter (3) Font dialog box (4)
documents? (1) frames (2) hyperlinks (3) web toolbar All of the above (5) None of these
(4) all of the above (5) None of these 170. Which of the following is best for quick copy
155. Which of the following can be used to divide a web operation? (1) Copy and Paste (2) Windows Clipboard
page Into areas? (1) frames (2) theme (3) table of (3) Drag and Drop (4) Auto Text (5) None of these
contents (4) Space (5) None of these 171. Which of the following operations moves text from
156. By default, Word automatically formats each heading clipboard? (1) Copy (2) Paste (3) Drag and Drop (4)
In a table of contents as,.. (1) bookmams (2) cross- Cut (5) None of these
references (3) hyperlinks (4) word-fields (5) None of 172. Which of the following provides a list of synonyms?
these (1) Find command (2) Replace Command (3)
157. The ability to combine name and addresses with a Thesaurus (4) Spelling and Grammar (5) None of these
standard document Is called (1) document formatting (2) 173. Which of the following helps to reduce spelling error
data base management mail merge , (4) form letters (5) in the document? (1) Auto Format (2) Auto Correct (3)
None of these Smart Tags (4) Auto Text (5) None of these
158.Which feature is used for I monitoring all document 174. Auto text and Auto correct are____ tools . (1)
changes? (1) Edit Document (2) Monitor Change (4) styling (2) editing (3) designing (4) none of the above
Track Change (4) Track all (5) None of these (5) None of these
159. When sharing data in Office, the .........document is 175. Which of the following enables you to make multiple
the document in which the data was first entered. (1) changes In a document at once? (1) find command (2)
source (2) destination (3) original (4) primary (5) Replace command (3) Drag and Drop (4) copy
None of these command (5) None of these
160.Which command Is used to establish a link between a 176. Which of the following commands should you
source document and a destination document? (1) Tools, always use before submitting a document to others? (1)
Link, Documents (2) Tools, Link (3) Edit, Link (4) find command (2) Replace command (3) Spelling and
Edit, Paste Special (5) None of these Grammar (4) Thesaurus (5) None of these
161. Which option enables automatic updates in 177. Which of the following enables you to paste data
destination documents? (1) embedding (2) objects (3) multiple times? (1) windows clipboard (2) office
links (4) relationships (5) None of these clipboard (3) both A and B (4) Scroll (5) None of
162. Which is an Office feature that makes It easy to edit these
embedded , objects? (1) pasting (2) visual editing (3) 178. Which of the following do you * use to change
tools, update, links (4) edit, links (5) None of this margins? (1) formatting tool bar (2) page setup dialog
163. Which Is true when you Insert an excel worksheet box (3) Standard toolbar (4) paragraph dialog box (5)
Into a word document? / (1) word Is the destination None of these
document (2) excel is the destination document (3) the 179. Which do you press to force a page break? (1)
worksheet is the destination document (4) the document CTRL+ALT (2) CTRL+break (3) CTRL+ Enter (4)
is the source document (5) None of these Alt + Shift (5) None of these

Karan Dhami-50
180. Which do you choose to create footer? (in MS Office 197. What is the shortcut key for "Superscript" the selected
2003) (1) format, header and footer (2) view, footer (3) text? (1) Ctrl + = (2) Ctrl + - (3) Ctrl+Shift + =
insert, header and footer (4) view, header and footer (5) (4) Ctrl+Shift + - (5) None of these
None of these 198. What Is the shortcut key for "Subscript" the selected
181. Which do you choose to create header? (in MS Office text? (1) Ctrl + = (2) Ctrl+- (3) Ctrl + Shift + =
2003) (1) format, header and footer (2) view, header (4) Ctrl + Shift + - (5) None of these
(3) insert, header and footer (4) view, header and ANSWER 1.(2) 2.(2) 3.(3) 4-(3) 5.(2) 6.(1) 7.(1) 8.(2) 9.
footer (5) None of these (1) 10. (2) 11-(1) 12.(4) 13.(3) 14.(4) 15.{2) 16.(1) 17.(3)
182. Which do you choose to shade words and paragraph? 18.(3) 19.(3) 20.(4) 21. (3) 22.(4) 23.(1) 24.(2) 25.(2) 26.
(1) format, borders and shading (2) insert, (4) 27.(3) 28.(1) 29.(4) 30.(1) 31. (2) 32.(1) 33.(3) 34.(3)
borders and shading (3) view, shading (4) none of 35.{2) 36.(3) 37.(3) 38.(3) 39.{4) 40. (2) 41. (1) 42.{1) 43.
the above (5) None of these (3) 44.(4) 45.(3) 46.(4) 47.(2) 48.(2) 49.(2) 50.(1) 51. (3)
183. To view headers and footers, you must switch to (1) 52.(3) 53.{2) 54.(1) 55.(2) 56.(2) 57.(2) 58.(3) 59.(4) 60.
normal view (2) print layout view (3) print preview (2) 61. (2) 62.(3) 63.(4) 64.(4) 65.(4) 66.(3) 67.(1) 68.(2)
mode (4) both B and C (5) None of these 69.(4) 70.(4) 71.(1) 72.(2) 73.(1) 74.(3) 75.(2) 76.(4) 77.
184. Which of the following can you change using the (4) 78.(1) 79.(1) 80.(1) 81.(1) 82.(4) 83.(4) 84.(2) 85.(3)
page setup dialog box? (1) margins (2) page orientation 86.(2) 87.(4) 88.(3) 89.(2) 90.(4) 91. (2) 92. (1) 93.(3) 94.
(3) vertical alignment (4) all of the above (5) None of (2) 95.(3) 96.(3) 97.(4) 98.(1) 99.'(2) 100.(4 101 .(1) 102.
these (4) 103.(1) 104.(3) 105.(4) 106.(2) 107.(1) 108.(1) 109.(2)
185. By default, your document prints with: (1) 1 inch 110.(4) 111.(3) 112.(4) 113.(3) 114.(2) 115.(3) 116.(1)
top and bottom margins (2) a portrait orientation (3) 117.(3) 118.(4) 119.(2) 120.(1) 121 .(3) 122.(2) 123.(2)
1.25 inches left and right margins (4) all of the above (5) 124.(3) 125.(3) 126.(2) 127.(2)' 128.(3) 129.(3) 130.(2)
None of these 131 .(4) 132.{3) 133.(3) 134.(1) 135.(2) 136.(4) 137.(2)
186. Switching between portrait and landscape modes 138.(2) 139.(2) 140.{4) 141 .(4) 142.(2) 143.(2) 144.(2)
involves the: (1) header and footer toolbar (2) print 145.(1) 146.(3) 147.(3) 148.(3) 149.(2) 150.(4) 151 .(4)
layout view (3) page setup dialog box (4) All of the 152.(2) 153.(2) 154.(2) 155.(1) 156.(3) 157.(3) 158.(3)
above (5) None of these 159.{1) 160.(4) 161 .(3) 162.(2) 163.(1) 164.(1) 165.(2)
187. What happens when you Insert an AutoShape by 166.(2) 167.(2) 168.{3) 169.(2) 170.(3) 171 .(2) 172.(3)
simply clicking in the document? (1) it appears near 173.(2) 174.(2) 175.(2) 176.(3) 177.(3) 178.(2) 179.(3)
the insertion point (2) It is inserted in its default size (3) 180.(4) 181 .(4) 182.(1) 183.(4) 184.(4) 185.(4) 186.{3)
is selected (4) all of the above (5) None of these 187.(4) 188.(3) 189.(2) 190.(3) 191 .(3) 192.(3) 193.(1)
188. What must be used to control the layering of objects? 194.(1) 195.(1) 196.(2) 197.(3) 198.(1)
(1) formatting tool bar (2) picture tool bar (3) drawing MS- EXCEL
tool bar (4) image tool bar (5) None of these 1. Which of the following is not a valid Zoom (1) 10 (2)
189. What is the shortcut key to "Center Alien" the 100 (3) 300 (4) 500 {5} None of these
selected text? (1) Ctrl + C (2) Ctrl + E (3) Ctrl + 2. The spelling tool Is placed on _toolbar (1) Standard
F (4) Shift+Alt (5) None of these (2) Formatting (3) Drawing (4) Reviewing (5) None
190.What is the shortcut key to "Undo" the last action In a of these
document? (1) Ctrl + X (2) Ctrl+Y (3) Ctrl+ 2 3. If you need a text to show vertically In a cell. How
(4) Ctrl + T (5) None of these will you achieve this? (1) Choose Vertical on Text
191. What is the shortcut key to "Insert Hyperllnk" in a alignment In Format Cells dialog box (2) Choose 90
document? (1) Ctrl + H (2) Ctrl + L (3) Ctrl + K Degrees in Orientation of Format Cells dialog box (3)
(4) Ctrl + P (5) None of these Choose Distributed from the Vertical drop down list of
192. What is the shortcut key for "Find and Replace" Format Cells dialog box (4)-'Choose Center Across
dialog box? (1) Ctrl + F (2) Ctrl + R (3) Ctrl + H Selection from Horizontal combo box In Format Cells
(4) Ctrl+Shift + F (5) None of these dialog box (5) None of these
193. What is the shortcut key for Spelling Check in 4. Can you set 0,5 Inch left Indentation for a cell in
document? (1) F7 (2) Shift+F7 (3) Ctrl + F7 (4) Excel? (1) Excel does not have 1 ^Indentation feature
Alt + F7 (5) None of these (2) \fybu can specify Indentation only If you turn the rulers
194. What is the shortcut key to Update Formula in a on (3) Indentation can be set from Format Cells dialog
table? (1) F9 (2) Alt+FB (3) Ctrl + F9 (4) Shift+ F9 box (4) The Indentation can be specified only when
(5) None of these printing (6) None of these
195. What is the shortcut key to Close Active Document In 5. You can automatically adjust the ! size of text in a cell
Microsoft Word? (1) Ctrl + F4 (2) Shift + F (3) if they do not fit in width by (1) Double clicking on the
Ctrl+Shift + F4 (4) Ctrl + D (5) None of these right border of column header (2) From Format choose
196. What is the shortcut key for "Font" dialog box? (1) Columns and then Autofit Selection (3)From Format Cells
Ctrl + F (2) Ctrl + D (3) Ctrl + G (4) Ctrl + dialog box mark Shrink to fit check box (4) All of above
F3 (5) None of these (5) None of these

Karan Dhami-51
6. Formatting a cell In Currency, you can specify (1) condition to check (2) You can set condition to look for
Decimal Places (2) Currency Symbol (3) Both of above Bold and apply Italics on them. (3) You can apply Font,
(4) None of above (5) None of these border and pattern formats that meets the specified
7. Formatting a cell In Number format you can't set (1) conditions (4) You can delete any condition from
Decimal Places (2) Use 1000 separator (3) Negative Conditional Formatting dialog box if it is not requried (5)
numbers (4) Currency Symbol (5) None of these None of these
8. What Is entered by the function •today () (1) The 20. Which of the following is invalid statement? (1)
date value for the day according to system clock (2) The Sheet tabs can be colored (2) Some picture can be
time value according to system clock (3) Today's date as applied as a background of a sheet (3) You can set the
Text format (4) none of above (5) None of these column width automatically fit the amount of text (4)
9. Which function will you use to enter current time In a The width of a row and be specified manually or fit
woksheet cell? (1) =today( ) (2) -now ( ) (3) -time ( automatically (5) None of these
) (4) =CurrentTime ( ) (5) None of these 21. Which of the following is not an option in the spelling
10. Special category of Number tab in Format Cells dialog dialog box? (1) Edit (2) Ignore (3) Ignore all
box can be used to apply formats like (1) Zip Code (2) (4) Change (5) None of these
Phone Number (3) Both of above (4) None of above (5) 22. You can quickly change the appearance of your work
None of these by choosing Auto Format from the .... Menu (1) Edit (2)
11. Merge cells option can be applied from (1) Format View (3) Format (4) Tools (5) None of these
Cells dialog box Alignment Tab (2) Formatting toolbar 23. To protect a worksheet, you can choose Protection and
(3) Both of above (4) All of above (5) None of these the Protect Sheet from the..... menu (1) Edit (2) Format
12. Pre-made sheet formats like Simple, Classic, (3) Tools (4) Data (5) None of these
Accounting, Colorful etc can be applied from (1) from 24. You can open the Highlight Changes dialog box by
Fromat » Cells (2) from Format > > Auto format (3) choosing Track Changes from the .... Menu. (1) Edit (2)
from Table > > Auto format (4) All of above (5) None Insert (3) Format (4) Tools (5) None of these
of these 25. Which of the following is not a worksheet design
13. Which of the following format you can decide to apply criterion? (1) Efficiency (2) Auditabiiity (3)
or not In AutoFormat dialog box? (1) Number format (2) Description (4) Clarity (5) None of these
Border format (3) Font format (4) All of above (5) 26. To copy cell contents using drag and drop, press the
None of these (1) End key (2) Shift key (3) Esc key (4) All
14. How can you remove borders applied In cells? (1) the above (5) None of these
Choose None on Border , tab of Format cells (2) Open 27. If you press ..... the cell accepts your typing as its
the list on Border tool in Formatting toolbar then choose contents. (1) Enter (2) Ctrl + Enter (3) TAB (4)
first tool (no border) (3) Both of above (4) None of Insert (5) None of these
above (5) None of these 28. The autofill feature (1) Extends a sequential series
15. Where can you set the shedding color for a range of of data (2) Automatically adds a range of cell values (3)
cells in Excel? (1) Choose required color form Patterns Applies a boarder around selected cells (4) All of above
tab of Format Cells dialog box (2) Choose required color (5) None of these
on Fill Color tool in Formatting toolbar (3) Choose 29. What is the keyboard shortcut {button or buttons to be
required color on Fill Color tool in Drawing toolbar (4) pressed) for creating a chart from the selected cells? (1)
All of above (5) None of these F3 (2) F5 (3) F7 (4) F11 (5) None of
16. You can set Page Border in Excel from (1) From these
Border tab in Format Cells dialog box (2) From Border 30. you can use the formula palette to (1) format cells
tool in Formatting toolbar (3) From Line Style tool in containing numbers (2) create and edit formulas
Drawing toolbar (4) You can not set page border in Excel containing functions (3) entered assumptions data (4)
(5) None of these copy a range of cells (5) None of these
17. When all the numbers between 0 and 100 in a range 31. What Pivot Table toolbar button updates the data in a
should be displayed in Red Color, apply t (1) Use -ifO Pivot Table or Pivot Chart report if the source data chas
function to format the required numbers red (2) Apply changed (1) Format Report (2) Pivot Table
Conditional Formatting command on Format menu (3) (3) ,'Refresh Data (4) Show Detail (5) None of these
Select the cells that contain number between 0 and 100 32. What is an expression that tells how the numbers in a
then click Red color on Text Color tool (4) All of above determined set of cells are to be calculated? (1) Formula
(5) None of these (2) Field (3) Data (4) Query (5) None of these 33.
18. You can check the conditions against ___ when "Qtr 1, Qtr 2, Qtr 3" is an example of a (1) Formula (2)
applying conditional formatting (1) Cell value (2) Function (3) Series (4) Syntax (5) None of these
Formula (3) Both of above (4) writing (5) None of 34. You can edit existing Excel data by pressing the (1)
these Flkey (2) F2key (3) F3key (4) F4key (5) None
19. Which of the following is not true regarding of these
Conditional Formatting? (1) You can add more than one

Karan Dhami-52
35. The cell reference for a range of cells that starts in cell 50. Gridlines (1) May be turned off for display but
Bl and goes over to column G and down to row 10 is .... turned on for printing (2) May be turned on or off for
(1) G1-G10 (2) B1.G10 (3) B1;G10 (4) B1:G10 (5) printing (3) The be turned off for display and printing (4)
None of these a, b and c (5) None of these
36. A user wishes to remove a spreadsheet from a 51. You can print only an embedded chart by (1) Moving
workbook. Which is the correct sequence ofsgyents that the chart to a chart sheet before you print. (2) Formatting
will do this? (1) Go to File-Save As - Save As Type - the chart before you print (3) Selecting the chart before
Excel worksheet (2) Right click on the spreadsheet you print (4) a and c (5) None of these
tab and setect DELETE (3) Right click on the 52. Which of the following is a correct order of precedence
spreadsheet and select Insert – Entire Column (4) in a formula calculation? (1) Multiplication and division,
None of above (5) None of these exponential positive and negative value (2) Multiplication
37. What feature enables you to adjust or back solve the and division, positive and negative values, addition and
value in a cell to reach a desired outcome in a formula? subtraction (3) Addition and subtraction, positive and
(1) Scenario Summary report (2) Goal Seek (3) negative values, exponentiation (4) All of above (5)
Forecasting (4) Trend line (5) None of these None of these
38. what term describes a background that appears as 53. A function inside another function is called
a grainy, non smooth surface (1) gradient (2) a.....function. (1) Nested (2) Round (3) Sum (4)
pattern (3) solid (4) texture (5) None of these Text (5) None of these
39. Excel is a (1) Graphic program (2) None of these 54. How should you print a selected area of a worksheet, if
(3) Word processor (4) A spreadsheet (5) None of you'll want to print a different area next time? (1) On the
these file menu, point to print area, and then click set print area.
40. To create an interactive Pivot Table for the web, you (2) On the file menu, click print, and then click selection
use a Microsoft Office Web component called (1) under print what (3) On the view menu, click custom
HTML (2) Pivot Table Field List (3) Pivot Table List views, then click add (4) All of above (5) None of these
(4) Pivot Table Report (5) None of these 55. Youar German supplier still invoices for parts in
41. What function cJtsplays row data in a column or deutsche marks. How can you have Excel convert those
column data in a row? (1) Hypertink (2) Index (3) sums to Euros? (1) On the Insert menu, click Symbol and
Transpose (4) Rows (5) None of these from the currency symbols subset, select the Euro sign, (2)
42. When you insert an Excel file into a Word document, On the tools menu, click Add-lns, and select the Euro
the data are (1) Hyperlinked (2) Placed in a word table Currency Tools check box (3) Apply a selected
(3) Linked (4) Embedded (5) None of these background color (4) All of above (5) None of these
43. Except for the ...... function, a formula with a logical 56. Which function calculates your monthly mortage
function shows the word "TRUE" or "FALSE" as a result payment? (1) PMT (payments) (2) NPER (number of
(1) IF (2) AND (3) OR (4) NOT (5) None of periods) (3) PV (present value) (4) All of above (5)
these None of these
44. Macros are "run" or executed from the..... menu. (1) 57. If you are working in English (US), Chinese or
Insert (2) Format (3) Tools (4) Data (5) None Japanese, Excel 2002 can speak data as you enter it, to
of these help you verify accuracy. How do you activate this
45. You can open the consolidate dialog box byt feature? (1) Point to speech on the tools menu, and then
choosing Consolidate from the..... menu. (1) Insert (2) click show text to speech toolbar. (2) Click validation
Format (3) Tools (4) Data (5) None of these on the data menu (3) Point to speech on the tools menu,
46. Each excel file is called a workbook because (1) It and then click speech recognition (4) All of above
can contain text and data (2) It can be modified (3) It (5) None bf these
can contain many sheets including worksheets and chart 58. Which of the following methods can not be used to
sheets (4) You have to work hard to create it (5) None enter data in a cell? (1) Pressing an arrow key (2)
of these Pressing the tab key (3) Pressing the Esc key (4)
47. Which types of charts can excel produce? (1) Line Qlicking the enter button to the formula bar
graphs and pie charts only (2) Only line graphs (3) Bar 59. Which of the following will not set text in selected
charts, line graphs and pie charts (4) Bar charts and line cells to italics? (1) Pressing Ctrl + I on the keyboard (2)
graphs only (5) None of these Using the Tools - Wizard -Web Form menu item (3)
48. How are data organized in a spreadsheet? (1) Lines Using the Format - Cells -Font menu item (4) All of the
and spaces (2) Layers and planes (3) Rows and above (5) None of these
columns (4) Height and width (5) . None of these 60. Which of the following methods cannot be used to edit
49. What does the VLOOKUP function do? (1) Looks up the content of cell? (1) Pressing the Alt key (2)
text that contain V (2) Checks whether text is the same in Clicking the formula bar (3) Pressing F2 (4) Double
one cell as in the next (3) Finds related records (4) All clicking the cell (5) None of these 61. You can activate a
of above (5) None of these cell by (1) Pressing the Tab key (2) Clicking the cell

Karan Dhami-53
(3) Pressing an arrow key (4) All of above (5) None formula bar (3) Appears below the status bar (4)
of these Appears below the menu bar (5) None of these
62. Which of the following setup options can not be set in 75. How do you change column width to fit the contents?
the page setup dialog box? (1) Printer selection (2) (1) Single-click the boundary to the left to the column
Vertical or horizontal placement (3) Orientation (4) heading (2) Double click the boundary to the right of the
Row and column titles (5) None of these column heading (3) Press Alt and single click anywhere
63. What term refers to a specific set of values saved with in the column (4) All of above (5) None of these
the workbook? (1) Range (2) (3) Trend line (4) 76. When you work with large worksheets, you may need
What-if analysis (5) None of these to (1) size the worksheet to fit on the specific number of
64. Got functions? No? You need the insert function dialog pages (2) add and remove page breaks (3) specify only
box. How do you get it? (1) Right click a cell and then certain print areas (4) all of above (5) None of these
click insert (2) Click the insert menu and then click 77. Hyperlinks cannot be (1) Special shapes like stars
function (3) Type - in a cell (4) All of the above (5) and banners (2) Drawing objects like rectangles ovals (3)
None of these Pictures (4) All can be hyperlinks (5) None of these .
65. Which of the following describes how to select all the 78. You can use the horizontal and vertical scroll bars to
cells in a single column? (1) Right click on column and (1) Split a worksheet into two panes (2) View different
select Pick from list (2) Use data - text to columns menu rows and columns (3) Edit the contents of a cell (4)
item (3) Left click on the gray column title button (4) View different worksheets (5) None of these
Pressing Ctrl + A on the keyboard (5) None of these 79. What do we call a computer pro gram that orga-nizes
66. When you use the fill effects in the format data series data in rows and columns of cells? You might use this type
dialog box, you can not (1) rotate text on the chart (2) of program to keep a record of the money you earned
select a fore ground color (3) select a pattern (4) select moving lawns over the summer. (1) Spreadsheet program
a background color (5) None of these (2) Database program (3) Word processor program (4)
67. Paper spreadsheets can have all the same advantages Desktop publisher program (5) None of these
as an electronic spreadsheet except which of the 80. You can add an image to a template by clicking the
following? (1) Rows and columns (2) Headings (3) Insert Picture From File button on the .... Toolbar. (1)
Speed (4) All of above (5) None of these Standard (2) Formatting (3) Drawing (4) Picture
68. Which of the following is not a basic step in creating a (5) None of these
worksheet? (1) Save the workbook (2) Modify the 81. To drag a selected range of data to another worksheet
worksheet (3) Enter text and data (4) Copy the worksheet in the same workbook, use the (1) Tab key (2) Alt
(5) None of these key (3) Shift key (4) Ctrl key (5) None of these
69. What's a quick way to extend these numbers to a 82. When creating a vertical page break (1) The active
longer sequence, for instance 1 through 20? (1) Select both cell must be Al (2) The active cell can be anywhere in the
cells, and then drag the fill handle over the range you- worksheet (3) The active cell must be in row 1 (4) The
want, for instance 18 more rows (2) Select the range you active cell must be in column A (5) None of these
want, include both cells, point to fill on the Edit menu, and 83.To activate the previous cell in a pre-selected range
then click down. (3) Copy the second cell, click in the press (1) the Alt key (2) the Tab key (3) the Enter key
cell below it, on the standard toolbar click the down arrow (4) none of above (5) None of these
on the Paste button, and then click Paste Special (4) All 84. When the formula bar is activated, you can see (1)
of above (5) None of these The Edit Formula button (2) The Cancel button (3) The
70. To insert three columns between columns D and E you Enter button (4) All of above (5) None of these
would (1) Select column D (2) Select column E (3) 85. In a worksheet you can select (1) Entire worksheet
Select columns E, F and G (4) Select columns D, E, and (2) Rows (3) Columns (4) a, b, and c (5) None of
F (5) None of these these
71. To center worksheet titles across a range of cell, you 86. When you print preview a worksheet (1) the entire
must (1) Select the cells containing the title text and use worksheet is displayed (2) the selected range is
the fill handle to center the text across a range of cells (2) displayed (3) the active portion of the worksheet is
Widen the columns (3) Select the cells containing the displayed (4) a, b and c (5) None of these
title text and use the fill handle to center the text across a 87. You can group noncontiguous worksheets with (1)
range of cells (4) Widen the column (5) None of these The group button on the standard toolbar (2) The shift
72.When integrating Ms-Word and Excel, Word is usually key and the mouse (3) The Ctrl key and mouse (4) The
the (1) Server (2) Source (3) Client (4) None alt+enter key (5) None of these
(5) None of these 88. Weight refers to (1) The print density of
73. Charts tips can (1) Show the formatting of a data characters (2) The height of the printed character (3)
label (2) Show the name of a data series (3) Show the Upright or Santed shape (4) The sign and
value of data point (4) b and c (5) None of these appearance f characters (5) None Of these
74. The Name box (1) Shows the location of the 89. When you link data maintained in Excel workbook to
previously active cell (2) Appears t the left of the a Word document (1) The Word document cannot be

Karan Dhami-54
edited (2) The Word document contains a reference to commands on a shortcut menu (3) With buttons on the
the original source application (3) The word document standard toolbar (4) All of the above (5) None of these
must contain a hyperlink (4) The word document contains 101. You can zoom a worksheet (1) With the mouse
a copy of the actual data (5) None of these pointer in Print Preview (2) With the zoom button on the
90. When you see a cell with a red triangle in the top right Print Preview toolbar (3) With the Zoom command on
corner, what does this signify? (1) There is an error in the view menu (4) All of the above (5) None of these
the cell . (2) There is a comment associated with 102. You can not link Excel worksheet data to a Word
the cell (3) The font color for text in the cell is red (4) document (1) With the right drag method (2) With a
A formula cannot be entered into the cell (5) None of hyperlink (3) With the copy and paste -special commands
these (4) With the copy and paste buttons on the standard
91. To hold row and column titles in places so that they do toolbar (5) None of these
not scroll when you scroll a worksheet, click the (1) 103. This type of software is similar to an accountant's
Unfreeze panes command on the window menu (2) worksheet (1) Word processing (2) Database (3)
Freeze panes command on the window menu (3) Hold Spreadsheets (4) Graphics (5) None of these
titles command on the edit menu (4) Split command on 104. which function will calculate the number of workdays
the window menu (5) None of these between 6/9/2004 and 8/12/2004? (1) Workday (2)
92. Which of these is a quick way to copy formatting from Date (3) Networkdays (4) All of the above (5) None
a selected cell to two other cells on the same worksheet? of these
(1) Use Ctr! to select all three cells, then click the paste 105. Data marker on a chart are linked to data points in a .
button on the standard toolbar (2) Copy the selected cell, worksheet therefore, (1) You can automatically apply
then elect the other two cells, click style on the Format formatting to a data series (2) You can change the
menu, then click Modify (3) Click format painter on the position of a data marker and automatically change the
Formatting toolbar twice then click in each cell you want data point value in the worksheet (3) You can change a
to copy the formatting to (4) All of above (5) None of data print value and automatically are draw the chart (4) a
these and b (5) None of these
93. To edit data in an embedded Excel worksheet object in 106. When you group worksheets (1) You can enter
a Word document (1) Use the Excel menu bar and variable data on multiple worksheets at one time (2) You
toolbars insjde the word application (2) Edit the can print more than*one worksheet at a time (3) You can
hyperlink (3) Edit the data in a Excel source application enter common data, formats, and formulas on multiple
(4) Use the Word menu bar and toolbars (5) None of worksheets at one time (4) b, and c (5) None of these
these 107. You can use the format painter , multiple times before
94. Status indicators are located on the (1) Vertical scroll you turn it offby (1) You can use the format painter
bar (2). Horizontal scroll bar (3) Formula bar button only one time when you click it (2) Double
(4).Formatting toolbar (5) None of these clicking the format painter button (3) Pressing the Ctrl
95. You can open the scenario Manager dialog box by key and clicking the format painter button (4)
choosing scenarios from the ..... menu. (1) View (2) Insert Pressing Alt key and clicking the format painter button (5)
(3) Format (4) Tools (5) None of these None of these
96. You can open the Sort dialog box by choosing Sort 108.The default header for a worksheet is (1) Your
from the ..... menu (1)View (2) Format (3) Tools name (2) The date and time (3) None (4) The sheet tab
(4) Data (5) None of these name 109. Which of the following is an absolute cell
97. When working in the page break preview, you can (1) reference? (1) !A!1 (2) SA$1 (3) #a#l (4)
view exactly where each page break occurs (2) add or Al (5) None of these
remove page breaks (3) change the print area (4) all of 110. What symbol is used before a number to make it a
above (5) None of these label? (1) "(quote) (2) = (equal) (3) _ (underscore)
98. A data map is helpful (1) When you have too much (4) * (apostrophe) (5) None of these
data to chart (2) To show a geographic distribution of 111. Which symbol must ail formula begin with? (1) = (2)
data (3) To compare data points (4) To show changes + (3) ( (4) e (5) None of these
in data over time (5) None of these 112. Which of the following formulas is not entered
99. Hounding errors can occur (1) When you use correctly? (1) =10+50 (2) =B7*B1 (3) =B7+14
multiplication, division or exponentiation in a formula (2) (4) 10+50 (5) None of these
When you use addition and subtraction in a formula (3) 113. Which of the following formulas will Excel Not be
Because Excel uses hidden decimal places in computation able to calculate? (1) =SUM(Sales)-A3 (2)
(4) When you show the results of formulas with different =SUM(A1:A5)*.5 (3) =SUM(A1:A5)/(10-10) (4)
decimal places' than the calculated results (5) None of =SUM(A1:A5)-10 (5) None of these
these 114.A typical worksheet has .... Number of columns (1)
100. You can copy data or formulas (1) With the copy, 128 (2) 256 (3) 512 (4) 1024 (5) None of
paste and cut commands on the edit menu (2) With these 115. How many characters can be typed in a single

Karan Dhami-55
cell in Excel? (1) 256 (2) 1024 (3) 32,000 (4) Ctrl+F5 (3) Click Save on the Windows Start button (4)
65,535 (5) None of these Select Edit>Save (5) None of these
116. A worksheet can have a maximum of.... Number 130. You can edit a cell by (t) Clicking the formula
of rows (1) 256 (2) 1024 (3) 32,000 (4) button (2) Double clicking the cell to edit it in-place (3)
65,535 (5) None of these Selecting Edit > Edit Cell from the menu (4) None of
117. Which of the following is not an example of a value? above (5) None of these
(1) 350 (2) May 10,2001 (3) 57% (4) Serial Number 131. You can select a single range of cells by (1)
50771 (5) None of these Clicking the upper-left cell in a group of cells and then
118. The chart wizard term data series refers to (1) A pressing the Shift key while clicking the lower right cell in
chart legend (2) A collection of chart data markers (3) a group of cells (2) Pressing the Ctrl key while dragging
A set of values you plot in a chart (4) A data label (5) over the desired cells (3) Pressing the Shift key and an
None of these 119. The Chart wizard term data categories arrow key (4) Dragging over the desired cells Correct (5)
refers to; (1) A chart plot area (2) A horizontal axis (3) None of these
The organization of individual values with a chart's data 132. Which elements of worksheet can be protected from
series (4) The data range that supply chart data (5) accidental modification (1) Contents (2) Objects (3)
None of these Scenarios (4) All of above (5) None of these
120. A worksheet range is a (1) A command used for data 133. You can use the drag and drop method to (1) Copy
modeling (2) A range of values such as from 23 to 234 cell contents (2) Move cell contents (3) Add cell
(3) A group of cells (4) A group of worksheets contents (4) a and b (5) None of these
121. Getting data from a cell located in a different sheet is 134. lt is acceptable of let long text flow into adjacent cells
called (1) Accessing (2) Referencing (3) Updating (4) on a worksheet when (1) Data will be entered in the
Functioning (5) None of these adjacent cells (2) No data will be entered in the adjacent
122. Tab scrolling button (1) Allow you to view a cells (3) There is not suitable abbreviation of the text (4)
different worksheet (2) Allow you to view additional There is not time to format the next (5) None of these
worksheet rows down (3) Allow you to view additional 135. How can you delete a record? (1) Delete the column
worksheet columns to the right (4) Allow you to from the worksheet (2) Select Data > Form from the
view additional sheets tabs (5) None of these menu to open the Data Form dialog box, find the record
123. Data can be arranged in a worksheet in a easy to and Click the Delete button (3) Select Data > Delete
understand manner using (1) auto formatting (2) Record from the menu (4) Click the Delete button on the
applying styles (3) changing fonts (4) all of above (5) Standard toolbar (5) None of these
None of these 136. Right clicking something in Excel: (1) Deletes the
124. You can use drag-and-drop to embed excel worksheet object (2) Nothing the right mouse button is there for left
data in a word document (1) By dragging a range of handed people (3) Opens a shortcut menu listing
excel data to the word button on the taskbar while everything you can do to the object (4) Selects
pressing the Ctrl key (2) By dragging a range of excel object (5) None of these
data to the word button on the taskbar while pressing 137. Documentation should include (1) Destination and
Shift key (3) By dragging a range of excel data to the users of the output data (2) Source of input data (3)
word button on the taskbar while pressing Alt key Information on the purpose of the workbook (4) All the
(4) None of above (5) None of these above (5) None of these
126. Excel uniquely identifies cells within a worksheet 138. Files created with Lotus 1-2-3 have an extension (1)
with a cell name (1) Cell names (2) Column numbers DOC (2) XLS (3) 123 (4) WK1 (5) None of these
and row letters (3) Column letters and row numbers (4) 139. To delete an embedded objects, first (1) Double
Cell locator coordinates (5) None of these click the object (2) Select the object by clicking it
127. To view a cell comment (1) click the edit comment (3) Press the Shift + Delete ' keys (4) Select it and then
command on the insert menu (2) click the display press the delete key (5) None of these
comment command on the window menu (3) position 140. Comments can be added to cells using (1) Edit >
the mouse pointer over the cell (4) click the Comments (2) Insert > Comments (3) File >
comment command on the view menu (5) None of these Comments (4) View > Comments (5) None of these
128. When you want to insert a blank imbedded excel 141. Which of the following is not a worksheet design
object in a word document you can (1) Click the object criterion? (1) Efficiency (2) Aditibility (3)
command on the insert menu (2) Click the office links Description (4) Clarity (5) None of these
button on the standard toolbar (3) Click the create 142. To copy cell contents using drag and drop press the
worksheet button on the formatting toolbar (4) (1) End key (2) Shift key (3) Ctrl key (4)
Click the import excel command on the file menu (5) Esc key (5) None of these
None of these 143. Which of the following is the latest version of Excel
129. To save a workbook, you: (1) Click the save button (1) Excel 2000 (2) Excel 2002 (3) Excel ME (4)
on the standard toolbar from the menu (2) Press Excel XP (5) None of these

Karan Dhami-56
144. When you copy a formula (1) Excel erases the comments (3) Formatting options (4) The resulting
original copy of the formula (2) Excel edits cell values of a formula instead of the actual formula (5)
references in the newly copied formula (3) Excel adjusts None of these
absolute cell references (4) Excel doesn't adjust 159. The numbers in our worksheet look like this: 1000.
relative cell references (5) None of these You want them to look like this: $1,000.00. How can you
145. The autofill feature (1) extends a sequential series accomplish this? (1) Click the Currency Style button on
of data (2) automatically adds range of cell values (3) the formatting toolbar (2) You have to retype everything
applies a boarder around the selected cells (4) none of and manually add the dollar signs, commas, and
the above j (5) None of these decimals. (3) Select Format > Money from the menu (4)
146.Which menu option can be used to split windows into All the above (5) None of these
two (1) View > window > split (2) Format > window 160. Which of the following is not a valid data type in
(3) Window > split (4) View > split (5) None of excel (1) Number (2) Character (3) Label (4)
these Date/time (5) None of these
147. You can use the formula palette to (1) Format cells 161. Excel worksheet cells work very similarly to what
containing numbers (2) Create and edit formulas common element of the windows graphical user
containing functions (3) Enter assumptions data (4) interface (1) Option buttons (2) List boxes (3) Text
Copy a range of cells (5) None of these boxes (4) Combo boxes (5) None of these
148. You can convert existing excel worksheet data an 162. Which of the following options is not located in the
charts to an HTML document by using (1) Internet Page Setup dialog box? (1) Page Break Preview. (2)
assistant wizard (2) FTP wizard (3) Intranet wizard (4) Page Orientation (3) Margins (4) Headers and Footers
Import wizard (5) None of these (5) None of these
149. A circular reference is (1) Geometric modeling tool 163. You want to track the progress of the stock market on
(2) A cell that points to a drawing object (3) A formula a daily basis. Which type of chart should you use? (1)
that either directly or indirectly depends on itself (4) Pie chart (2) Row chart (3) Line chart (4) Column
Always erroneous (5) None of these chart (5) None of these
150.Which of following is Not one of Excel's what-if 164. Without using the mouse or the arrow keys, what is
function? (1) Goal seek (2) Solver (3) Scenario the fastest way of getting to cell Al in a spreadsheet? (1)
manager (4) Auto Outline (5) None of these Press Ctrl +Home (2) Press Home (3) Press Shift +
151. When you insert an excel file into a word document. Home (4) Press Alt + Home (5) None of these
The data are (1) Hyperlinked placed in a word table (2) 165. Which of the following methods can not be used to
Linked (3) Embedded (4) Use the word menu bar and edit the contents of a cell? (1) Press the Alt key (2)
toolbars (5) None of these Clicking the formula bar (3) Pressing the F2 key (4)
152. Which of the following is not information you can Double clicking the cell (5) None of these
specify using the solver? (1) Input cells (2) Constraints 166. If you begin typing an entry into a cell and then
(3) Target cell (4) Changing cells (5) None of these realize that you don't want your entry placed into a cell,
153. Each excel file is called a workbook because (1) It you (1) Press the Erase key (2) Press Esc (3) Press
can contain text and data (2) It can be modified (3) It the Enter button (4) Press the Edit Formula button (5)
can contain many sheets including worksheets and None of these
chart sheets (4) You have to work hard to create it (5) 167. Which of the following methods can not be used to
None of these enter data in a cell (1) Pressing an arrow key (2)
154. Excel probably considers the cell entry January 1, Pressing the Tab key (3) Pressing the Esc key (4)
2000 to be a (1) Label (2) Value (3) Formula (4) Clicking on the formula bar (5) None of these
Text string (5) None of these 168. Which of the following will not cut information? (1)
155. You can enter which types of data into worksheet Pressing Ctrl + C (2) Selecting Edit >Cut from the menu
cells? (1) Labels, values, and formulas (2) Labe31s and (3) Clicking the Cut button on the standard (4)
values but not formulas (3) Values and formulas but not Pressing Ctrl + X (5) None of these
labels (4) Formulas only (5) None of these 169. Which of the following is not a way to complete a
156. All worksheet formula (1) Manipulate values (2) cell entry? (1) Pressing enter (2) Pressing any arrow
Manipulate labels (3) Return a formula result (4) Use key on the keyboard (3) Clicking the Enter button on the
the addition operator 157.Which of the following is a Formula bar (4) Pressing spacebar (5) None of these
correct order of precedence in formula palcuiation? (1) 170. You can activate a cell by (1) Pressing the Tab key
Multiplication and division exponentiation positive and (2) Clicking the cell (3) Pressing an arrow key (4) All
negative values (2) Multiplication and division, positive of the above (5) None of these
and negative values, addition and subtraction (3) 171. Text formulas: (1) Replace cell references (2)
Addition and subtraction, positive and negative values, Return ASCII values of characters (3) Concatenate and
exponentiation (4) All of above (5) None of these manipulate text (4) Show formula error value (5) None
158. The Paste Special command lets you copy and paste: of these
(1) Multiply the selection by a copied value (2) Cell

Karan Dhami-57
172. How do you insert a row? (1) Right-click the row the column width (3) Decrease the column width (4)
heading where you want to insert the new row and select Adjust the row height (5) None of these
Insert from the shortcut menu (2) Select the row heading 182. The name box (1) Shows the location of the
where you want to insert the new row and select Edit > previously active cell (2) Appears to the left of the
Row from the menu (3) Select the row heading where formula bar (3) Appears below the status bar (4)
you want to insert the new row and click the Insert Row Appears below the menu bar (5) None of these
button on the standard toolbar (4) All of the above (5) 183. Comments put in cells are called (1) Smart tip
None of these (2) Cell tip (3) Web tip (4) Soft tip (5) None of
173. Which of the following is not a basic step in creating these
a worksheet? (1) Save workbook (2) Modifiy the 184. Which is used to perform what if analysis? (1)
worksheet (3) Enter text and data (4) Copy the Solver (2) Goal seek (3) Scenario Manager (4)
worksheet (5) None of these Allof above (5) None of these
174. How do you select an entire column? (1) Select Edit 185. You can use the horizontal and vertical scroll bars to
> Select > Column from the menu (2) Click the column (1) Split a, worksheet into two panes (2)View different
heading letter (3) Hold down the shift key as you click rows and columns edit the contents of a cell (3) Edit the
anywhere in the column, (4) Hold down the Ctrl key contents of a cell (4) view different worksheets (5) None
as you click anywhere in the column (5) None of these of these
175. How can you print three copies of a workbook? (1) 186. Hyperlinks can be (1) Text (2) Drawing objects (3)
Select File>Properties form the menu and type 3 in the Pictures (4) All of above (5) None of these
Copies to print text box. (2) Select File >Print from the 187. To activate the previous cell in a pre-selected range,
menu and type 3 in the Number of copies text box. (3) press (1) The Alt key (2) The Tab key (3) The Enter
Click the Print button on the standard toolbar to print the key (4) All of the above (5) None of these
document then take it to Kinko's and have 2 more 188. Which button do you click to add up a series of
copies made (4) Press Ctri+P+3 (5) None of these numbers? (1) The autosum button (2) The Formula
176. To create a formula, you first: (1) Select the cell you button (3) The quicktotal button (4) The total button (5)
want to place the formula into (2) Type the equals sign (-) None of these
to tell Excel that you're about to enter a formula (3) 189. When the formula bar is active, you can see (1) The
Enter the formula using any input values and the edit formula button (2) The cancel button (3) The enter
appropriate mathematical operators that make up your button (4) All of the above (5) None of these
formula (4) Choose the new command from the file menu 190. To copy formatting from one area in a worksheet and
(5) None of these apply it to another area you would use: (1) The Edit>Copy
177. To center 'worksheet titles across a range of cells, you Format and Edit>Paste Format commands form the menu.
must (1) Select the cells containing the title text plus the (2) The Copy and Apply Formatting dialog box, located
range over which the title text is to be centered (2) under the Format>Copy and Apply menu. (3) There is no
Widen the columns (3) Select the cells containing the way to copy and apply formatting in Excel You have to do
title text plus the range over which the title text is to it manually (4) The Format Painter button on the standard
be enfettered (4) Format the cells with the comma style toolbar (5) None of these
(5) None of these 191. In a worksheet you can select (1) The entire
178. How do you delete a column? (1) Select the column worksheet (2) Rows (3) Columns (4) All of the above
heading you want to delete and select the Delete Row (5) None of these
button on the standard toolbar (2) Select the column 192. When you link data maintained in an excel workbook
heading you want to delete and select Insert Delete to a word document (1) The word document can not be
from the menu (3) Select the row heading you want to edit (2) The word document contains a reference to the
delete "and select Edit>Delete from the menu (4) original source application (3) The word document
Right click the column heading you want to delet and must contain a hyperlink (4) The word document
select delete from .the shortcut menu (5) None of these contains a copy of the actual data (5) None of these
179. How can you find specific information in a list? (1) 193. Which area in an excel window allows entering
Select Tools > Finder from the menu (2) Click the Find values and formulas (1) Title bar (2) Menu bar (3)
button on the standard toolbar (3) Select Insert > Find Formula bar (4) Standard toolbar (5) None of these
from the menu (4) Select Data > Form from the menu to 194. To hold row and column titles in place so that they do
open the Data Form dialog box and click the Criteria not scroll when you scroll a worksheet click the (1)
button (5) None of these Unfreeze panes command on the window menu (2)
180. When integrating word and excel, word is usually the Freeze panes command on the window menu (3) Hold
(1) Server (2) Destination (3) Client (4) Both b and titles command on the edit menu (4) Split command on
c (5) None of these the window menu (5) None of these
181. When a label is too long to fit within a worksheet cell, 195. To edit in an embedded excel worksheet object in a
you typically must (1) Shorten the label (2) Increase word document (1) Use the excel menu bar and toolbars
inside the word application (2) Edit the hyperlink (3)

Karan Dhami-58
Edit the data in a excel source application (4) Use the 209. Tab scroll buttons are place on Excel screen (1)
word menu bar and toolbars (5) None of these towards the bottom right corner (2) towards the bottom
196. To create a formula, you can use: (1) Values but not left corner (3) towards the top right corner (4) towards
cell references (2) Cell references but not values (3) the top left corner (5) None of these
Values or cell references although not both at the same 210. The Name box on to the left of formula bar (1)
time (4) Value and cell references (5) None of these shows the name of workbook currently working on (2)
197. Status indicators are located on the (1) Vertical shows tne name of worksheet currently working on (3)
scroll bar (2) Horizontal scroll bar (3) Formula bar (4) shows the name of cell or range currently working on (4)
Standard toolbar (5) None of these All of above (5) None of these
198. Which of the following is the oldest spreadsheet 211. Each excel file is a workbook that contains different
package? (1) VisiCalc 2) Lotus 1-2-3 (3) Excel (4) sheets. Which of the following can not be a sheet in
StarCalc (5) None of these workbook? (1) worksheet (2) chart sheet (3) module
199. Pounding errors can occur (1) When you use sheet (4) data sheet (5) None of these
multiplication, division, or exponentiation in a formula (2) 212. Which of the following is not the correct method of
When you use addition and subtraction in a formula (3) editing the cell content? (1) Press the Alt key (2) Press
Because excel uses hidden decimal places in computation the F2 key (3) Click the formula bar (4) Double click
(4) When you show the results of formulas with different the cell (5) None of these
decimal places that the calculated results (5) None of 213.You can merge the main document with data
these source in Excel. In mail merge operation, Word is usually
200. You can copy data or formulas (1) Wrth the copy, (1) server (2) source (3) client (4) none (5) None of
paste and cut commands on the edit menu (2) With these
commands on the shortcut menu (3) Wjth buttons on 214. How can you update the values of formula cells if
the standard toolbars (4) All of the above (5) None of Auto Calculate mode of Excel is disabled? (1) F8 (2)
these F9 (3) F10 (4) F11 (5) None of these
201. You can not link excel worksheet data to a word 215. You want to set such that when you type Baishakh
document (1) With the right drag method (2) With a and drag the fill .handle. Excel should produce Jestha,
hyperlink (3) With the copy and paste special commands Aashadh and so on. What will you set to effect that? (1)
(4) With the copy and paste buttons on the standard Fill Across Worksheet (2) Custom List (3) Auto Fill
toolbar. (5) None of these Options (4) Fill Series (5) None of these
202.Which of the following is a popular DOS based 216. Where can you change automatic or manual
spreadsheet package? (1) Word 2) Smart cell (3) Excel calculation mode in Excel? (1) Double CAL indicator
(4) Lotus 1-2-3 (5) None of these on status bar (2) Go to Tools > > Options > >
203. An excel workbook is a collection of (1) Workbooks Calculation and mark the corresponding radio button
(2) Worksheets (3) Charts (4) Worksheets and charts (3) Both of above (4) Press F7 (5) None of these
(5) None of these 217. How can you show or hide the gridlines in Excel
204. Excel files have a default extension of (1) Xls (2) Worksheet? (1) Go to Tools >> Options > > View tab and
Xlw (3) Wkl (4) 123 (5) None of these mark or remove the check box named Gridline (2)
205. You can use the format painter multiple times before Click Gridline tool on Forms toolbar (3) Both of above
you turn it off by (1) You can use the format painter (4) Press F7 (5) None of these
button on ly one time when you click it (2) Double 218. Which of the following Excel screen components can
clicking the format painter button (3) Pressing the Ctrl NOT be turned on or off ? (1) Formula Bar (2) Status
key and clicking the format painter button (4) Pressing Bar (3) Tool Bar (4) All of above (5) None of these
the Alt key and clicking the format painter button (5) 219. What happens when you press Ctrl + X after selecting
None of these some cells in Excel? (1) The cell content of selected cells
206. You can use the formula pallette to (1) format cells disappear from cell and stored in clipboard (2) The
containing numbers (2) create and edit formula cells selected are marked for cutting (3)The selected cells
containing functions (3) enter assumptions data (4) are deleted and the ceils are shifted left (4)The selected
copy a range of cells (5) None of these cells are deleted and cells are shifted up (5) None of these
207. When a range is selected, how can you activate the 220. Which of the following option is not available in
previous cell? (1) Press the Alt key (2) Press Tab (3) Paste Speciat dialog box? (1) Add (2) Subtract (3)
Press Enter (4) All of above (5) None of these Divide (4) SORT (5) None of these
208. Which tool you will use to join some cells and place 221. Which command will you choose to convert a column
the content at the middle of joined cell? (1) From Format of data into row? (1) Cut and Paste (2) Edit » Paste
Cells dialog box click on Merge Cells check box (2) Special » Transpose (3) Both of above (4) Press F7 (5)
From Format Cells dialog box select the Centered None of these
alignment (3) -From Format Cells dialog box choose 222. It is acceptable to let long text flow into adjacent cells
Merge and Center check box (4) Click on Merge and on a worksheet when (1) data will be entered in the
Center tool on formatting toolbar (5) None of these adjecent cells (2) no data will be entered in the adjacent

Karan Dhami-59
cells (3) there is no suitable abbrevition for the text 235. L Edit» Delete command (1) Deletes the content of a
(4) there is not time to format the text (5) None of these cell (2) Deletes Formats of cell (3) Deletes the comment
223. Which of the cell pointer indicates you that you can of cell (4) Deletes selected cells (5) None of these
make selection? (1) Doctor's symbol (Big Plus) (2) 236.To remove the content of selected cells you must issue
small thin plus icon (3) Mouse Pointer with anchor at the _____ command (1) Edit» Delete (2) Edit » Clear »
tip (4) Press F3 + Ctrl (5) None of these Contents (3) Edit »> Clear» All (4) Data » Delete (5)
224.Which of the cell pointer indicates that you can fill None of these
series? (1) Doctor's symbol (Big Plus) (2) small thin 237. The Delete key of keyboard is assigned to which
plus icon (3) Mouse Pointer with anchor at the tip (4) command in Excel? (1) Edit » Clear» Contents (2)
All of above (5) None of these Edit» Clear» All (3) Edit» Delete (4) All of above (5)
None of these
225. Which of the cell pointer indicate that you can move 238. If you need to remove only the formatting done in a
the content to other cell? (1) Doctor's symbol (Big Plus) range (numbers and formula typed there should not be
(2) small thin plus icon (3) Mouse Pointer with anchor removed), you must (1) From Edit menu choose Clear
at the tip (4) All of above (5) None of these and then Formats (2) From Edit menu choose Delete (3)
226. You can auto fit the width of column by (1) double Click on Remove Formatting tool on Standard Toolbar (4)
clicking on the column name orr-column header (2) Double click the Format Painter and then press Esc key in
Double click on the cell pointer in worksheet (3) Double keyboard (5) None of these
clicking on column right border on column header 239. By default Excel provides 3 worksheets. You need
(4) Double clicking on the column left border of column only two of them, how will you delete the third one? (1)
header (5) None of these Right click on Sheet Tab of third sheet and choose Delete
227. Long text can be broken down into many lines within from the context menu (2) Click on Sheet 3 and from Edit
a cell. You can do this through We have 83 (1) Wrap menu choose Delete (3) Click on Sheet 3 and from Edit
Text in Format > > Cells guests online (2) Justify in Edit menu choose Insert (4) None of above (5) None of
> > Cells (3) Text Wraping in Format » Cells, Layout tab these
(4) All of above (5) None of these 240. Which of the following action removes a sheet from
228. When a row of data is to be converted into columns workbook? (1) Select the sheet, then choose Edit > >
(1) Copy the cells in row, select the same number of Delete Sheet (2) Select the sheet then choose Format »
cells in row and paste (2) Copy the cells in column then Sheet » Hide (3) Press Insert (4) All of above (5)
choose Edit > > Paste Special, then click Transpose and None of these
OK (3) Copy the cells then go to Format > > Cells then 241. While Finding and Replacing some data in Excel,
on Alignment tab click Transpose check box and click OK which of the following statement is valid? (1) You can
(4) Select the cells then place the cell pointer on new cell Find and Replace within the sheet or workbook (2) Excel
and choose Edit » Paste Special, mark Transpose check does not have option to match case for find (3) Excel
box and click OK. (5) None of these cannot replace (4) None are valid (5) None of these
229. Ctrl +p shortcut key in Excel will (1) Open the font 242. Which of the following is not true about Find and
dialog box (2) Apply double underline for the active cell Replace in Excel (1) You can search for bold and replace
(3) Fill down in the selection (4) All of above (5) with italics (2) You can decide whether to look for the
None of these . whole word or not (3) You can search in formula too (4)
230.The short cut key Ctrl +R is used in Excel to (1) You can search by rows or columns or sheets (5) None
Right align the content of cell (2) Remove the cell of these
contents of selected cells (3) Fill the selection with active 243. You can move a sheet from one workbook into new
t cells to the right (4) All of above (5) None of these book by (1) From Edit menu choose Move or Copy sheet
231. The command Edit »Fill Across Worksheet is active mark the Create a copy and Click OK (2) From Edit
only when (1) One sheet is selected (2) When many menu choose Move of Copy then choose {Move to end)
sheets are selected (3) When no sheet is selected (4) All and click OK (3) From Edit menu choose Move or Copy
of above (5) None of these then select {new book) from To Book list and click OK (4)
232. Which of the following series type is not valid for Fill All of above (5) None of these
Series dialog box? (1) Linear (2) Growth (3) 244. What is the short cut key to replace a data with
Autofill (4) Time (5) None of these another in sheet? (1) Ctrl + R (2) Ctrl + Shift + R (3)
233. Which of the following you can paste selectively Ctrl + H (4) Ctrl + F (5) None of these
using Paste Special command? (1) Validation (2) 245. Which of the following is invalid regarding the
Formats (3) Formulas (4) All of above (5) None of Protection in Excel? (1) Protect Sheet (2) Protect
these Workbook (3) Protect Workspace (4) All of above are
234. Paste Special allows some operation while you paste valid (5) None of these
to new cell. Which of the following operation is valid? (1) 246.The Trace Precedence on Auditing shows (1) Which
Square (2) Percentage (3) Goal Seek (4) Divide (5) cells are used in current formula (2) In which formula
None of these the current cell is used (3) Which cells are used in this

Karan Dhami-60
formula and in which formula this cell is used (4) 260. Which of the following can not be hidden from Tools
None of above (5) None of these > > Options then View tab? (1) Startup Task Pane (2)
247.The Trace Dependence in auditing shows (1) Which Formula bar (3) Status bar (4) Scroll Bar (5) None of
cells are used in current formula (2) In which formula these
the current cell is used (3) Which cells are used in this 261. What happens if you remove the check mark from
formula and in which formula this cell is used (4) Row & Column headers on Options dialog box? (1) This
All of above (5) None of these will remove row headings and column headings of your
248. The arrows created by Auditing can be removed by data (2) This will remove the column headings (A, B, C,
(1) Click on the arrow and press Delete ' (2) Click on (3) This will remove row and column heading of chart (4)
Remove All arrows on Formula Auditing toolbar (3) This will remove row and column heading of table (5)
Both of above (4) Press insert (5) None of these None of these
249. Which of the following options i not available to 262. The default font size in Excel worksheet is (1) 10
remove arrows of Formula Auditing? (1) Remove all points (2) 12 points (3) 14 points (4) None of above .
preceden arrows (2) Remove all dependent arrows (3) (5) None of these
Remove all arrows (4) Remove all arrows for this cell 263. The default font used In Excel is (1) Arlal (2)
(5) None of these Algerial (3) Times New Roman (4) Preetl (5) None of
250. Excel is a good application for What IF analysis. these
Which of the following tool help you for this? (1) 264. Comments put in cells are called..... (1) Smart Tip (2)
Formul Auditing (2) Research (3) Track Change (4) Cell Tip (3) Web Tip (4) Soft Tip (5) None of these
Goal Seek (5) None of these 265. Comments can be added to cells using..... (1) Edlt->
251. Which of the following tool you will use in Excel to Comments (2) Insert •> Comment (3) Fl I e->
see what must be the value of a cell to get required result? Qomments (4) Vlew-> Comments (5) None of these
(1) Formul Auditing (2) Research (3) Track Change 266. Which menu option can be used to split windows Into
(4) Goal Seek (5) None of these two? (1) Format •> Widow (2) VI ew •> Widow=> Split
252. To apply Goal Seek command your cell pointer must (3) Wlndow->Spllt (4) Vlew->Spllt (5) None of these
be in (1) The Changing cell whose value you need to 267. Getting data from a cell located in a different sheet is
find (2) The Result Cell where formula is entered (3) called. (1) Accessing (2) Referencing (3) Updating
The cell where your targeted value is entered (4) All (4) Functioning (5) None of these
of above (5) None of these 268. Which of the following is not a valid data type in
253. Which of the following is not What IF analysis tool in Excel? (1) Number (2) Character (3) Label (4)
Excel? (1) Goal Seek (2) Scenarios (3) Macros (4) Date/Time (5) None of these
All of above (5) None of these 269. Which elements of a worksheet can be protected from
254. You can set Excel in Automatic or Manual accidental modification? (1) Contents (2) Objects (3)
calculation mode. If it is in manual mode which key you Scenarios (4) All of the above (5) None of these
will press to update the formula values? (1) F9 (2) F5 270. A numeric value can be treated as label value If......
(3) F8 (4) F11 (5) None of these precedes It. (1) Apostrophe (') (2) Exclamation (I) (3)
255. By default the cell pointer moves down when you Hash (#) (4) Tilde(~) (5) None of these
press Enter. From where can you change this setting? (1) 271. Concatenation of text can be done using (1)
Tools > > Options » View tab (2) Tools » Options Apostrophe (') (2) Exclamation (I) (3) Hash(#) (4)
» Calculation tab (3) Tools » Options » Edit tab (4) Ampersand (&) (5) None of these
Tools » Options » Transition tab (5) None of 272. Which area In an Excel window allows entering
these values and formulas? (1) Title Bar (2) Menu Bar (3)
256. When you start typing the same value as of some cells Formula Bar (4) Standard Tool Bar (5) None of these
on same column, Excel automatically shows that text. This 273. Multiple calculations can be made In a single formula
feature is known as (1) AutoFill (2) AutoCorrect (3) using.... (1) Standard Formulas (2) Array Formula (3)
AutoComplete (4) AutoFormat (5) None of these Complex Formulas (4) Smart Formula
257. The default and maxium number of sheets for a new 274.An Excel Workbook is a collection of....... (1)
workbook in Excel 2003 is (1) 3 and 255 (2) 3 and Workbooks (2) Worksheets (3) Charts (4) Worksheets
256 (3) 1 and 255 (4) 1 and 256 (5) None of these and Charts (5) None of these
258. When you enter Sunday and fill right, Excel fill in 275.What do you mean by a Workspace? (1) Group of
with Monday, Tuesday and so on. From where Excel Col umns (2) Group of Worksheets (3) Group of Rows
knows what to fill in next? (1) Auto Complete (2) (4) Group of Workbooks (5) None of these
AutoFormat (3) Custom List (4) Calculation Automatic 276. MS-EXCEL is based on .-.....-? (1) WINDOWS
(5) None of these (2) DOS (3) UNIX (4) OS/2 (5) None of these
259.The minimum and maximum value you can set for 277. In EXCEL, you can sum a large range of data by
Save AutoRecovery Info in Excel are (1) 1 and 120 simply selecting a tool button called .....? (1) AutoFill (2)
minutes (2) O and 120 minutes (3) 2 and 60 minutes (4) Auto correct (3) Auto sum (4) Auto format (5) None of
1 and 10 minutes (5) None of these these

Karan Dhami-61
278. To select an entire column in MS-EXCEL, press? (1) 296. How many worksheets can a workbook have? (1) 3
CTRL + C (2) CTRL + Arrow key (3) CTRL + S (4) (2) 8 (3) 255 (4) All of above (5) None of these
All of the above (5) None of these 297. Which would you choose to create a bar diagram? (1)
279. To return the remainder after a number Is divided by Edit, Chart (2) Insert, Chart (3) Tools, Chart (4)
a divisor In EXCEL we use the function? (1) ROUND Format, Chart (5) None of these
( ) (2) FACTQ (3) MODQ (4) DIV() (5) 298. Which setting you must modify to print a worksheet
None of these using letterhead? (1) Paper (2) Margin (3)
280. Which function Is not available In the Consolidate Layout (4) Orientation (5) None of these
dialog box? (1) Pmt (2) Average (3) Max (4) 299. What do you call the chart that shows the proportions
Sum (5) None of these of how one or more data elements relate to another data
281. Which Is not tha function of "Edit, Clear" command? element? (1) XY Chart (2) Line Chart (3) Pie Chart
(1) Delete contents (2) Del ete notes (3) Delete eel Is (4) Column Chart (5) None of these
(4) Del ete formats (5) None of these 300. The spelling dialog box can be involved by choosing
282. Microsoft Excel Is a powerful........... (1) Word spelling from ___ menu. (1) insert (2) file (3) tools
processing package (2) Spreadsheet package (3) (4) view (5) None of these
Communication S/W Package , (4) DBMS package (5) 301. Which key do you press to check spelling? (1) F3
None of these (2) F5 (3) F7 (4) F9 (5) None of these
283. How do you rearrange the data In ascending or 302.To record a sequence of keystrokes and mouse
descending order? (1) Data, Sort (2) Data, Form (3) actions to play back later we use: (1) Media player (2)
Data, Table (4) Data Subtotals (5) None of these Sound Recorder (3) Calculator (4) Macro Recorder
284. Which Chart can be created in Excel? (1) Area (2) (5) None of these
Line (3) Pie (4) All of the above (5) None of these 303. We can save and protect 1he workbook by (1) Write
285. What will be the output If you format the cell Reservation Password (2) Protection Password (3)
containing 5436.8 as '#,##0.00'? (1) 5,430.00 (2) Read-only Recommended (4) Any of the above (5 None of
5,436.80. (3) 5,436.8 (4) 6.8 (5) None of these these
286. How do you display current date and time In MS 304. The first cell in EXCEL worksheet is labeled as (1) A
Excel? (1) date( ) (2) Today ( ) (3) now( ) (2) A1 (3) Aa (4) AO (5) None of these
(4) time( ) (5) None of these 305.What happens when dollar signs (S) are entered In a
287. How do you display current date only in MS Excel? cell address? (1) An absolute eel I address is created. (2)
(1) date ( ) (2) Today ( ) (3) now( ) (4) Cell address will change when it is copied to another cell.
time() (5) None of these (3) The sheet tab is changed. (4) The status bar does not
288. How do you wrap the text in a cell? (1) Format, display the eel I address. (5) None of these
cells, font (2) Format, cells, protection (3) format, 306. What are the tabs that appear at the bottom of each
cells, number (4) Format cells, alignment (5) None of workbook called? (1) Reference tabs (2) Position tabs
these (3) Location tabs (4) Sheet tabs (5) None of these
289. What does COUNTA ( ) function do? (1) counts 307.What is represented by the small, black square in the
cells having alphabets (2) counts empty eel Is (3) lower-right corner of an active cell or range? (1) Copy
counts cells having number (4) counts non-empty handle (2) Fill handle (3) Insert handle (4) Border (5)
cells (5) None of these None of these
290. What Is the short cut key to highlight the entire 308. In Excel, a Data Series is defined as what? (1) A
column? (1) Ctrl+C (2) Ctrl+Enter (3) Ctrl+PageUp type of chart. (2) A eel I reference. (3) A collection of
(4) Ctrl+SpaceBar (5) None of: ese related data (4) Adivision of results (5) None of these
291. In the formula, which symbol specifies the fixed 309. In Excel, the Fill Color button on the Formatting
columns or rows? (1) A.S (2) * (3) % (4) & toolbar is used for what? (1) To insert a background. (2)
(5) None of these To add borders. (3) To select a distribution of figures. (4)
292. Excel displays the current cell address In the.......... To add shading or color to a cell range. (5) None of these
(1) Formula bar (2) Status Bar (3) Name Box (4) 310. In help menu of Excel, which of the following tabs
Title Bar (5) None of these are found? (1) Contents tab (2) Answer Wizard tab
293. What Is the correct way to refer the cell AID on (3) Index tab (4) all of the above (5) None of these
sheets from sheetl? (1) sheet3IA10 (2) sheetllAlO (3) 311. A ______is a grid with labeled columns and rows. (1)
Sheets-A10 (4) A10 (5) None of these Dialog box (2) Worksheet (3) Clipboard (4)
294.Which language is used to create macros in Excel? (1) Toolbar (5) None of these
Visual Basic 4 (2) C (3) Visual C++ (4) Java (5) 312. The active cell: (1) is defined by a bold border
None of these around the ceil. (2) Receives the data the user enters. (3)
295. Which of the following is not a term of MS-Excel? It is the formula bar. (4) Only A and B (5) None of these
(1) Cells (2) Rows (3) Columns (4) Document 313.Which function Is used to calculate depreciation, rates
(5) None of these of return, future values and loan payment amounts? (1)

Karan Dhami-62
Logical (2) Math & Trigonometry (3) Statistical (4) 328. How do you tell one cell from another? (1) By
Financial (5) None of these numbers (2) By letters (3) By its address (4) by color
314. B7:B9 indicates: (1) Cells B7 and cell B9 only. (2) (5) None of these
Cells B7 through B9. (3) Cell BSonly. (4) None of the 329. Give me an example of a cell address. (1) 1125 (2)
a bove. (5) None of these 911 (3) 41A (4) A21 (5) None of these
315. The Cancel and Enter buttons appear In the: (1) 330.Which Is an example of a formula? (1) =A1+A2 (2)
Title bar (2) Formula bar (3) Menu bar (4) Sheet =add(AI:A2) (3) A1+A2 (4) SUM{A1:A2) (5) None of
tabs (5) None of these these
316. MS-EXCEL can be used to automate (1) Financial 331.Which is an example of a function? (1) =add(AI:A2)
statements. Business forecasting (2) Transaction (2) =A1+A2 (3) »SUM(A1:A2) (4) A1+A2 (5) None
registers, inventory control (3) Accounts receivable, of these
accounts payable (4) Any of the above (5) None of 332.What la the symbol for multiplying? (1) > (2) /
these (3) ! (4) * (5) None of these
317. NOT, AND, OR and XOR are (1) Logical 333. What Is the symbol for dividing? (1) / (2)=% (3)
Operators (2) Arithmetic operators (3) Relational & (4) fl (5) None of these
operators (4) None of the above (5) None of these 334. All formula In Excel start with (1) .> (2) + (3) =
318. In a report, you need to show the monthly rainfall in (4) - (5) None of these
Nepal. The best way to do this is to insert a (1) calendar 335.You can use a function to combine text from two cells
(2) photograph of rainfall (3) chart showing rainfall into one cell. But you can use an opera-tor to do the same
amounts (4) data base of rainfall (5) None of these thing. Which operator is that? (1) & (ampersand) (2) =
319. You want to record experiment information and (equal sign) (3) (space) (4) All of the above (5) None
create a chart that shows the rate of crystal growth over a of these
period of time. The best application to use would be: (1) 336. Two common wildcard characters that Excel
word processing (2) spreadsheet (3) database (4) recognizes are (1) * and? (2) < and > (3) * and /
graphics (5) None of these (4) + and – (5) None of these
320. You are editing an worksheet that you had previously 337. The divide symbol is (1) / (2) D (3) \
saved. If you want to save the edited sheet without losing (4) ) (5) None of these
the original one, which Command should you use? (1) 338. The multiplication arithmetic operator Is represented
New (2) Save As (3) Edit (4) Save (5) None of by which of the following symbols? (1) a (2) *
these (3) / (4) X (5) None of these
321. If you want to have a blank line after the title in a 339. To add two cells (Al and A(2) together you use the
worksheet, what is the best thing for you to do? (1) Re- following formula (1) =A1 + A2 (2) =Add(AI+A(2) (3)
format the spreadsheet (2) Insert a row (3) Increase the together (A 1:A(2) (4) AlplusA2 (5) None of these
column width (4) Use the spacebar (5) None of these 340. To make a number In cell Cl 10% smaller than the
322. In order to arrange the countries from those with the number In C3 you enter (1) -03*1.10 (2) +C3*110
highest population to those with the lowest, you need to (3) -C3%10 (4) -C3*.90 (5) None of these
sort on the population field in............... (1) ascending 341. On an excel sheet the active cell In Indicated by... (1)
order (2) descending order (3) alphabetical order (4) A dark wide boarder (2) A dotted border (3) A blinking
random order (5) None of these border (4) None of above (5) None of these
323. In order to perform a calculation in a spreadsheet, you 342. On an Excel sheet the active cell in indicated by (1)
need to use a: (1) table (2) formula (3) field A dark wide border (2) A dotted border (3) A blinking
(4) variable (5) None of these border (4) None of above (5) None of these
324.The box on the chart that contains the name of each 343. Using the Fl 1 shortcut key to create a chart on chart
Individual record Is called the__. (1) cell (2) title (3) sheet creates (1) A default chart (2) A 2-dimensional
axis (4) legend (5) None of these , column chart (3) A 2-dimensional bar chart (4) A 3-
325. If you want all of the white cats grouped together In dimensional line chart (5) None of these
the database, you need to sort by__. (1) Color, then 344. You can print (1) A range of cells by range name (2)
Gender (2) Pet Type, then Col or (3) Pet Type, then An entire worksheet (3) A single worksheet (4) All of
Gender (4) Color, then Pet Name (5) None of these the above (5) None of these
326. You accidentally erased a record In the sheet, What 345. You can create only a horizontal page break by first
command can be used to restore It Immediately? (1) selecting (1) A row below the row where you want the
Insert (2) Copy (3) Undo (4) Replace (5) None of page break to occure (2) A cell in row 1 (3) A cell
these in column A (4) a and c (5) None of these
327.Where a row and a column meet, what do you call 346. You can create hyperlinks from the Excel workbook
that? (1) A eel I (2) A block (3) A box (4) None of to (1) A webpage on company internet (2) A web page
the above (5) None of these on the internet (3) Other Office 97 application documents
(4) All (5) None of these

Karan Dhami-63
347. The cell reference fro a range of cells that starts in (2) Normal View (3) Page Break Preview (4) Split
cell Bl and goes over to column G and down to row View (5) None of these
lOis...... (1) DB1-G10 (2) B1.G10 (3) B1;G10 360. Auto Calculate will quickly add selected cells if
(4) B1:G10 (5) None of these you....... (1) right click on the status bar and select Sum
348.The advantage of using a spreadsheet is : (1) (2) click the AutoCalculate but-ton on the toolbar (3)
calculations can be done automatically (2) changing use the key combination Ctrl+$ (4) Double click the
data automatically updates calculations (3) more selection (5) None of these
flexibility (4) all of the above (5) None of these 361. The cell labeled 23. 54 the cell labeled F5 refers to (1)
349. The intersection of a row and column is called : (1) row F column 5 (2) column F row 5 (3) function
data (2) afield (3) a cell (4) an equation (5) None of available in cells (4) function key F4 (5) None of these
these 362. When you are typing an equation into a cell the first
350. There are three types of data found in a spreadsheet. thing that must be entered is (1) the first cell referenced
(1) data, words, numbers (2) equations, data, numbers (2) parenthesis (3) quotation marks (4) an equal sign
(3) words, numbers, labels (4) numbers formulas, labels (5) None of these
(5) None of these 363. Using the AutoSum button will replace in the selected
351. To select a column the easiest method is to........ (1) cell...... (1) the sum of values jn the cell's column. (2).
Double click any cell in the column (2) Drag from the nothing until'ybu select a range of cells (3) the sum of the
top cell in the column to the last cell in the column cell's row unless you change the range (5) None of these
(3) click the column heading (4) click the column label 364.Bookl is an example of how …... are numbered and
(5) None of these named during each work session (1) Active cell (2)
352. If you press...... the cell accepts your typing as its Formula bar (3) Menu bar (4) Name box (5) None of
contents. (1) Enter (2) Ctrl+Enter (3) Tab (4) Insert these
(5) None of these 365. Which of the following displays the contents of the
353. which of the following special function keys allow active cell? (1) Active cell (2) Formula bar (3)
the content in cell (1) esc (2) shift (3) return (4) Tab (5) Menu bar (4) Name box (5) None of these
None of these 366. Graphics objects on a chart are used to (1) Add
354. Which is not an advantage of using computerized emphasis to chart data (2) Add interest to a chart (3)
spread sheets? (1) flexibility of moving entries (2) speed Help explain the chart data (4) a, b, and c (5) None of
of calculation (3) ability of generate tables (4) cost of these
initial setup (5) None of these 367. What does SUMIF function do? (1) Adds up cell
355. To select several cells or ranges that are not touching values based on a condition (2) Adds all the numbers in a
each other, you would ... while selecting (1) hold down range of cells (3) Returns a subtotal in a list or database
the Ctrl key (2) hold down the Shift key (3) hold down (4) All of above (5) None of these
the Alt key (4) hold down Ctrl + Shin key (5) None of 368. You can insert labels for (1) All the data markers on
these a chart (2) A data series (3) A selected data marker (4)
356. What is the AutoSummarize feature used for in Word All (5) None of these
2000 (1) It creates a 250 word, 500 word or 1000 word 369. Tab scrolling buttons (1) Allow you.to view a
summary of the document (2) It adds Automatic different worksheet (2) Allow you to view additional
headwers, bold and italic characters as well as' automatic worksheet row down (3) Allow you to view additional
formatting of the document to give the look of a well worksheet columns to the right (4) Allow you to
summarized document (3) it summarizes the statistics of view additional sheet tabs (5) None of these
the document into a report such as total words, total 370. All macro keyboard shortcuts include the...... key (1)
characters, total pages, total paragraphs, file size ecs (4) Alt (2) Ctrl (3) F11 (4) Shift (5) None of
It identifies the key points in a document for your to share these
with others or quickly scan (5) None of these 371. To open the Format Cells dialog box, press (1) Alt*
357. A certain spreadsheet shows in Page Break Preview 1 (2) Ctrl + 1 (3) Ctrl + Shift + 1 (4) Fl (5) None of
that cells in Rows 1-25 have white background. The these
cells in row 26 that contain data have a dark grey 372. You can add a hyperlink to your worksheet by
background, when you click the Print button...... (1) pressing (1) Alt + K (2) Ctrl + H (3) Ctrl + K (4)
nothing will print because some cells with data have Ctrl + Shift + K (5) None of these
been omitted (2) only the cells with gray back-ground 373. To" move to the previous worksheet, press (1) Alt
will print (3) the whole sheet will print (4) only the cells + PgUp (2) Ctrl + PgUp (3) Ctrl + PgDn (4) Shift +
with white background will print (5) None of these '-'v Tab (5) None of these
358. A constant is another name for this type of data: (1) 374. Hyperlinks can be (1) Text (2) Drawing objects
number (2) equation (3) formula (4) description (3) Pictures (4) All of above (5) None of these
(5) None of these 375. To activate the previous cell in a pre selected range,
359. The view that puts a blue a blue line around each press (1) The Alt key (2) The Tab key (3) The Enter
page that would be printed is the...... (1) Print Preview key (4) None of the above (5) None of these

Karan Dhami-64
376. Which button do you click to add up a series of commands on ta shortcut menu (3) With buttgns on the
numbers? (1) The autosum button (2) The Formula standard toolbars (4) All of the above (5) None of these
button (3) The quicktotal button (4) The total button (5) 389. You can not link excel worksheet data to a word
None of these document (1) With the right drag method (2) With a
377. When the formula bar is active, you can see (1) The hyperlink (3) With the copy and paste special commands
edit formula button (2) The cancel button (3) The enter (4) With the copy and paste buttons on the standard
button (4) All of the above (5) None of these toolbar. (5) None of these
378. To copy formatting from one area in a worksheet and 390.Which of the following is a popular DOS based
apply it to another area you would use : (1) The Edit > spreadsheet package? (1) Word (2) Smart cell (3)
Copy Format and Edit>Paste Format commands form the Excel (4) Lotus 1-2-3 (5) None of these
menu. (2) The Copy and Apply Formatting dialog box, 391. An excel workbook is a collection of (1) Workbooks
located under the Formats Copy and Apply menu. (3) (2) Worksheets (3) Charts (4) Worksheets and charts
There is no way to copy and apply formatting in Excel (5) None of these
You have to do it manually (4) The Format Painter button 392. Excel files have a default extension of (1) Xls (2)
on the standard toolbar (5) None of these Xlw (3) Wkl (4) 123 (5) None of these
379. In a worksheet you can select (1) The entire 393. You can use the format painter multiple times before
worksheet (2) Rows (3) Columns (4) All of the above you turn it off by (1) You can use the format painter
(5) None of these button only one time when you click it (2) Double
380. When you link data maintained in an excel workbook clicking the format painter button (3) Pressing the Ctrl
to a word document (1) The word document can not be key and clicking the format painter button (4) Pressing
edit (2) The word document contains a reference to the the Alt key and clicking the format painter button (5)
original source application (3) The word document must None of these
contain a hyperlink (4) The word document contains a 394. What function displays row data in a column or
copy of the actual data (5) None of these column data in a row? (1) Hyperlink (2) Index (3)
381. Which area in an excel window allows entering Transpose (4) Rows (5) None of these
values and formulas (1) Title bar (2) Menu bar (3) 395. When you insert an Excel file into a Word document,
Formula bar (4) Standard toolbar (5) None of these the data are (1) Hyperlinked (2) Placed in a word table
382. To hold row and column titles in place so that they do (3) Linked (4) Embedded (5) None of these
not scroll when you scroll a worksheet click the (1) 396. Except for the .......function, a formula with a logical
Unfreeze panes command on the window menu (2) function shows the word "TRUE" or "FALSE" as a result
Freeze panes command on the window menu (3) Hold (1) IF (2) AND (3) OR (4) NOT (5) None of these
titles command on the edit menu (4) Split command on 397. Macros are "run" or executed from the...... menu. (1)
the window menu (5) None of these Insert (2) Format (3) Tools (4) Data (5) None
383. To edit in an embedded excel worksheet object in a of these
word document (1)Use the excel menu bar and toolbars 398. You can open the consolidate dialog box byt
inside the word application (2) Edit the hyperlink (3) choosing' Consolidate from the...... menu. (1) Insert (2)
Edit the data in a excel source application (4) Use the Format (3) Tools (4) Data (5) None of these
word menu bar and toolbars (5) None of these 399. Each excel file is called a work-book because (1) It
384. To create a formula, you can use: (1) Values but not can contain text and data (2) It can be modified (3) It
cell references (2) Cell references but not values (3) can contain many sheets including worksheets and
Values or cell references although not both at the same chart sheets (4) You have to work hard to create it (5)
time (4) Value and cell references (5) None of these None of these
385. Status indicators are located on the (1) Vertical 400. Which types of charts can excel produce? (1) Line
scroll bar (2) Horizontal scroll bar (3) Formula bar (4) graphs and pie charts only (2) Only line graphs (3) Bar
Standard toolbar (5) None of these charts, line graphs and pie charts (4) Bar charts and line
386. Which of the following is the oldest spreadsheet graphs only (5) None of these
package? (1) VisiCalc (2) Lotus 1-2-3 (3) Excel (4) 401. How are data organized in a spreadsheet? (1) Lines
StarCalc (5) None of these and spaces (2) Layers and planes (3) Rows and
387. Rounding errors can occur (1) When you use columns (4) Height and width (5) None of these
multiplication, division, or exponentiation in a formula (2)
When you use addition and subtraction in a formula (3) 402. What does the VLOOKUP function do? (1) Looks
Because excel uses hidden decimal places in computation up text that contain V (2) Checks whether text is the same
(4) When you show the results of formulas with different in one cell as in the next (3) Finds related records (4) All
decimal places that the calculated results (5) None of of above (5) None of these
these 403. Gridlines (1) May be turned off for display but
388. You can copy data or formulas (1) With the copy, turned on for printing (2) May be turned on or off for
paste and cut commands on the edit menu (2) With printing (3) The be turned off for display and printing (4)
a, b and c (5) None of these

Karan Dhami-65
data (3) To compare data points (4) To show changes in
404. You can print only an embedded chart by (1) data over-time (5) None of these
Moving the chart to a chart sheet before you print. (2)
Formatting the chart before you print (3) Selecting the 414. In MS Access-,-a table can have__ primary key /keys.
chart before you print (4) a and c (5) None of these (1) One (2) Two (3) Three (4) Four (5) None of
these
405.Which of the following is a cor-rect order of
precedence in a formula calculation? (1) Multiplication 415. __ cells involves creating a single cell by combining
and division, exponential positive and negative two or more selected cells. (1) Formatting (2)
value (2) Multiplication and division, positive and Merging (3) Embedding (4) Splitting (5) None of
negative values, addition and subtraction (3) these
Addition and subtraction, positive and negative values,
exponentiation (4) None of above (5) None of these 416. The horizontal and vertical lines on a worksheet are
called (1) cells (2) sheets (3) blocklines (4)
406. A function incite another function is called a gridlines (5) None of these
.....function. (1) Nested (2) Round (3) Sum (4) 417. To delete an incorrect character in a document, __ to
Text (5) None of these erase to the right of the insertion point. (1) press the left
mouse key (2) double click the right mouse key (3)
407. How should you print a selected area of a worksheet, press the BACKSPACE key (4) press DELETE key (5)
if you'll want to print a different area next time? (1) On None of these
the file menu, point to print area, and then click set 418. The most common subtotal used Subtotals command
print are (2) On the file menu, click print, j and then click is the __ function, which causes Excel to display a sum
selection | under print what (3) On the view menu, each time the corurol field change. (1) ADD (2) SUM
click custom views, then click add (4) All of above (5) (3) TOTAL (4) LIST (5) None of these
None of these
408. Youar German supplier still in-voices for parts in 419. Be default, Excel positions text in a cell ___. (1)
deutsche marks. How can you .have Excel convert those left-aligned (2) right-aligned (3) centered (4)
sums to Euros? (1) On the Insert menu, click Symbol and justified (5) None of these
from the currency symbols subset, select the Euro sign. (2) 420. To centre a paragraph using shortcut keys, press __.
On the tools menu, click Add-lns, and select the Euro (1) CTRL + C (2) CTRL + E (3) CTRL + L (4)
Currency Tools check box (3) Apply a selected CTRL + R (5) None of these
background color (4) All of above (5) None of these 421. Which of the following is the latest version of Excel?
(1) Excel 2000 (2) Excel 20.02 (3) Excel ME (4)
409. Which function calculates your monthly mortage Excel XP (5) None of these
payment? (1) PMT (payments) (2) NPER (number of
periods) (3) PV (present value) (4) All of above (5) 422. Which area in an Excel window allows entering
None of these values and formulas (1) Title Bar (2) Menu Bar (3)
410. If you are working in English (US), Chinese or Formula Bar (4) Standard Tool Bar (5) None of these
Japanese, Excel 2002 can speak data as you enter it, to
help you verify ac: curacy. How do you activate this 423.How are data organised in a spreadsheet? (1) Lines
feature? (1) Point to speech on the tools menu, and then and spaces (2) Layers and planes (3) . Height and
click show text to speech toolbar. (2) Click validation on width (4) Rows and columns (5) None of these
the data menu (3) Point to speech on the tools menu, and
then click speech recognition (4) All of above (5) None 424. Which of the following types of tables constraints
of these will prevent the entry of duplicate rows? (1) Primary
key (2) Unique (3) Null (4) Foreign key (5) None
411. You can open the Sort dialog box by choosing Sort of these
from the .... menu (1) View (2) Format (3) Tools 425. Each cell in a Microsoft Office Excel document is
(4) Data (5) None of these referred to by its cell address, which is the (1) cell's
column label (2) cell's column label and worksheet tab
412. when working in the page break preview, you can (1) name (3) cell's row label (4) cell's row and column la-
view exactly where each page break occurs (2) add or bels (5) None of these
remove page breaks (3) change the print area (4) all of 1.(4) 2.(1) 3.(2) 4.(3) 5.(3) 6.(3) 7.(4) 8.(1) 9.(2) 10.(3) 11.
above (5) None of these (1) 12.(2) 13.(4) 14.(3) 15.(4) 16.(4) 17.(2) 18.(3) 19.(2)
20.(4) 21 .(1) 22.(3) 23.(3) 24.(4) 25.(3) 26.(5) 27.(1) 28.
413. A data map is helpful (1) When you have too much (1) 29.(4) 30.(2) 31 .(3) 32.(1) 33.(3) 34.(2) 35.(4) 36.(2)
data to chart (2) To show a geographic distri-bution of 37.(4) 38.(1) 39.(4) 40.(4) 41. (3) 42.(2) 43.(1) 44.(3) 45.
(4) 46.(3) 47.(3) 48.(3) 49.(3) 50.(4) 51 .(4) 52.(5) 53.(1)
Karan Dhami-66
54.(2) 55.(2) 56.(1) 57.(1) 58.(3) 59.(2) 60.(1) 61. (4) 62. 2. Use the __ to choose a slide layout. (1) Quick Styles
(1) 63.(2) 64.(2) 65.(3) 66.(1) 67.(3) 68.(4) 69.(1) 70.(2) gallery (2) Format gallery (3) Layout gallery (4)
71.(1) 72.(3) 73.(4) 74.(2) 75.(2) 76.(4) 77.(4) 78.(2) 79. Layout collection (5) None of these
(1) 80.(4) 81. (4) 82.(3) 83.(4) 84.(4) 85.(4) 86.(4) 87.(3)
88.(1) 89.(2) 90.(2) 91. (2) 92.(3) 93.(1) 94.(3) 95.(4) 96. 3. Ellipse Motion is a predefined (1) Design template
(4) 97.(4) 98.(2) 99.(1) 100.(4) 101 .(4) 102.(4) 103.(3) (2) Color scheme (3) Animation scheme (4) All of the
104.(4) 105.(2) 106.(4) 107.(2) 108.(3) 109.(2) 110.(2) above (5) None of these
111.(1) 112. (4; 113.(1) 114.(2) 115.(4) 116. (4) 117.(4) 4. Block arrows, stars and ban-ners, and callouts are all
118.(2) 119.(2) 120. (3 121 .(2) 122.(4) 123.(4) 124.(1) examples of (1) Different types of children's building
125.(2) 126.(3) 127.(3) 128.(1) 129.(1) 130.(2) 131 .(4) blocks (2) Auto Shape categories (3) Clip art categories
132.(4) 133.(4) 134.(2) 135.(2) 136.(3) 137.(4) 138.(3) located in the Microsoft Clip Gallery (4) More technical
139.(4) 140.(2) 141.(3) 142.(4 143.(4) 144.(2) 145.(4) 146. terms that I don't understand (5) None of these
(3) 147.(2) 148.(1) 149.(3) 150.(4) 151 .(2) 152.(1) 153.(3)
154.(2) 155.(1) 156.(3) 157.(4) 158.(4) 159.(1) 160.(2) 161 5. We can replace a font on all slides with another font
.(3) 162.(1) 163.(3) 164.(1) 165.(1) 166.(2) 167.(3) 168.(1) using the .......option (1) Edit, Fonts (2) Tools, Fonts
169.(4) 170.(4) 171.(3) 172.(1) 173.(4) 174.(2) 175.(2) (3) Tools, Replace Fonts (4) Format, Replace Fonts (5)
176.(1) 177.(1) 178.(4) 179.(4) 180.(4) 181 .(2) 182.(2) None of these
183.(2) 184.(4) 185.(2) 186.(4) 187.(5) 188.(1 189.(4) 190. 6. Special effects used to introduce slides in a
(4) 191 .(2) 192.(2) 193.(3) 194.(2) 195.(1) 196.(4) 197.(3) presentation are called (1) Effects (2) Custom
198.(1) 199.(1) 200.(4) 201 .(4) 202.(4) 203.(4) 204.(1) animations (3) Transitions (4) Preset animations (5)
205.(2) 206.(2) 207.(4) 208.(4) 209.(2) 210.(3) 211. (4) None of these
212.(1) 213.(3) 214.(2) 215.(2) 216.(2) 217.(3) 218.(5) 7. PowerPoint can display data from which of the
219.(2) 220.(4) 221 .(2) 222.(2) 223.(1) 224.(2) 225.(3) following add in software of MS-Offlce (1) Equation
226.(3) 227.(1) 228.(4) 229.(3) 230.(3) 231 .(2) 232.(4) editor (2) Organization chart (3) Photo album (4) All
233.(4) 234.(4) 235.(4) 236.(2 237.(1) 238.(1) 239.(1) 240. of these (5) None of these
(1) 241 .(1) 242.(4) 243.(3) 244.(3) 245.(3) 246.(1) 247.
(2) 248.(2) 249.(4) 250.(4) 251 .(4) 252.(2) 253.(3) 254. 8. Which key on the keyboard can be used to view slide
(1) 255.(3) 256.(3) 257.(2) 258.(3) 259.(1) show (1) F1 (2) F2 (3) F5 (4) F10 (5) None of
260.(4) 261 .(2) 262.(1) 263.(1) 264.(2) 265.(2) 266. these
(3) 267.(2) 268.(2) 269.(4) 270.(1) 271 .(4) 272.(3) 9. Which of the following fill effects can you use for the
273.(2) 274.(4) 275.(4) 276.(1) 277.(3) 278.(.4) 279.(3) slide background? (1) Gradient (2) Texture (3)
280.(1) 281 .(3) 282.(2) 283.(1) 284.(4) 285.(2) 286.(3) Picture (4) All of the above (5) None of these
287.(2) 288.(4) 289.(4) 290.(4) 291 .(1) 292.(3) 293.(1)
294.(1) 295.(4) 296.(4) 297.(2) 298.(2) 299.(3) 300.(3) 10. Which of the following statements is not true? (1)
301 .(3) 302.(4) 303.(4) 304.(2) 305.(1) 306.(4) 307.(2) Holding down the Shift key while you draw an object
308.(3) 309.(4) 310.(4) 311. (2) 312.(4) 313.(4) 314.(2) creates perfect squares, circles and straight lines (2) The
315.(2) 316.(4) 317.(1) 318.(3) 319.(2) 320.(2) 321 .(2) text in a text box can't be formatted (3) The drawing
322.(2) 323.(2) 324.(4) 325.(2) 326.(3) 327.(1) 328.(3) toolbar contains tools for drawing shapes, lines, arrows,
329.(4) 330.(1) 331 .(3) 332.(4) 333.(1) 334.(3) 335.(1) and more (4) Ctrl+ S save the document (5) None of
336.(1) 337.(1) 338.(2) 339.(1) 340.(4) 341 .(1) 342.(1) these
343.(2) 344.(4) 345.(4) 346.(4) 347.(4) 348.(4) 349.(3) 11. A chart can be put as a part of the presentation using
350.(4) 351 .(3) 352.(1) 353.(3) 354.(4) 355.(1) 356.(1) (1) Insert-> Chart (2) Insert -> Pictures -> Chart (3)
357.(4) 358.(1) 359.(3) 360.(2)361 .(2) 362.(4) 363.(1) Edit -> Chart (4) View -> Chart (5) None of these
364.(4) 365.(2) 366.(4) 367.(1) 368.(4) 369.(4) 370.(1) 371
.(2) 372,(3) 373.(4) 374.(4) 375.(4) 376.(1) 377. (4) 378. 12. The arrangement of elements such as Title and
(4) 379.(2) 380,(2) 381.(3) 382. (2) 383.(1) 384.(1)385.(3) Subtitle text, pictures, tables et (3) is called (1) Layout
386.(1) 367.(1) 388.(4) 389.(1) 390.(4) 391 .(4) 392.(1) (2) Presentation (3) Design (4) Scheme (5)
393.(2) 394.(3) 395.(2) 396.(1) 397.(3) 998. (4) 399.(3) None of these
400.(3) 401 .(3) 402.(3) 403.(4) 404.(4) 405.(4) 406.(1) 13. Which of the following are types of sound files? (1)
407.(2) 408.(2) 409.(1) 410.(1) 411. (4) 412.(4) 413.(2) LOG files (2) DAT flies (3) WAV files (4) DRV
414.(1) 415.(2) 416.(1) 417.(4) 418.(2) 419.(1) 420,(2) files (5) None of these
421 .(4) 425.(4) 422.(3) 423.(4) 424.(2) 14. Which of the following can you use to add times to the
slides in a presentation? (1) Microsoft graph (2)
Microsoft powerpoint Microsoft Table (3) Microsoft Excel (4) Microsoft
1. To prepare a presentation/slide show which Word (5) None of these
application is commonly used ? (1) Photoshop (2) 15. Which view in PowerPoint can be used to enter
Powerpoint (3) Outlook Express (4) Internet Explorer speaker comments? (1) Normal (2) Slide show (3)
(5) All correct Slide sorter (4) Notes page view (5) None of these

Karan Dhami-67
clicked (3) The name of a motion path (4) All of above
16. The best way to insert a new slide in a presentation is (5) None of these
to use the (1) Normal view (2) Special view (3) Slide 30. If you have a PowerPoint show you created and want
show view (4) Slide sorter view (5) None of these to send using email to another teacher you can add the
17. Which is the best view for getting your thoughts for a show to your email message as a (an) (1) Inclusion (2)
presentation out on the computer? (1) Outline view (2) Attachment (3) Reply (4) Forward (5) None of these
Notes page view (3) Slide sorter view (4) Slide view (5)
None of these 31. In order to edit a chart, you can (1) Triple click the
18. The boxes that are displayed to indicate that the text, chart object (2) Click and drag the chart object (3)
pictures or objects are placed in it is called........ (1) Double click the chart object (4) Click the chart object
Placeholder (2) Auto text (3) Text box (4) Word art (5) (5) None of these
None of these 32. to exit the PowerPoint (1) click the application
19. Which Of the following is not a feature of PowerPoint? minimize button (2) click the document close button (3)
(1) Printing transparencies (2) Printing the speakers double click the applications control menu icon (4)
notes along with slide images (3) Linking a slide double click the document control menu icon (5) None
transition with a laser pointer (4) Drawing with a pen (5) of these
None of these 33. to preview a motion path effect using the custom
20. Which option can be used to create a new slide show animation task pane, you should (1) click the play button
with the current slides but presented in a different order (1) (2) click the show effect button (3) double click the
Rehearsal (2) Custom slider show (3) Slide show setup motion path (4) all of above (5) None of these
(4) Slide show view (5) None of these
21.-Which of the following are actions you can assign to 34. You can create a new presentation by completing all of
an action button or slide object? (1) Run a macro (2) the following except (1) Clicking the new button on the
Play a sound (3) Hyper link (4) All of above (5) standard toolbar (2) Clicking file, new (3) Clicking file
None of these open (4) Pressing Ctrl + N (5) None of these
22. Which option in PowerPoint allows to cany slides from
one computer to another? (1) Save As (2) Save and Go 35. You can embed a MS-Organization Chart in a slide by
(3) Pack and Go (4) Web and Go (5) None of these (1) Clicking the object command on the edit menu (2)
23. Which file format can be added to a PowerPoint show? Clicking the object command on the edit menu (3)
(1) jPg (2) .giv (3) .wav (4) All of the above (5) Clicking the insert new slide button the standard toolbar,
None of these then double click the organization chart button on the
24. In Microsoft PowerPoint two kind of sound effects formatting toolbar (4) Clicking the MS Organization
files that can be added to the presentation are (1) .wav Chart button on the standard toolbar
files and .mid files (2) .wav files and .gif files (3) .wav
files and jpg files (4) jpg files and .gif files (5) None of 36. To select one hyperlink after another during a slide
these presentation, what do you press? (1) Tab (2) Ctrl + K
25. Material consisting -of text and numbers is best (3) Ctrl + h (4) All of above (5) None of these
presented as (1) A table slide (2) A bullet slide (3) A
title slide (4) All of the above (5) None of these 37. Special effects used to introduce slides in a
presentation are called (1) effects (2) custom
26. What is a motion path? (1) A type of animation animations (3) transitions (4) present animations (5)
entrance effect (2) A method of advancing slides (3) A None of these
method of moving items on a slide (4) All of the above 38. You can edit an embedded organization chart object by
(5) None of these (1) Clicking edit object (2) Double clicking the
27. What is a slide-title master pair? (1) The title area and organization chart object (3) Right clicking the chart
text area of a specific slide (2) A slide master and title object, then clicking edit MS- Organizaiton Chart
master merged into a single slide (3) A slide master and object (4) b and c both (5) None of these
title master for a specific design template (4) All of
above (5) None of these 39. What is the term used when you press and hold the left
28. Which of the following should you use if you want all mouse key and more the mouse around the slide? (1)
the slide in the presentation to have the same "look"? (1) Highlighting (2) Dragging (3) Selecting (4) Moving
the slide layout option (2) add a slide option (3) outline (5) None of these
view (4) a presentation design template (5) None of 40. Which of the following toolbars provide different
these options in various master views? (1) Common tasks
29. in the context of animations, what is a trigger? (1) toolbar (2) Drawing toolbar (3) Formatting toolbar (4)
An action button that advances to the next slide (2) An Standard toolbar (5) None of these
item on the slide that performs an action when

Karan Dhami-68
41. How can you create a uniform appearance by adding a presentation (1) Slide sorter view (2) Notes page view
background image to all slides? (1) Create a template (2) (3) Slide view (4) Outline view (5) None of these
Edit the slide master (3) Use the autocorrect wizard (4)
All of the above (5) None of these 52. Which option can be used to set custom timings for
slides in a presentation? (1) Slider Timings (2) Slider
42. How do you create speaker note pages that show the Timer (3) Rehearsal (4) Slide Show Setup (5) None
slides, related notes, and your company logo on each of these
page? (1) Edit the notes master and add your company 53. Which of the following will not advance the slides in a
logy (2) Edit the slide master and insert your company slide show view? (1) The esc key (2) The space bar (3)
logo and notes pane (3) Edit the handout master to The enter key (4) The mouse button (5) None of these
include your company logo and one slide per page with 54. To import text from a word document that uses
additional note space (4) All of the above (5) None of headings into a PowerPoint presentation: (1) This can
these not be done in PowerPoint (2) Click Insert, Slides from
43. One way to make a PowerPoint slide display Outline (3) Click Import, Word Document
animations is to: (1) Select the slide in normal view; and Headings (4) .Click File, New, Presentation from Word
click Format Animation (2) Click the PowerPoint Headings (5) None of these
window and move it around vigorously with the mouse for 55. Format painter (1) To paint pretty picutures on your
a manual animation effect (3) Select the slide in slide slides (2) To copy formatting from one object or piece of
sorter view, right click and choose preset animations from tex and then apply it elsewhere (3) To change the
the shortcut menu (4) PowerPoint does not have an background color of your slides (4) To paint pretty
animation feature (5) None of these pictures on background of slides (5) None of these
44. Which of the following is not a way to cut ext? (1)
Select the text and press the delete button (2) Select the 56. Slide show options available to the presenter include
text and select Edit, Cut from the menu (3) Select the all of the following except (1) Transitions command (2)
text and click the Cut button on the toolbar (4) Select the Speaker notes command (3) Meeting minder command
text and press Ctrl + X (5) None of these (4) Navigation commands (5) None of these

45. Which types of fonts are best suitable for titles and 57. Which of the following is an example for automatic
headlines (1) serif fonts (2) sans serif fonts (3) text text formatting (1) Underlining hyperlink (2) Adjusting
fonts (4) picture fonts (5) None of these extra space (3) Replacing two -'s with an em hyphens.
(4) All of above (5) None of these
46. Which type of font is best suitable for large amount of
text? (1) serif fonts (2) sans serif fonts (3) text fonts 58. Which of the following is not a way to create a new
(4) picture fonts (5) None of these presentation? (1) Using the Scan-In Slides feature (2)
From scratch (create a blank presentation (3) Using a
47. To give a PowerPoint presentation to a large audience, template (4) Using the auto content wizard (5) None of
you: (1) Set up your computer in a large auditorium, and these
click large, auditorium, OK (2) Click the slide you wish 59. The quickest way to create a PowerPoint presentation
the audience to see in normal view, then click the next is to use the (1) Word for windows templates (2) Auto
slide, and so on. (3) Choose either view, slide show or creation wizard (3) Auto content wizard (4)r
slide show, view show (4) Slick slide show, OK (5) Presentation wizard (5) None of these
None of these
60. Which option the following can you format using
48. Which of the following can you use to add times to the buttons on the formatting toolbar? (1) Your hard drive
slides in a presentation (1) Slice Show menu (2) (2) Format painting (3) Font color (4) Underlining
Rehearse timing button (3) Slide transition button (4) (5) None of these
All of the above (5) None of these 61. Which tab is not available on left panel when you
open a presentation? (1) Outline (2) Slides (3)
49. Which of the following is not one of PowerPoint's Notes (4) All of above (5) None of these
views? (1) Slide show view (2) Slide view (3)
Presentation view (4) Outline view (5) None of these 62. Which of the following statements is not true? (1)
You can type text directly into a PowerPoint slide but
50. Which PowerPoint view works best for adding slide typing in text box is more convenient. (2) From Insert
transitions? (1) Slide show view (2) Slide sorter view menu choose Picture and then From File to insert your
(3) Slide view (4) Notesview (5) None of these images into slides. (3) You can display a PowerPoint
presentation in Normal, Slide Sorter or Slide Show view.
51. Which of the following views is the best view to use (4) You can show or hide task pane from View »
when setting transition effects for all slides in a Toolbars (5) None of these

Karan Dhami-69
63. To start Microsoft PowerPoint application (1) Click 76. What feature will you use to apply motion effects in
on Start » Programs » All Programs » Microsoft between a slide exits and another enters? (1) Slide
PowerPoint (2) Hit Ctrl + R then type ppointexe and Transition (2) Slide Design (3) Animation Objects (4)
Enter (3) Click Start > > Run then type powerpnt then Animation Scheme (5) None of these
press Enter (4) All of above (5) None of these
77. The selected design template can be applied (1) To
64. Which of the following section does not exist in a slide current slide only (2) To all the slides (3) To all the new
layout? (1) Titles (2) Lists (3) Charts (4) presentation you create (4) All of above (5) None of
Animations (5) None of these these
65. PowerPoint presentations are widely used as (1) 78. The difference between Slide Design and Auto Content
Note outlines for teachers (2) Project presentations by Wizard is (1) Both are same (2) AutoContent Wizard is
students (3) Communication of planning (4) All of just the wizard version of Slide Design (3) Slide
above (5) None of these Design does not provide sample content but Auto
66. __ controls all the main slide control tasks for Content Wizard provides sample content too! (4) Slide
your presentation. (1) Task Pane (2) Task Bar (3) Design asks your choice in steps but Auto Content
Control Panel (4) All of above (5) None of these Wizard does not let you make choices (5) None of these
79. In which menu can you find features like Slide
67. Which of the following cannot be toggled from View Design, Slide Layout etc.? (1) Insert Menu (2) Format
» Toolbars? (1) Control Toolbox (2) Slides (3) Menu (3) Tools Menu (4) Slide Show Menu (5) None
Revisions (4) Reviewing (5) None of these of these
80. Which menu provides you options like Animation
68. Which of the following pane is not available in Task Scheme, custom Animation, Slide Transition? (1) Insert
Pane? (1) Getting Started (2) Clip Art (3) Word Art Menu (2) Format Menu (3) Tools Menu (4) Slide
(4) Search Results (5) None of these Show Menu (5) None of these
69. Which of the following pane is NOT available in Task 81. How many steps are there between Start and Finish in
Pane? (1) Slide Design (2) Master Slide (3) Slide AutoContent Wizard? (1) 3 (2) * (3) S (4) 6 (5) None
Layout (4) Slide Transition (5) None of these of these
82. Which short cut key inserts a new slide in current
70. A new presentation can be created from (1) Blank presentation? (1) Ctrl+N (2) Ctrl+M (3) Ctrl+S (4)
Presentation (2) From Existing Presentation (3) From All of above (5) None of these
Design Template (4) All of above (5) None of these 83. What happens if you select first and second slide and
then click on New Slide button on toolbar? (1) A new
71. In slide layout panel how many layouts are available slide is inserted as first slide in presentation (2) A new
for text layout by default? (1) 4 (2) 7 (3) 12 slide is inserted as second slide in presentation (3) A new
(4) 18 (5) None of these slide is inserted as third slide in presentation (4) None of
72. Which of the following statement is false? (1) If you above (5) None of these
choose to select from one of the pre made slide layouts,
you can change the positioning (2) If you choose to 84. Which of the following method can insert a new slide
select from the pre-made slide layouts, you cannot delete in current presentation? (1) Right click on the Slide panel
the objects in the layout. (3) Blank Slide is at the top of and choose New Slide (2) From Insert menu choose New
the 'Content Layouts' area in the Slide Layout panel. (4) Slide (3) Click on New Slide button on toolbar (4) All
All of above are false statements (5) None of these of above (5) None of these

73. What lets you to create new presentation by selecting 85. Which of the following is not a part of Slide Design?
ready-made font color and graphics effects? (1) (1) Design Template (2) Color Scheme (3) Animation
Presentation Template (2) Master Slide (3) Design Scheme (4) Slide Layout (5) None of these
Template (4) Animation Scheme (5) None of these
86. What is the best way to create another copy of a slide?
74. Which command will you use in PowerPoint if you (1) Click the slide then press Ctrl+A and paste in new
need to change the color of different objects without slide (2) From Insert Menu choose Duplicate Slide (3)
changing content? (1) Design Template (2) Color Redo everything on a new slide that you had done on
Scheme (3) Font Color (4) Object Color (5) None of previous slide (4) None of above (5) None of these
these
75. What PowerPoint feature will you use to apply motion 87. From which menu you can access Picture, Test Box,
effects to different objects of a slide? (1) Slide Transition Chart etc? (1) File (2) Edit (3) Insert (4) View (5)
(2) Slide Design (3) Animation Objects (4) None of these
Animation Scheme (5) None of these 88: If you want to insert some slides from other
presentation into current one choose (1) From Insert

Karan Dhami-70
menu choose Slides from Files (2) From Insert menu 100. To start slide show of a presentation (1) Hit F5
choose Slides from Presentation (3) From Insert menu key (2) From Slide Show menu choose View Show
choose Slides (4) None of above (5) None of these option (3) From Slide Show menu choose Rehearse
timing (4) Both a & b (5) None of these
89. What are the three options available in Insert » Picture
menu? (1) Clipart, Pictures, Shapes (2) Clipart, From 101. Which option on the custom animation task pane
File, Shapes (3) Clipart, From Files, Auto Shapes (4) allows you to apply a preset or custom motion path? (1)
Clipart, Pictures. Auto Shapes (5) None of these Add effect (2) Emphasis (3) Animate now (4) All of
the above (5) None of these
90. To insert slide numbers (1) Insert a text box and 102. What is the term used when a clip art image changes
select Insert » Page Number (2) Insert a textbox and the direction of faces? (1) Group (2) Flip (3)
select Insert » Number » PageNumber (3) Choose Rotate (4) All of the above (5) None of these
Insert > > Slide Number (4) Insert n new text box and
select Insert > > slide Number (5) None of these 103. the slide that is used to introduce a topic and set the
tone for the presentation is called the (1) table slide (2)
91. In a PowerPoint presentation (1) Sound clips can be graph slide (3) bullet slide (4) title slide (5) None of
inserted but not movie clips (2) Movie clips can be these
inserted but not sound clips (3) Both cannot be inserted 104. Which of the following features should you use when
(4) Both can be inserted (5) Tally can be inserted typing in the notes text box? (1) Slide show (2) Insert
(3) Slide maser (4) Zoom (5) None of these
92. To insert a hyperiink in a slide (1) Choose Insert »
Hyperiink (2) Press Ctrl + K (3) Hyperlinks can't be 105.Which option allows you to select line, curve,
inserted in slides (4) Both a and b (5) None of these freeform or scribble tools? (1) Create effect (2) Insert
motion path (3) Draw custom path (4) All of the above
93. List Box and Text box (1) Are some other than that in (5) None of these
a list box the bullets are enabled (2) Are different. List 106. Which of the following should be used when you
boxes are used to present lists and can't be created with want to add a slide to an existing presentation? (1) File,
text boxes. (3) Both of above (4) None of above (5) are add a new slide (2) Insert, New slide (3) File Open (4)
not used at all File, New (5) None of these
94. Which of the following statement is true? (1) You can 107. The size of the organization chart object (1) Is
insert text boxes from drawing toolbar in PowerPoint (2) determined by the presentation design and can not be
You cannot insert text boxes from drawing toolbar in changed (2) Is determined by the presentation design but
PowerPoint (3) Text boxes are provides when you choose can be changed in PowerPoint (3) Is dependent on the
a layout and can't be inserted afterwards (4) Text box is amount of text within the organization chart (4) b and c
not available (5) None of these (5) None of these
108. Want a PowerPoint photo album slide show to play
95. When you delete a text box object from a slide in continuously? (1) Use random slide transitions (2)
PowerPoint Presentation (1) The object is deleted but text Launch an online broadcast (3) Loop continuously (4)
box and the text inside is left on the slide (2) The text box All of the above (5) None of these
is deleted and the text is pasted on the slide (3) The text
box and text both are deleted (4) All of above (5) None 109. what is defined by the handout master? (1) Slide
of these formatting (2) Layout of audience handout notes (3)
96. Which of the following font effect is not available in Handout content formatting for Microsoft word export (4)
PowerPoint Font dialog box? (1) Underline (2) Shadow All of above (5) None of these
(3) Emboss (4) Strikethrough (5) None of these 110. Which of the following tool enables you to add text to
97. What happens if you edited an image inserted in a slide without using the standard placeholders? (1) Text
PowerPoint? (1) The original file that was inserted is not tool box (2) Line tool (3) Drawing tool (4) Auto
changed (2) The original file that was inserted is changed shapes tool (5) None of these
(3) The original file is changed when you save 111. In notes master view, how do you modify the font
presentation (4) None of above size of text for all hte4 notes of a presentation? (1)
98. If you select Insert » Picture » From File (1) You can rModify the slide design (2) Modify the notes master
insert pictures and clipArts (2) You can insert clipArts layout (3) Modify the text within the body placeholder
only (3) You can insert pictures only (4) All of above (4) All of the above (5) None of these
(5) None of these
99. The effect applied to display when slides changes in 112. Want your logo in the same position on every slide,
slide show view is (1) Slide Animation (2) Custom automatically? Insert it on the (1) Handout master (2)
Animation (3) Custom Transition (4) Slide Transition Notes master (3) Slide master (4) All of the above (5)
(5) None of these None of these

Karan Dhami-71
113. Which of the following views is the best view to use 12.5. The view that displays the slides on a presentation as
when setting transition effects for all slides in a miniature representations of the slides is called (1) Slide
presentation? (1) Slide sorter view (2) Notes pages show (2) Slide sorter view (3) Notes page view (4)
view (3) Slide view (4) Outline view (5) None of Outline view (5) None of these
these
114. Objects on the slide that hold text are called (1) 126. The PowerPoint view that displays only text (title and
Placeholders (2) Object holders (3) Auto layouts (4) bullets) is (1) Slide show (2) Slide sorter view (3)
Text holders (5) None of these Notes page view (4) Outline view (5) None of these
115. Which of the following provides a means of printing
out feature notes with a miniature slide on a printed page? 127. In Microsoft PowerPoint the entry effect as one slide
(1) Slide with animation (2) Outline view (3) Notes replaces another in a show is called a (an) (1) Animation
page (4) Audience handout (5) None of these (2) Slide transition (3) Custom animation (4) Preset
116. Which command brings you to the first slide in your animation (5) None of these
presentation? (1) Next slide button (2) Page up (3)
Ctrl +'Home ! (4) Ctrl + End (5) None of these 128. Which of the following presentation elements can you
modify using the slide master? (1) Slide comments (2)
117. In normal view, how can you quickly change to Slide transitions (3) Speaker note font and color (4) All
handout master view? (1) Click the outline tab and select of above (5) None of these
handout master view (2) Press the shift key and click the 129. Which of the following provides a printed copy of
handout master view button (3) On the view menu, your presentation? (1) Outline (2) Speaker notes (3)
click slide sorter, and dick handouts. (4) All of above (5) Audience handouts (4) All of the above (5) None of
None of these these
118. how can you quickly reinstate a deleted footer 130. Slide show options available to the presenter include
placeholder in master view? (1) Create a new slide master all of the following except (1) Transitions command (2)
(2) Re-apply the footer Placeholder (3) Re-apply Speaker notes command (3) Meeting reminder command
the slide layout (4) All of the above (5) None of these (4) Navigation commands (5) None of these
119. Which of the following can you use to add times to 131. Presentation designs regulate the formatting and
the slides in a presentation? (1) Slide show menu (2) layout for the slide and are commonly called (1) Design
Rehearse timings button (3) Slide transition button (4) plates (2) Templates (3) Placeholders (4) Blueprints
All of the above (5) None of these (5) None of these
132. Which of the following bypasses the print dialog box
120. To select all of the boxes of an organization chart (1) when printing individual slides or an entire presentation?
Clicking and edit and select all (2) Right click the chart (1) File, print, preview (2) The print button (3) File,
background and then click select all (3) Press and hold print (4) Ctrl + p (5) None of these
the SHIFT key and click each box (4) All of above (5) 133. To add a header or footer to your handout, you can
None of these use (1) The title master (2) The slide master (3) The
121. You can show the shortcut menu during the slide handout master (4) All of above (5) None of these
show by (1) Clicking the shortcut button on the
formatting toolbar (2) Right clicking the current 1 slide 134. Which of the following will not advance the slides in
(3) Clicking an icon on the current slide (4) a and b (5) a slide show view? (1) Esc key (2) The spacebar (3)
None of these The Enter key (4) The mouse button (5) None of these
122. Auto clipart is a feature that (1) Automatically places
clipart in your presentation (2) Scans your presentation 135. What are lines, curve, freeform and scribble? (1)
for incorrect spelling in your words on each slide (3) Emphasis effects that can be applied to animations (2)
Scans your presentation for incorrect spelling in Word Arts Types of custom motion paths (3) Predefined entrance
objects (4) All of above (5) None of these and exit effects (4) All of the above (5) None of these

123. to edit the text within the boxes of an organization 136. Comments on a presentation can record who wrote
chart, you (1) Select the box and text, then make changes them and when they were added. What's the automatic
(2) Select the box, then make the changes (3) Highlight way in PowerPoint 2002? (1) Use online collaboration
the text, them make the changes (4) A and b both (5) (2) Use comments (3) Use the notes page (4) All of
None of these the above (5) None of these
124. Which of the following allow you to select more than 137. When using PowerPoint to play a PowerPoint show
one slide in a presentation? (1) Alt + Click each slide (2) for previewing the show, select (1) View, slide sorter (2)
Shift + drag each slide (3) Shift + Click each slide (4) View, slide (3) View, slide show (4) View outline (5)
Ctrl + Click each slide (5) None of these None of these
138. In Microsoft PowerPoint in order to see all the slides
on one screen use (1) View, slide sorter (2) View, slide

Karan Dhami-72
(3) View, master (4) view, slide show (5) None of 149. What's the best way to design the layout for your
these slides? (1) Create layouts for slides, handouts and notes
139. What's the best place to find animated images for using the Master Layout dialog box in slide master view
youPowerPoint 2002 presentation? (1) Microsoft online (2) For each new slide, select a layout from the Slide
(2) Word clipart (3) PowerPoint tools and ins (4) All Layout task pane (3) Apply templates from the Slide
of the above (5) None of these Design task pane (4) None of above (5) None of these
140. what's the easy way to apply varied animations to
test on slides (1) apply effects in the custom animation text 150. Any and every command can be found on the (1)
pane . (2) apply an animation scheme (3) customize Drawing toolbar (2) Formatting toolbar (3) Standard
bullets with animated clipart (4) all of above (5) None of toolbar (4) Menu bar (5) None of these
these
141. Using a custom animation effect, how do you make 151.The slide that is used to introduce a topic and set the
text appear on a slide by letter (1) Apply the animation tone for the presentation is called the (1) Table slide (2)
scheme fade in one by one. (2) Apply an entrance effect, Graph slide (3) Bullet slide (4) Title slide (5) None of
and then set it to by letter in the effect option dialog box these
(3) Apply the fly in entrance to the text, and then set its 152. How do you print your slides in a handout that
speed to very slow. (4) All of above (5) None of these includes lines for notes? (1) In the print dialog box, select
handout and set the number of slides per page to 3 (2) In
142. To exit the PowerPoint application, you should (1) the print dialog box, select handout and set the number of
Click the application minimize button (2) Click the slides per page, then select the include comment page
document close button (3) Double click the application option (3) In the print dialog box select note page instead
control menu icon (4) Double click the document control of handout (4) All of above (5) None of these
menu icon (5) None of these 153. Which of the following features should you use when
143. You can create a new presentation by completing all typing in him notes text box? (1) Slide shows (2) Insert
of the following except: (1) Clicking the new button on the (3) Slide master (4) Zoom (5) None of these
standard toolbar (2) Clicking file, new (3) Clicking file
open (4) Pressing Ctrl + N (5) None of these 154. Which of the following should e used when you want
to add a slide to an existing presentation? (1) File, add a
144. You have customized a design template in one new slide (2) Insert, new slide (3) File, open (4) File,
presentation and you want to use it in another presentation. new (5) None of these
What the best way to do this? (1) Use the browse feature 155. Which of the following is the default page setup
in the slide design task pane to find the file that has your orientation for notes pages, outlines and handouts? (1)
design template and apply it to the current file. (2) Copy Vertical (2) Landscape (3) Portrait (4) None of above
and paste the slide with the design template you want to (5) None of these
include the new presentation; inserted slide will inherit the 156. Which of the following is the default page setup
design (3) Save the presentation that has the design orientation for slides in PowerPoint? (1) Vertical (2)
template with a new name, and then use a new file to your Landscape (3) Portrait (4) All of above (5) None of
presentation (4) All of the above. (5) None of these these
157. How can you get your photo album slide show to play
145. Which of the following options in the printer dialog continuously? (1) Use random slide transition (2)
box would you select to print slides 5 and 12 in a Launch an online broadcast (3) Loop continuously
presentation? (1) Slides (2) Custom shows (3) Current (4) All of above (5) None of these
slide (4) All of the above (5) None of these
158.What are symbols used to identify items in a list? (1)
146. Which of the following toolbars provides different Icons (2) Markers (3) Bullets (4) Graphics (5)
options in various master views? (1) Common tasks None of these
toolbar (2) Drawing toolbar (3) Formatting toolbar (4) 159. You have got a bunch of digital holiday photo you
Standard toolbar (5) None of these want to put into a slide show. What the quickest method?
147. You can tell when an object is active because (1) (1) Apply a multiple-picture layout to several slides, and
The object is highlighted (2) Eight small sizing handles use the clipart icon on the slides to import your picture (2)
appear surrounding the text (3) A box frame appears On the insert menu, point to the picture, click from, file,
surrounding the text (4) b and c (5) None of these and select your picture in a group for each slide (3) On
the insert menu, point the picture and click new photo
148. Which of the following is not an option when album (4) All of the above (5) None of these
printinghandouts? (1) Six slides per page (2) Five slides 160.How would you create the following diagram in
per page (3). Three slides per page (4) Two slides per PowerPoint? (1) Use auto shapes and the drawing
page (5) None of these toolbar to create the diagram and design it (2) Open the
diagram gallery from the drawing toolbar and choose this

Karan Dhami-73
diagram type (3) Use the chart command on the insert templates (2) Templates (3) Placeholders (4)
menu to import the diagram (4) All of above (5) None Blueprints Correct (5) None of these
of these 172. Which of the following should you use if you want all
161. Which of he following provides a means of printing the slides in the presentation to have the same look? (1)
out features notes with a miniature slide on a printed page? The slid layout option (2) The add a slide option (3)
(1) Slides with animation (2) Outline view (3) Notes Outline view (4) A presentation design template (5)
page (4) Audience handout (5) None of these None of these
173. Line spacing refers to (1) The space between the
162. Which command brings you to the first slide in your lines of text (2) The height of the line (3) The length of
presentation? (1) Next slide button (2) Page up (3) the line (4) A and c (5) None of these
Ctrl + home (4) Ctrl + end (5) None of these
174. Which of the following uses the spelling and
163. You were giving your presentation, and you need to grammar feature to indicate an incorrect spelling? (1) The
click a slide that's few slides back. How do you get there? incorrect word appears in all capital letters (2) The
(1) Press ESC to get back into a normal view; click the incorrect word has a wavy red line under it (3) The
slide thumbnail in normal view; then click the resume slide incorrect word appears italicized (4) The incorrect word
show button (2) Press backspace until your desired slide appears bold (5) None of these
(3) Right click, point to go on the shortcut menu, point to 175. Which of the following bypasses the print dialog box
by title, and click the slide you want to go to (4) All of when printing individual slides or an entire presentation?
above (5) None of these (1) File, Print Preview (2) The print button (3) File,
164. Which of the following should you do to bring a print (4) Ctrl + P (5) None of these
bullet back to a previous level? (1) Press the shift + tab
keys (2) Press the shift key (3) Press the enter key (4) 176; the handout master contains placeholders fro all of
Press the tab key (5) None of these the following except (1) Slide number (2) Title (3)
165. Good design determines (1) Credibility (2) Footer (4) Header (5) None of these
Readability (3) First impression (4) All of above (5)
None of these 177. Material consisting of text and numbers is best
166. To make a selection of slides on our presentation, use presented as (1) A table slide (2) A bullet slide (3) A
a different design template from the other slides, what do title slide (4) All of above (5) None of these
you do? (1) Select the slides thumbnails in that section, 178. Which of the following displays when an image is
and apply a different color scheme (2) Select the slide selected? (1) Add clip art only if it relates to your topic
thumbnails in that section and apply a different design (2) Be sure to place at least one clipart image per slide
template (3) Select one of the slides in the section you (3) Resize the image so it takes up as much space as your
want to change, customize the fonts and colors, and use the text (4) A and b (5) None of these
format painter tool to apply those styles to the other slides 179. The Microsoft clip gallery allows you to (1) Add
in the section (4) All of above (5) None of these word art images to a slide (2) Spell check your
167. Your presentation is ready to go, but you don't know presentation (3) Add clip art images to a slide or slides
if PowerPoint is installed on the computer, you will use to (4) Add slides to a presentation (5) None of these
present with what's the safe way (1) Save your
presentation as a web page (2) Set up your presentation 180. Which command select all object at one time when
to be "browse as a kiosk" (3) Use the Pack and Go wizard selecting multiple objects to be deleted? (1) Alt + a (2)
(4) All of the above (5) None of these Ctrl + a (3) Shift + Enter (4) Edit, Select All (5)
None of these
168. The view that displays the slides of a presentation as 181. Auto clip art is a feature that (1) Automatically
miniature representations of the slides is called (1) Slide places clip art in your presentation (2) Scans your
show (2) Slide sorter view (3) Notes page view (4) presentation for incorrect spelling of words on each slide
Outline view (5) None of these (3) Scans your presentation for incorrect spelling in word
169. The power point view that displays only text (title and art objects (4) All of the above (5) None of these
bullets) is: (1) Slide show (2) Slide sorter view (3)
Notes page view (4) Outline view (5) None of these 182. To select all the boxes of an organization chart (1)
Click edit, select all (2) Right click the chart background
170. Which of the following provides a printed copy of click select all (3) Press and hold the shift key and click
your presentation? (1) Outlines (2) Speaker notes (3) each box (4) All of the above (5) None of these
Audience handouts (4) All of above (5) None of these 183. To adjust the width .of table columns, you (1) Click
table menu. Column width, then make adjustments (2)
171. Presentation designs regulate the formatting and Drag the vertical gridline between two columns (3) Drag
layout for the slide and are commonly called (1) Design the column markers on the table ruler bar (4) b and c (5)
None of these

Karan Dhami-74
184. To add a new row to a table you would (1) Click the 195. Which of the following should e used when you want
insert rows command on the insert menu (2) Press the to add a slide to an existing presentation? (1) File, add a
enter key (3) Click the insert rows button on the standard new slide (2) Insert, new slide (3) File, open (4) File,
toolbar (4) None of the above (5) None of these new (5) None of these
185. After moving a clip art image to a particular location 196. An organization has a president vice president,
on the slide, you can immediately reverse the action using managers and supervisors. On what level of an
the (1) Click the not do move object command on the edit organization chart are the vice presidents? (1) Fourth
menu (2) Click on the undo button (3) Click on redo level (2) Third level (3) Second level (4) First level (5)
button (4) All of above (5) None of these None of these
197. Which of the following includes special effects that
186. You can edit an embedded organization chart object can be applied to drawing objects? (1) Gradient fills (2)
by (1) Clicking the edit object (2) Double clicking the Line color and style (3) Rotating (4) All of above (5)
organization chart object (3) Right clicking the chart None of these
object, then clicking edit MSOrganization Chart object (4) 198. What is the term used when a clip art image changes
Band c (5) None of these the direction it faces? (1) Group (2) Flip (3) Rotate
187. You edit an embedded table object by (1) Clicking (4) a and b (5) None of these
the edit sub command of the document object command 199. What is the term used when you press and hold the
on the edit menu (2) Double clicking the table object (3) left mouse key and move the mouse around the slide? (1)
Right clicking the table object, then clicking edit document Highlighting (2) Dragging (3) Selecting (4) b and c
on the edit menu (4) All of above (5) None of these (5) None of these
188. You can embed a Microsoft Word tale in a slide by 200. The size of a table object (1) is dependent on the
(1) Clicking the insert new slide button on the standard amount of text within the table (2) Is determined by the
toolbar, then double clicking table (2) Clicking the insert presentation design but can be changed (3) Is determined
Microsoft word table button on the formatting toolbar (3) by the presentation design and can not be changed (4) A
Clicking the insert Microsoft word table button on the and c (5) None of these
standard toolbar (4) A and c (5) None of these
189. You can embed a organization chart in a slide by (1) 201. The size of an organization chart object (1) Is
Clicking the object command on the edit menu (2) determined by the presentation design and cannot be
Clicking the insert new slide button on the standard changed (2) Is determined by the presentation design but
toolbar, then double clicking the organization chart auto can be changed in PowerPoint (3) Is dependent on the
layout (3) Clicking the ms organization chart button on amount of text within the organization chart (4) B and c
the formatting toolbar (4) Clicking the ms organization (5) None of these
chart button on the standard toolbar (5) None of these 202. Which of the following format options should be used
to display dollars on an axis? (1) Normal (2)
190. You can add multiple subordinates to a position by Percentage (3) Currency (4) Comma (5) None of
(1) Clicking the subordinate button as you press and hold these
shift (2) Clicking the subordinate button each and every 203. To maintain the perspective (height and width ratio)
time You add a subordinate (3) Clicking the subordinate of an object when resizing, you need to (1) Press and
button as many times as the desired boxes (4) All of hold the shift key while dragging a corner sizing handle (2)
above (5) None of these Press and hold the alt + Ctrl keys while dragging a middle
191. What is the name of the form used to input chart handle (3) Drag a corner sizing handle (4) A and c (5)
values? (1) Datasheet (2) Microsoft Excel (3) None of these
Microsoft graph (4) Auto form (5) None of these 204. Which of the following is/are true about rulers and
guides? (1) Rulers and guides can be turned on or off (2)
192. Which of the following you must first complete in Rulers and guides print on the slide (3) Rulers and
order to delete an object? (1) Double click the image (2) guides help place objects on the slide (4) A and c (5)
Select the image (3) Resize the image (4) Move the None of these
image to a new location (5) None of these 205. To edit the text within the boxes of an organization
chart, you (1) Select the box and text, then make the
193. What is the term used to described the separation of a changes (2) Select the box, and then make the changes
clip art object into different parts so that it becomes a (3) Highlight the text then make the changes (4)
PowerPoint object? (1) Embedding (2) Regrouping (3) Highlight the text then make the change (5) None of
Ungrouping (4) Grouping Correct (5) None of these these
194. The auto shapes tool provides you with (1) Fancy 206. Which of the following best describes serifs? (1)
text to place on your slide (2) Commonly found shapes Serifs on characters help to differentiate between similar
(3) Any shape you want to add on a slide (4) Clip art looking letters (2) Serifs fonts are best for viewing test at
that is related to your presentation (5) None of these a distance (3) Serifs are fine cross strokes that appear at

Karan Dhami-75
the bottom and top of a letter (4) Serif font is very simple (3) Adding transitions (4) All of these (5) None of
in appearance (5) None of these these
207. Which of the following options changes the fill color
of an object back to the default color? (1) Template (2) 221. Animation schemes can be applied to..... in the
Automatic (3) Patterns (4) Fill colors (5) None of presentation (1) All slides (2) Select slides (3) Current
these slide (4) All of the above (5) None of these
208. Which of the following should you use to add shading
to a drawing object on or an auto shape object? (1) Text 222. Which of the following feature allows ypu to select
box tool (2) Line tool (3) Fill color (4) B and c more than one slide in slide sorter view? (1) Alt + Click
(5) None of these each slide (2) Shift + drag each slide (3) Shift + Click
209. Which of the following tools enable you to add text to each slide (4) Ctrl + Click each slide (5) None of these
a slide without using the standard placeholder?? (1) Text
box tool (2) Line tool; (3) Fill color (4) Auto shapes 223. One thing the common tasks button allows you to do
tool (5) None of these is (1) Apply a design template to a slide (2) Insert a new
210. A cell is defined as (1) The intersection of a column slide (3) Choose a new layout for a slide (4) All of
and a row (2) An input box (3) A rectangular marker above (5) None of these
(4) All of the above (5) None of these 224. A file which contains readymade styles that can be
used for presentations is called (1) Auto style (2)
211. Which of the following must be used with the mouse Template (3) Wizard (4) Pre-formatting (5) None
when you want to resize an image from the center and of these
keep it proportioned? (1) The space bar (2) The alt key 225. Which key deletes text before, or the left of, the
(3) The Ctrl key (4) The shift key (5) None of these insertion point? (1) Backspace (2) Page up (3)
Delete (4) Page down (5) None of these
212. Which of the following should be used with the
mouse when you want to draw a perfect shape? (1) The 226. Which of the following is not a transition effect? (1)
spacebar (2) The alt key (3) The Ctrl key (4) The shift Blinks diagonal (2) Dissolve (3) Fade through black
key (5) None of these (4) Blinds vertical (5) None of these
213. What will happen if you release the mouse button
before releasing the shift key when you draw a square? (1) 227. To create a PowerPoint presentation from a template
The square will not be a perfect square (2) The square (1) Click File, New, select the presentations tab and
will not be at the center of the slide (3) The square will be choose a template (2) Click File, New Template and
smaller (4) The square will be larger (5) None of these choose a template (3) Import a presentation template
214. On which part of the chart are the values entered in a from Power Point's template wizard (4) Click Create
data sheet displayed? (1) The title area (2) The legend Template from scratch,
(3) The y-axis (4) The x-axis (5) None of these 228. To save a presentation you (1) Click saves on the
windows start button (2) press Ctrl + F5 (3) Select File,
215. In order to edit a chart, you can (1) Triple click the Save from the menu (4) Click the saver button on the
chart object (2) Click and drag the chart object (3) formatting toolbar (5) None of these
Double click the chart object (4) Click the chart objects
(5) None of these 229. To change font size of a selected slide title, you? (1)
216. When an image is selected, it displays which of the Click the toolbars font dropdown arrow and choose the
following? (1) Two corner handles (2) Six middle. font you prefer (2) Click format, title and choose a font
handles (3) Eight sizing handles (4) Six boxes (5) from the font tab (3) Click the toolbar's increase font size
None of these button (4) Click title, new font, (5) None of these
217. The maximum zoom percentage in Microsoft
PowerPoint is (1) 100% (2) 200% (3) 400% 230. To change font size of a selected slide title, you: (1)
(4) 500% (5) None of these Click the toolbars Font dropdown arrow and choose the
218.PowerPoint 2000 has ....... Number of views (1) 3 font you prefer (2) Click Format, Title and choose a font
(2) 4 (3) fei (4) 6 (5) None of these from the font tab (3) Click the toolbar's Increase Font
Size button (4) Click Title, New Font (5) None of these
219. Press animation effects allows you to (1) Add clip 231. You can show the shortcut menu during the slide
art images to your slides (2) Create a custom transition to show by (1) Clicking the shortcut button in the formatting
the nect slide (3) Show bullet items as they are discussed toolbar (2) Right clicking the current slide (3) Clicking
(4) None of above (5) None of these an icon on the current slide (4) A and b (5) None of
these
220. Which of the following features allows you to view 232. To insert a new slide in the current presentation, we
slides in a slide show without manually advancing each can choose (1) Ctrl + M (2) Ctrl + N (3) Ctrl + 0 (4) Ctrl
slide? (1) Adding build effects (2) Setting slide times + F (5) None of these
Karan Dhami-76
233..Microsoft PowerPoint is a (1) Database program (2) 246. The arrangement of elements such as Title and
Spreadsheet program (3) Presentation program (4) Word Subtitle text, pictures, tables etc. is called (1) Layout (2)
processing program (5) None of these Presentation (3) Design (4) Scheme (5) None of
these
234. What is the name of the form used to input chart 247. Which of the following are types of sound files? (1)
values? (1) Datasheet (2) Microsoft Excel (3) LOG files (2) DAT files (3) WAV files (4) DRV
Microsoft graph (4) Auto form (5) None of these files (5) None of these
248. Which of the following can you use to add times to
235. Right clicking something in PowerPoint (1) Deletes the slides in a presentation? (1) Microsoft graph (2)
the object (2) Selects the object (3) Opens a shortcut Microsoft Table (3) Microsoft Excel (4) Microsoft
menu listing for the object (4) Nothing he right mouse Word (5) None of these
button for operation (5) None of these 249. Which view in PowerPoint can be used to enter
speaker comments? (1) Normal (2) Slide show (3)
236. After choosing a predefine template...... option has to Slide sorter (4) Notes page view (5) None of these
be Chosen to change a background color (1) Design
template (2) Color scheme (3) Animation scheme (4) 250. The best way to insert a new slide in a presentation is
Color effects (5) None of these to use the (1) Normal view (2) Special view (3) Slide
show view (4) Slide sorter view (5) None of these
237. Ellipse Motion is a predefined.... (1) Design 251. Which is the best view for getting your thoughts for a
template (2) Color scheme (3) Animation scheme (4) presentation out on the computer? (1) Outline view (2)
None of these (5) None of these Notes page view (3) Slide sorter view (4) Slide view
(5) None of these
238. Block arrows, stars and banners, and callouts are all 252. The boxes that are displayed to indicate that the text,
examples of (1) Different types of children's building pictures or objects are placed in it is called.... (1)
blocks (2) Auto Shape categories (3) Clip art categories Placeholder (2) Auto text (3) Text box (4) Word art (5)
located in the Microsoft Clip Gallery (4) More technical None of these
terms that I don't understand (5) None of these 253. Which of the following is not a feature of
239. We can replace a font on all slides with another font PowerPoint? (1) Printing transparencies (2) Printing
using the ....option (1) Tools, Replace Fonts (2) Tools, the speaker's notes along with slide images (3) Linking a
Fonts (3) Format, Replace Fonts (4) Edit, Fonts (5) slide transition with a laser pointer (4) Drawing with a
None of these pen (5) None of these
240. Special effects used to introduce slides in a 254. Which option can be used to create a new slide show
presentation are called (1) Effects (2) Custom with the current slides but presented in a different order (1)
animations (3) Transitions (4) Preset animations (5) Rehearsal (2) Custom slider show (3) Slide show setup
None of these (4) Slide show view (5) None of these
241. PowerPoint can display data from which of the 255. Which of the following are actions you can assign to
following add-in software of MS-Office (1) Equation an action button or slide object? (1) Run a macro (2)
editor (2) Organization chart (3) Photo album (4) All Play a sound (3) Hyper link (4) All of above (5)
of these (5) None of these None of these
242. Which key on the keyboard can be used to view slide 256. Which option in PowerPoint allows to carry slides
show (1) Fl (2) F2 (3) F5 (4) F10 (5) from one computer to another? (1) Save As (2) Save
None of these and Go (3) Pack and Go (4) Web and Go (5) None of
243. Which of the following fill effects can you use for these
the slide background? (1) Gradient (2) Texture (3) 257. Power Point presentation is a collection of (1)
Picture (4) All of the above (5) None of these Slides and Handouts (2) Speaker's notes (3) Outlines
(4) All of the above (5) None of these
244. Which of the following statements is not true? (1) 258. How can the slide show be repeated continuously? (1)
Holding down the Shift key while you draw an object loop continuously until 'Esc' (2) repeat continuously (3)
creates perfect squares, circles and straight lines (2) The loop more (4) All of the above (5) None of these
text in a text box can't be formatted (3) The drawing 259. From where can we set the timing for each object? (1)
toolbar contains tools for drawing shapes, lines, arrows, slide show, custom transition (2) Slide show, Slide
and more (4) Ctrl+ S saves the document (5) None of transition (3) slide show, custom animation (4)
these view, slide sorter (5) None of these
245. A chart can be put as a part of the presentation using
(1) Insert -> Pictures -> Chart (2) Insert -> Chart (3) 260. The arrangement of elements such as Title and
Edit-> Chart (4) View -> Chart (5) None of these subtitle text, pictures, tables etc. is called : (1) Layout (2)
Presentation (3) Design (4) Scheme (5) None of
these

Karan Dhami-77
261. A rile which contains ready-made styles that can be
used for a presentation is called: (1) AutoStyle (2) 276. Power Point can display data from which of the
Template (3) Wizard (4) Preformatting (5) None of following add-In software of MS Office? (1) Equation
these Editor (2) Organization Chart (3) Photo Album (4)
262. After choosing a predefined template, which option All of these (5) None of these
has to be chosen to change the background color? (1)
Design Template (2) Color Scheme (3) Animation 277. The spelling dialog box can be involved by choosing
Scheme (4) Color Effects (5) None of these spelling from ___ menu. (1) Insert (2) File (3) Tools
(4) view (5) None of these
263. Ellipse Motion is a predefined___ (1) Design
Template (2) Col or Scheme (3) Animation Scheme (4) 278.Which key do you press to check spelling? (1) F3
All of these (5) None of these (2) F5 (3) F7 (4) F9 (5) None of these

264. Animation Schemes can be applied to ___ in the 279.Which PowerPoint feature allows the user to create a
presentation. (1) All slides (2) Select slides (3) Current simple presentation without having to spend too much time
Slide (4) All of the above (5) None of these on It? (1) AutoContent Wizard (2) Animation (3) Col
or Schemes (4) Chart Wizard (5) None of these
265. To insert new slide in the current Presentation, we
can choose: (1) Ctrl+ M (2) Ctrl+ N (3) Ctrl-HD 280. Which PowerPoint feature adds special effects to
(4) Ctrl+ F (5) None of these modify the appearance of the slides and the timing
266. To open the existing presentation, press (1) Ctrl + L between each slide? •< (1) Color Schemes (2)
(2) Ctrl + N (3) Ctrl+ A (4) Ctrl + 0 (5) None of these Animation (3) Transition Settings (4) Handouts (5)
None of these
267. Slides can have (1) Title, text graphs (2) Drawn 281. Slide sorter of PowerPoint is available on menu. (1)
objects, shapes (3) Clipart, drawn art, visual (4) any of Insert (2) File (3) View (4) Edit (5) None of
the above these
268. A Chart can be put as a part of the presentation using 282. To print the PowerPoint presentation, press (1) Ctrl+
(1) lnsert -> Pictures ->Chart (2) lnser t->Chart (3) T (2) Ctrl + E (3) Ctrl + S (4) Ctrl + P (5) None of these
E.dit->Chart (4) View->Chart (5) None of these 283. What Is a slide transition? (1) Overheads (2)
Letters (3) A special effect used to introduce a slide in a
269. We can replace a font on all slides with another font slide show (4) The way one slide looks (5) None of
using the option (1) Edit-> Fonts (2) Tools -> Fonts (3) these
Tools -> Replace Fonts (4) Format -> Replace Fonts (5) 284. What does "apply design template" do? (1)
None of these Changes the content of the slide (2) Adds functionality to
270. Which key on the keyboard can be used to view Slide the slide (3) Changes the look of the slide without
show? (1) F1 (2) F2 (3) F5 (4) F10 (5) changing the content (4) None of the above
None of these 285. How can you stop a slide show? (1) Press the right
271. Which option in PowerPoint allows you to create a arrow (2) Press Escape (3) Press the left arrow (4)
package of your presentation for showing to another Press the down arrow (5) None of these
computer? (1) Save As (2) Save and Go (3) Pack and
Go (4) Web and Go (5) None of these 286. What do you do to start the slide show? (1) Click on
272. Which view in Power Point can be used to enter Go (2) Turn on transition (3) Click on the Slide Show
Speaker Comments? (1) Normal (2) Slide Show (3) icon (4) All of the above (5) None of these
Slide Sorter (4) Notes Page view (5) None of these 1.(2) 2.(2) 3.(3) 4. (2) 5.(4) 6.(3) 7.(4) 8.(3) 9. (4) 10. (2)
11.(2) 12.(1) 13.(3) 14.(1) 15.(4) 16.(4) 17.(1) 18.(1) 19.
273. Which option can be used to set custom timings for (3) 20.(2) 21 .(4) 22.(3) 23.(4) 24.(1) 25.(1) 26.(3) 27.(3)
slides In a presentation? (1) Slider Timings (2) Slider 28.(4) 29.(2) 30.(2) 31 .(3) 32.(3) 33. (1) 34. (3) 35.(2) 36.
Timer (3) Rehearsal (4) Slide Show Setup (5) None (1) 37.(3 38.(4) 39.(2) 40.(1) 41 .(2) 42.(1) 43.(3) 44.(1)
of these 45.(2) 46.(1) 47.(3) 48.(2) 49.(3) 50.(2) 51 .(1) 52.(3) 53.
274. Which option can be used to create a new slide show (1) 54.(2) 55.(2) 56.(1) 57.(4) 58.(1) 59.(3) 60.(4) 61 .(3)
with the current slides but presented in a different order? 62.(1) 63.(3) 64.(4) 65.(4) 66.(1) 67.(2) 68.(3) 69.(2) 70.
(1) Rehearsal (2) Custom Slide show (3) Slide Show (4) 71 .(1) 72.(2) 73.(3) 74.(2) 75.(4) 76.(1) 77.(4) 78.(3)
Setup (4) Slide Show View (5) None of these 79.(2) 80.(4) 81 .(1) 82.(2) 83.(3) 84.(4)
85.(4) 86.(2) 87.(3) 88.(1) 89.(3) 90.(4) 91 .(4) 92.(4) 93.
275. Which of the following is an example for Automatic (1) 94.(1) 95.(3) 96.(4) 97.(1) 98.(3) 99.(4) 100.(4) 101.(1)
Text formatting? (1) Underlining Hyperlink (2) 102.(3) 103.(4) 104.(4) 105.(3) 106.(2) 107.(4) 108.(1)
Adjusting extra space (3) Replacing two-s with a hyphen 109.(2) 110.(1) 111.(3) 112.(3) 113.(1) 114.(1) 115.(4)
(4) All of the above (5) None of these 116.(3) 117.(2) 118.(2) 119.(2) 120.(4) 121 .(2) 122.(4)

Karan Dhami-78
123.(1) 124.(3) 125.(2) 126.(4) 127.(2) 128.(2) 129.(3) destroys the contents (4) A list of CC: or BCC: recipients
130.(1) 131 .(2) 132.(2) 133.(3) 134.(1) 135.(2) 136.(2) (5) None of these
137.(3) 138.(1) 139.(2) 140.(2) 141 .(2) 142.(3) 143.(3) 9. Which of the following are all considered advantages
144.(1) 145.(1) 146.(1) 147.(1) 148.(2) 153.(4) 154.(2) of e-mail ? (1) Printable, global and expensive (2)
155.(3) 156.(2) 157.(3) 158.(3) 159.(3) 160.(2) 161 .(4) Global, convenience and Microsoft owned (3)
162.(3) 163.(3) 164.(1) 165.(4) 166.(2) 167.(3) 168.(2) Convenience, speed of delivery, generality and reliability
169.(4) 170.(3) 171.(2) 172.(4) 173.(1) 174.(2) 175.(2) (4) Slow delivery, reliable, global and inexpensive (5)
176.(2) 177.(1) 178.(4) 179.(3) 180.(4) 181 .(4) 182.(4) None of these
183.(4) 184.(4) 185.(2) 186.(4) 187.(4) 188.(4) 189.(2)
190.(4) 191 .(1) 192.(2) 193.(3) 194.(2) 195.(2) 196.(3) 10. What is an E-mail attachment? (1) A separate
197.(4) 198.(4) 199.(4) 200.(2) 201 .(4) 202.(3) 203.(1) document from another program sent along with an E-mail
204,(4) 205.(1) 206.(3) 207.(2) 208.(4) 209.(1) 210.(1) message (2) A receipt sent by the recipient (3) A
211. (3) 212.(4) 213.(1) 214.(3) 215.(3) 216.(3) 221 .(4) malicious parasite that feeds off of your messages and
222.(3) 223.(4) 224.(2) 225.(1) 226.(1) 227.(1) 228.(3) destroys the contents (4) A list of CC : or BCC :
229.(3) 230.(3) 231 .(2) 232.(1) 233.(3) 234.(1) 235.(3) recipients (5) None of these
236.(2) 237.(3) 238.(2) 239.(3) 240.(3) 241 .(4) 242.(3)
243.(4) 244.(2) 245.(1) 246.(1) 247.(3) 248.(1) 249.(4) 11. Sending an E-mail is similar to (1) drawing a
250.(4) 251 .(1) 252.(1) 253.(3) 254.(2) 255.(4) 256.(3) picture (2) writing a letter (3) talking on the phone (4)
257.(4) 258.(1) 259,(3) 260.(1) 261 .(2) 262.(2) 263.(3) sending a package (5) None of these
264.(4) 265.(1) 266.(4) 267,(4) 268.(1) 269.(4) 270.(3) 271
.(3) 272.(4) 273.(3) 274.(2) 275.(4) 276.(4) 277.(3) 278,(3) 12. The __ also called the Web, contains billions of
279.(1) 280.(3) 281 .(3) 282.(4) 283.(3) 284.(3) 285.(2) documents. (1) Web Portal (2) HTFP (3) World Wide
286.(3) Web (4) Domain (5) None of these

INTERNET 13. Choose the web-browser among the following: (1)


1. All of the following are examples of real security and MSN messenger (2) Yahoo messenger (3) Rediffbal. net
privacy risks EXCEPT: (1) hackers. (2) identity theft. (4) None of these (5) Netscape Navigator
(3) viruses. (4) spam. (5) None of these
14. The __ shows all the Web sites and pages that you
2. The ability to recover and read deleted or damaged files have visited over a period of time. (1) status bar (2)
from a criminal's computer is an ex-ample of a law task bar (3) tool bar (4) history list (5) None of these
enforcement spe-cialty called: (1) computer forensics.
(2) robotics. (3) simulation. (4) animation. (5) None 15. In the URL http:/www.prenhall.com, the portion
of these labelled http is the___ (1) domain name (2) host (3)
3. The difference between people with access to protocol (4) top-level domain (5) None of these
computers and the Internet and those without this access is
known as the: (1) Internet divide. (2) digital divide. (3) 16. A repair for a known software bug, usually available at
Web divide. (4) broadband divide. (5) None of these no charge on the internet, is called a(n)_ (1) version
4. Which of the following is a Web browser ? (1) Paint (2) tutorial (3) patch (4) FAQ (5) None of these
(2) Power Point (3) Word (4) Fire fox (5) All are
Web browsers 17. A Web site address is a unique name that identifies a
5. The Internet allows you to — (1) send electronic mail specific _ on the Web. (1) Web browser (2) PDA (3)
(2) view Web pages (3) connect to servers 'all around Link (4) Web site (5) None of these
the world (4) None of these (5) All of the above
6. Tunk e-mail is also called— (1) spoof (2) spam 18. A word in a web page that, when clicked, opens
(3) sniffer script (4) spool (5) None of these another document is called — (1) hyperlink (2)
anchor (3) reference (4) URL (5) None of these
7. What is the most common way to get a virus in your
computer's hard disk ? (1) By installing games from their 19. When sending an e-mail, the _ line describes the
CDROMS (2) By uploading pictures from mobile contents of the message. (1) to (2) None of these (3)
phones to the computer (3) By sending e-mails (4) By contents (4) CC (5) subject
opening e-mails (5) None of these
20. Which of the following is an example of connectivity ?
8. What is an E-mail attachment? (1) A separate (1) floppy disk (2) Internet (3) power cord (4)
document from another program sent along with an E-mail data (5) None of these
message (2) A receipt sent by the recipient (3) A 21. The process of connecting to the Internet account is (1)
malicious parasite that feeds off of your messages and SIGN IN (2) LOG OUT (3) LOG IN (4) SIGN OUT
(5) None of these
Karan Dhami-79
22. A commonly used graphic format for the web is (1) 36. IP address is currently (1) None of these (2)
Imp (2) bmp (3) text (4) GIF (5) TIP available in plenty (3) 6 bytes long (4) not assigned as
23. The HTML code written in a text editor to make it is all used up (5) 4 bytes long
webpages, (1) HTML coding tags (2) source element 37. IP addresses are converted to (1) a binary string (2)
(3) Source code (4) Tags (5) None of these a hierarchy of domain names (3) alphanumeric string (4)
24. If you receive an e-mail from someone you don't a hexadecimal string (5) None of these
know, what should you do? (1) Delete it without opening
it (2) Forward it to the police immediately (3) Open it 38. Internet addresses must always (i) a country
and respond to them saying you don't know them (4) name or organization type (ii) internet service
Reply and ask them for their personal information (5) provider's name (iii) name of organization (iv) name of
Reply and tell them you want to keep in touch with them individual (v) type of organization (1) i,iii (2) ii, iii,
25. __ is collection of web-pages and __ is the very first iv (3) i, ii.iii (4) ii, iii, iv, v (5) None of these
page that we see on opening of a website. (1) Home-
page, Webpage (2) Webpage-, Home-page (3) Web-site, 39. Internet uses (1) Telex switching (2) Circuit
Home-page (4) Webpage, Web-site (5) None of these switching (3) Telephone switching (4) Packet switching
26. When we run a program in HTML coding, _ is used as (5) None of these
backend and __works as frontend. (1) Notepad - Msn- 40. Internet data is broken up as (1) fixed length packets
messenger (2) Notepad-1 nternet Ex-plorer (3) MS- (2) None of these (3) not packetized (4) 64 bytes
word - Internet -Explorer (4) Both (1) and (2) (5) None packets (5) variable length packets
of these
27. One advantage of dial-up Internet access is (1) it 41. Internet packet data structure consists of (i) source
utilizes broadband technology (2) None of these (3) it address (ii) destination address (iii) serial number of
uses a router for security (4) modem speeds are very fast packets (iv) message bytes (v) Control bits for
(5) it utilizes existing telephone service error checking (vi) Path identification bits (1) i, ii.iii
28. What is the term for unsolicited e-mail ? (1) (2) i, Ii, iii, iv (3) i, ii, iii, iv, v, vi (4) i, ii, iii, iv, v (5)
newsgroup (2) Usenet (3) backbone (4) spam (5) None of these
flaming
29. The code for a Web page is written using —— (1) a 42. The packets of an internet message (1) take a
fifth generation language (2) Hypertext Markup predetermined path (2) go along different paths based on
Language (3) Win Zip (4) Perl (5) URL path availability (3) take a path based on packet priority
(4) take the shortest path from source to destination (5)
30. Small application programs that run on a Web page None of these
and may ensure a form is completed properly or provide 43. By an intranet we mean (1) a network connecting al!
animation are known as —— (1) spiders (2) flash computers of an organi-ation and using the internet
(3) cookies (4) applets (5) sparks protocol (2) a Wide Area Network connecting all
branches of an organization (3) a corporate computer net
31. When the pointer is positioned on a ——, it is shaped work (4) a LAN of an organization (5) None of these
like a hand. (1) hyperlink (2) grammar error (3) 44. By an extranet we mean (1) an extra fast computer
screen tip (4) spelling error (5) formatting error network (2) an extra network used by an organization for
higher reliability (3) the intranels of two co operating
32. Internet is (1) a local computer network (2) a organizations interconnected via a secure leased line (4)
world wide network of computers (3) a world wide an extra conventation to crating organization (5) None of
interconnected network of computers which use a common these
protocol to communicate with one another (4) an 45. World Wide Web (1) is another name for internet
interconnected network of computers (5) None of these (2) world wide qonnection for computers (3) a
33. Which facilities is available in the internet are (i) collection of world wide information (4) a collection of
electronic mail (ii) remote login (iii) file transfer linked information residing on computers connected by the
(iv)Word processing (1) i,ii (2) ii, iii and iv (3) i.ii.iv internet (5) None of these
(4) i, ii.iii (5) None of these
34. Internet requires (1) an international agreement to 46. Among services available on the World Wide Web are
connect computers (2) a commonly agreed'set of rules to (i) Encryption (ii) HTTP (iii) HTML (iv)
communicate between computers (3) a local area Firewalls (1) ii and iii (2) I and ii (3) iii and iv
network (4) a World Wide Web (5) None of these (4) I and iv (5) None of these

35. Each computer connected to the internet must (1) be 47. A world wide web contains web pages (1) presiding
an IBM PC (2) be internet compatible (3) have a in many computers (2) created using HTML (3)
unique IP address (4) have a modem connection (5) residing in many computers linked together using HTML
None of these (4) with links to other web pages (5) None of these

Karan Dhami-80
Define the tags separately (4) Have a document type
48. A web page is located using a (1) Uniform Resource definition which defines the tags (5) None of these
Locator (2) Universal Record Linking (3) Universal
Record Locator (4) Uniformly Reachable Links (5) 61. The advantages of XML over HTML are (i). It
None of these 49. A URL specifies the following : (i) allows processing of data slored in web pages (ii) It uses
protocol used (ii) domain name of server hosting web meaningful tags which aids in understanding the nature of
page (iii) name of folder with required information a document (iii) Is simpler than HTML (iv) It separates
(iv) name of document formatted using HTML (v) presentation and structure of document (1) (i),(ii)and(iy)
the name of 1SP (1) i, ii, iii, v (2) ii, iii, iv, v (3) (3) (ii).(iii) and (iv) (4) (i).(iii) and (iv) (5) None of
i, iii, iv (4) i, ii, iii, iv (5) None of these these
62. XSL definition is used along with XML definition to
50. A search engine is a program to search (1) for specify (1) The data types of the contents of XML
information (2) web pages (3) web pages for document (2) The links with other documents (3)
Information using specified search terms (4) web pages The presentation of XML document (4) The juncture
for specified in-dex terms (5) None of these of XML document (5) None of these

51. HTML stands for (1) Hyper Text Markup Lan - 63. XLL definition is used along with XML to specify (1)
guage (2) Hyper Text Making Links (3) Higher The data types of the contents of XML document. (2) The
Textual Marking of Links (4) Hyper Text Mixer of Links links with other documents (3) The presentation of
(5) None of these XML document (4) The structure of XML document
52. HTML is similar to a (1) screen editor (2) scripting (5) None of these
language (3) search engine (4) None pf these (5) 64. DTD definition is used along with XML to specify
word processing language (1 ) The presentation of XML document (2) The links
with other documents (3) The structure of XML
53. Desirable properties of a website are (i) a document (4) The data types of the con- (5) tents of
meaningful address (ii) Help and search facilities (iii) XML document None of these
Links to related sites (iv) Features to allow users to give 1.(4) 2.(1) 3-(2) 4.(4) 5.(5) 6.(2) 7.(4)8.(1) 9.(3)10.(1)11.
feedback (v) Hosting on a mainframe (1) i, ii, iii (2) (2) 12.(3) 13.(5) 14.(4) 15.(1) 16.(3), 17.(4) 18.(1) 19.
i, ii, iii, iv, v (3) i, ii, iii, iv (4) i, ii, iii, v (5) None (5)20.(2) 21 .(3) 22.(4) 23.(3) 24.(1) 25.(3) 26.(2) 27.(5)
of these 28.(4)29.(2) 30.(2) 31 .(1) 32.(3) 33.(4)34.(2) 35.(3) 36.
54. HTML uses (1) Fixed tags defined by the language (5) 37.(2) 38.(1) 39.(4) 40.(5) 41 .(4) 42.(3) 43.(1) 44.(3)
(2) User defined tags (3) Tags only for linking (4) 45.(4) 46.(1) 47.(3) 48. (1) 49.(4) 50.(3) 51 .(1) 52.(5)53.
Pre-specified tags (5) None of these (3) 54.(1) 55.(3) 56.(4) 57.(3) 58.(1) 59.(3)60.(4) 61 .(1)
62.(3) 63.(2) 64.(4)
55. HTML tags define (1) The data types of elements of
document (2) The contents of the document (3) 1. One megabyte equals approximately 1) 1,000 bits 2)
Presentation of specified elements of a document (4) The 1,000 bytes 3) 1 million bytes 4) 1 million bits 5) 2,000
structure of the document (5) None of these bytes
2. Data going into the computer is called? 1) Output 2)
56. SGML stands for (1) Standard General Markup Unit Algorithm 3) Input 4) Calculations 5) Flowchart
(2) Structured General Markup Language (3) Standard 3. Which of the following refers to the memory in your
Graphics Mapping Language (4) Standard Generalized computer? 1) RAM 2) DSL 3) USB 4) LAN 5) CPU 4.
Markup Language (5) None of these When you are working on a document on PC, where is the
Document temporarily stored? 1) RAM 2) ROM 3) The
57. HTML and XML are markup languages (1) CPU 4) Flash memory 5) The CD-Rom
Specially development for the web (2) Are versions of 5. Information travels between components on the mother
SGML (3) Are based on SGML (4) Independent of board through- 1) Flash memory 2) CMOS 3) Bays 4)
SGML (5) None of these Buses 5) Peripherals
58. XML stands for (1) Extended Markup Language (2) 6. How are data organized in a spreadsheet? 1) Lines and
Excellent Markup Links (3) Extra Markup Language (4) spaces 2) Layers and planes 3) Height and width 4) Rows
Extended Marking Links (5) None of these and columns 5) None of these
59. XML uses (1) Both predefined and user defined tags 7. Which of the following is true? 1) Byte is a single digit
(2) pre-defined tags (3) user define tags (4) Extended in a binary number 2) Bit represents a grouping of digital
tags used in HTML and makes them powerful (5) None numbers 3) Eight-digit binary number is called a byte 4)
of these Eight-digit binary number is called a bit 5) None of these
60. In order to interpret XML documents one should 8. Transformation of input into output is performed by? 1)
(1) Use standardized tags (2) Specify tag filename (3) Peripherals 2) Memory 3) Storage 4) The Input-Output
unit 5) The CPU

Karan Dhami-81
9. How many options does a binary choice offer? 1) None 27. _____is the process of finding errors in software code.
2) One 3) Two 4) It depends on the amount of memory in 1) Compiling 2) Testing 3) Running 4) Debugging 5)
the computer 5) It depends on the speed of the computer's None of these
processor 28. To move to the beginning of a line of text, press the
10. .....is collection of web pages and ......is the very first _____ key. 1) Home 2) A 3) Page-up 4) Enter 5) None of
page that we see on opening of a web-site 1) Home-page, these
Web-page 2) Web-site, Home-page 3) Web-page, Home- 29. Virtual memory is 1) Memory on the hard disk that the
page 4) Web-page, Web-site 5) None of these CPU uses as an extended RAM 2) RAM 3) Only necessary
11. When the pointer is positioned on a _____ it is shaped if you do not have any RAM in your computer 4) A back
like a hand. 1) Grammar error 2) Hyperlink 3) Screen tip up device for floppy disks 5) None of these
4) Spelling error 5) Formatting error 30. A _____ contains specific rules and words that express
12. The _____ of a system includes the programs or the logical steps of an algorithm. 1) Syntax 2)
instructions. 1) Hardware 2) Icon 3) Information 4) Programming structure 3) Programming language 4) Logic
Software 5) None of these chart 5) None of these
13. 'www' stands for _____ 1) World Word Web 2) World 31. When sending an e-mail, the _____ line describes the
Wide Web 3) World White Web 4) World Work Web 5) contents of the message. 1) to 2) subject 3) contents 4) CC
None of these 5) None of these
14. What menu is selected to cut, copy, and paste? 1) File 32. The _____ tells the computer how to use its
2) Tools 3) Special 4) Edit 5) None components. 1) Utility 2) Network 3) Operating system 4)
15. You can use the tab key to 1) Move a cursor across the Application program 5) None of these
screen 2) Indent a paragraph 3) Move the cursor down the 33. Which grouping do you work with when formatting
screen 4) Only (1) and (2) 5) None of these text in word? 1) Tables, paragraphs and indexes 2)
Paragraphs, indexes and sections 3) Characters, sections
16. The most important or powerful computer in a typical and paragraphs 4) Indexes, characters and tables 5) None
network is _____ 1) Desktop 2) Network client 3) of these
Network server 4) Network station 5) None of these 34. What is backup? 1) Adding more components to your
17. Which of the following is an example of connectivity? network 2) Protecting data by copying it from the original
1) Internet 2) Floppy disk 3) Power cord 4) Data 5) None source to a different destination 3) Filtering old data from
of these the new data 4) Accessing data on tape 5) None of these
18. The ability to find an individual item in a file 35. Network components are connected to the same cable
immediately _____ is used. 1) File allocation table 2) in the_____ topology. 1) Star 2) Ring 3) Bus 4) Mesh 5)
Directory 3) Sequential access 4) Direct access 5) None of Mixed 36. This component is required to process data into
these information and consists of integrated circuits. 1) Hard
19. The primary purpose of software is to turn data disk 2) RAM 3) CPU 4) ROM 5) None of these
into____ 1) Web sites 2) Information 3) Programs 4) 37. One advantage of dial-up-internet access is ___ 1) It
Objects 5) None of these utilises broadband technology 2) It utilizes existing
20. To what temporary area can you store text and other telephone service 3) It uses a router for security 4) Modem
data, and later paste them to another location? 1) The speeds are very fast 5) None of these
clipboard 2) ROM 3) CD-ROM 4) The hard disk 5) None 38. What is the term for unsolicited e-mail? 1) News group
of these 2) Use net 3) Backbone 4) Flaming 5) Spam
21. Storage that retains its data after the power is tuned off 39. Two or more computers connected to each other of
is referred to as 1) volatile storage 2) non-volatile storage sharing information form a _____ 1) Network 2) Router 3)
3) sequential storage 4) direct storage 5) None of these Server 4) Tunnel 5) Pipeline
22. _____is the science that attempts to produce machines 40. Computers that are portable and convenient for users
that display the same type of intelligence that humans do. who travel are known as _____ 1) Super computers 2) Lap
1) Nano science 2) Nanotechnology 3) Simulation 4) tops 3) Mini computers 4) File servers 5) None of these
Artificial intelligence (AI) 5) None of these 41. A computer checks the _____ of user names and
23. Changing an existing document is called _____ the passwords for a match before granting access. 1) Website
document. 1) Creating 2) Editing 3) Modifying 4) 2) Network 3) Backup file 4) Data base 5) None of these
Adjusting 5) None of these 42. Office LANs that are spread geographically apart on a
24. Computers use the _____ number system to store data large scale can be connected using a corporate _____ 1)
and perform calculations. 1) Decimal 2) Hexadecimal 3) CAN 2) LAN 3) DAN 4) WAN 5) TAN
Octal 4) Binary 5) None of these 43. The code for a Web page is written using _____ 1) A
25. Which of the following is the largest unit of storage? 1) fifth generation language 2) Win Zip 3) Peripherals 4)
GB 2) KB 3) MB 4) TB 5) None of these Hypertext Markup Language 5) URL
26. The _____ key will launch the start buttons. 1) Esc 2) 44. What is the process of copying software programs
Shift 3) Windows 4) Shortcut 5) None of these from secondary storage media to the hard disk called? 1)

Karan Dhami-82
Configuration 2) Download 3) Storage 4) Upload 5) 7. By an intranet we mean a. a LAN of an organization b. a
Installation Wide Area Network connecting all branches of an
45. Small application programs that run on a web page and organization c. a corporate computer network d. a network
may ensure a form is completed properly or provide connecting all computers of an organization and using the
animation are known as _____ 1) Flash 2) Spiders 3) internet protocol
Cookies 4) Applets 5) Sparks 8. Internet uses a. Packet switching b. Circuit switching c.
46. The first computers were programmed using _____ 1) Telephone switching d. Telex switching
Assembly language 2) Machine language 3) Source code 9. Internet is a. a local computer network b. a world wide
4) Object code 5) Spaghetti code network of computers c. an interconnected network of
47. Which process checks to ensure the components of the computers d. a world wide interconnected network of
computer and operating are connected properly? 1) computers which use a common protocol to communicate
Booting 2) Processing 3) Saving 4) Editing 5) None of with one another
these 10. ____________ is a set of computer programs used on a
48. In a relational database, this is a data structure that computer to help perform tasks. A. An instruction B.
organizes the information about a single topic into rows Software C. Memory D. A processor
and columns. 1) Block 2) Record 3) Tuple 4) Table 5) 11. System software is the set of programs that enables
Command line interface your computer’s hardware devices and ____________
software to work together. A. management B. processing
49. How can the user determine what programs are C. utility D. application
available on a computer? 1) Checking the hard disk 12. The PC (personal computer) and the Apple Macintosh
properties 2) Viewing the installed programs during the are examples of two different: A. platforms. B.
booting process 3) Checking the operating system for a list applications. C. programs. D. storage devices.
of installed programs. 4) Checking the existing files saved 13. Apple Macintoshes (Macs) and PCs use
on the disk 5) None of these different______ to process data and different operating
50. When we run a program in HTML coding _____ is systems. A. languages B. methods C. CPUs D. storage
used as backend and ____ works as front-end. 1) Notepad devices
- Internet-Explorer 2) Notepad - Msn-messenger 3) MS- 14. Servers are computers that provide resources to other
Word - Internet Explorer 4) Both (1) and (2) 5) None of computers connected to a: A. network. B. mainframe. C.
these supercomputer. D. client.
1)3 2)3 3)1 4)1 5)4 6)3 7)3 8)5 9)3 10)2 11)2 12)4 13)2 15. Smaller and less expensive PC-based servers are
14)4 15)2 16)3 17)1 18)1 19)2 20)1 21)2 22)4 23)2 24)4 replacing ____________ in many businesses. A.
25)4 26)3 27)4 28)1 29)2 30)3 31)2 32)3 33)1 34)2 35)2 supercomputers B. clients C. laptops D. mainframes
36)3 37)2 38)5 39)1 40)2 41)4 42)4 43)4 44)5 45)4 46)2 16. DSL is an example of a(n) ____________ connection.
47)1 48)4 49)4 50)1 A. network B. wireless C. slow D. broadband
17. The difference between people with access to
PRACTICE QUESTIONS SET 2 computers and the Internet and those without this access is
1. What type of network connection is NOT a way of known as the A. digital divide. B. Internet divide. C. Web
connecting to the Internet? a. TCP/IP b. Dial-up c. ISDN d. divide. D. broadband divide.
T1 e. T3 18.____________ is the science revolving around the use
2. Which of the following is the correct syntax for a URL? of nanostructures to build devices on an extremely small
a. [email protected] b. c:\windows c. index.html d. aol.com scale. A. Nanotechnology B. Micro-technology C.
e. All of the Above. Computer forensics D. Artificial intelligence
3. A ―High Resolution‖ computer monitor will have: a. 19. Word processing, spreadsheet, and photo-editing are
High dpi, e.g. .31 dpi b. Low dpi, e.g. .26 dpi c. 256 colors examples of: A. application software. B. system software.
d. Resolution isn’t measured in dpi or colors e. The same C. operating system software. D. platform software.
resolution as your printer. 20. Which of the following is NOT a necessary
4. Computer Memory is normally measured in: a. characteristic of computer fluency? A. Understanding the
Kilobytes b. Megabytes c. Gigabytes d. Terabytes e. None capabilities and limitations of computers B. Being able to
of the Above write computer programs C. Becoming comfortable with
5. In Microsoft Excel, which of the following formulas is the use of computers D. Understanding the legal, ethical,
incorrect? a. =SUM(A1,B1,B2,C2) b. and societal implications of computing
=ROUND(SUM(A1:C2),2) c. =ROUND(A1:C2,2) d. 21. According to the U.S. Department of Labor,
=SUM(ROUND(A1:B1,B2:C2)) e. All of the Above approximately ____________ % of American workers
6. A world wide web contains web pages a. residing in used computers on the job as of 2001. A. 20 B. 40 C. 50 D.
many computers b. created using HTML c. with links to 70
other web pages d. residing in many computers linked 22. Retail employees typically use ____________
together using HTML terminals to process sales transactions. A. sales processing
B. transaction point C. automatic teller D. point of sale

Karan Dhami-83
23. The process of ____________ involves automated B. Mouse ? input C. CPU ? storage D. Hard disk ?
study of consumer buying patterns in order to support processing
marketing, inventory replenishment, and pricing decisions.
A. transaction processing B. data mining C. simulation D. 41. The main difference between application and system
information processing software is that: A. application software is composed of
24. The engineering discipline that involves construction program instructions but system software is not. B.
of molecularly-sized computing devices is called: A. application software is stored in memory whereas system
nanotechnology. B. molecular processing. C. silicon software is only in the CPU. C. system software is
grafting. D. nanoscience. unnecessary whereas application software must be present
25. The prefix that stands for ╜billionth╕ is: A. giga. on the computer. D. system software manages hardware
B. tera. C. nano. D. peta. whereas application software performs user tasks.
26. A small biomedical device currently on the market that 42. A document created in a word processing program or a
can be implanted underneath the skin for identification budget created in a spreadsheet are both examples of
purposes is called the: A. Identitron. B. Verichip. C. documents created in: A. application software. B. system
Digicard. D. Nanoguard. software. C. an operating system. D. a Windows platform.
27. The four main functions of a computer are: A. input,
processing, output, and storage. B. learning, thinking, 43. Which of the following is an example of system
intelligence, and virtuosity. C. data, information, bits, and software? A. Word processor B. Operating system C.
bytes. D. hardware, software, modeling, and operations. Management information system D. Spreadsheet
28. The primary purpose of a computer is to process
_____________ and convert it into information. A. 44. The term that refers to computers that provide
electricity B. data C. raw material D. a bit resources to other computers in a network is: A. server. B.
29. Bit refers to a: A. computer language. B. CPU mainframe. C. platform. D. resource provider
instruction. C. 0 or 1 value. D. digital representation of an .
alphabetic character. 45. If a large business is going to use a single computer to
30. There are ____________ bits in a byte. A. two B. four execute many programs for hundreds of users at the same
C. six D. eight time, performing relatively simple operations and
31. In computer language, each letter, number, and an transactions, the type of computer will probably be a A.
array of special characters consists of: A. 8 kilobytes. B. 8 Supercomputer B. PC C. Mainframe D. ISP
bytes. C. a bit. D. 8 bits.
32. Which of the following is the correct sequence of MODEL PAPER 1. One megabyte equals approximately
smallest to largest unit of storage size? 1) 1,000 bits 2) 1,000 bytes 3) 1 million bytes 4) 1 million
A. megabyte ? terabyte ? gigabyte ? kilobyte ? petabyte bits 5) 2,000 bytes
B. kilobyte ? megabyte ? gigabyte ? terabyte ? petabyte 2. Data going into the computer is called? 1) Output 2)
C. kilobyte ? megabyte ? gigabyte ? petabyte ? terabyte Algorithm 3) Input 4) Calculations 5) Flowchart
D. kilobyte ? megabyte ? petabyte ? terabyte ? gigabyte 3. Which of the following refers to the memory in your
33. The prefix kilo refers to approximately: A. one computer? 1) RAM 2) DSL 3) USB 4) LAN 5) CPU
thousand. B. one million. C. one hundred. D. one billion. 4. When you are working on a document on PC, where is
34. Computers work in: A. machine linguistics. B. binary the document temporarily stored? 1) RAM 2) ROM 3) The
language. C. HTML code. D. bit language. CPU 4) Flash memory 5) The CD-Rom
35. The metal or plastic case that houses the physical 5. Information travels between components on the mother
components of a computer together is called the: A. central board through- 1) Flash memory 2) CMOS 3)Bays 4)
processing unit . B. storage device. C. motherboard. D. Buses 5) Peripherals
system unit. 6. How are data organised in a spreadsheet? 1) Lines and
36. The brains of the computer which executes the spaces 2) Layers and planes 3) Height and width 4) Rows
instructions, is called the: A. CPU. B. RAM. C. and columns 5) None of these
motherboard. D. system unit. 7. Which of the following is true? 1) Byte is a single digit
37. Instructions and data that are about to be processed by in a binary number 2) Bit represents a grouping of digital
the CPU are located in: A. a CD-ROM. B. RAM. C. the numbers 3) Eight-digit binary number is called a byte 4)
hard disk. D. the motherboard. Eight-digit binary number is called a bit 5) None of these
38. The circuitry that includes the CPU and memory chips
is located on the: A. system unit. B. operating system. C. 8. Transformation of input into output is performed by? 1)
motherboard. D. computer platform. Peripherals 2) Memory 3) Storage 4) The Input-Output
39. All of the following are considered to be storage unit 5) The CPU
devices EXCEPTa: A. floppy disk. B. CPU. C. CD. D. 9. How many options does a binary choice offer? 1) None
hard disk drive. 2) One 3) Two 4) It depends on the amount of memory in
40. What is the correct association between a hardware the computer 5) It depends on the speed of the computer's
component and a computer function? A. Monitor ? input processor

Karan Dhami-84
10. .....is collection of web pages and ......is the very first 29. Virtual memory is 1) Memory on the hard disk that the
page that we see on opening of a web-site 1) Home-page, CPU uses as an extended RAM 2) RAM 3) Only necessary
Web-page 2) Web-site, Home-page 3) Web-page, Home- if you do not have any RAM in your computer 4) A back
page 4) Web-page, Web-site 5) None of these up device for floppy disks 5) None of these
11. When the pointer is positioned on a _____ it is shaped 30. A _____ contains specific rules and words that express
like a hand. 1) Grammar error 2) Hyperlink 3) Screen tip the logical steps of an algorithm. 1) Syntax 2)
4) Spelling error 5) Formatting error Programming structure 3) Programming language 4) Logic
12. The _____ of a system includes the programs or chart 5) None of these
instructions. 1) Hardware 2) Icon 3) Information 4) 31. When sending an e-mail, the _____ line describes the
Software 5) None of these contents of the message. 1) to 2) subject 3) contents 4) CC
13. 'www' stands for _____ 1) World Word Web 2) World 5) None of these
Wide Web 3) World White Web 4) World Work Web 5) 32. The _____ tells the computer how to use its
None of these components. 1) Utility 2) Network 3) Operating system 4)
14. What menu is selected to cut, copy, and paste? 1) File Application program 5) None of these
2) Tools 3) Special 4) Edit 5) None 33. Which grouping do you work with when formatting
15. You can use the tab key to 1) Move a cursor across the text in word? 1) Tables, paragraphs and indexes 2)
screen 2) Indent a paragraph 3) Move the cursor down the Paragraphs, indexes and sections 3) Characters, sections
screen 4) Only (1) and (2) 5) None of these and paragraphs 4) Indexes, characters and tables 5) None
16. The most important or powerful computer in a typical of these
network is _____ 1) Desktop 2) Network client 3) 34. What is backup? 1) Adding more components to your
Network server 4) Network station 5) None of these network 2) Protecting data by copying it from the original
17. Which of the following is an example of connectivity? source to a different destination 3) Filtering old data from
1) Internet 2) Floppy disk 3) Power cord 4) Data 5) None the new data 4) Accessing data on tape 5) None of these
of these 35. Network components are connected to the same cable
18. The ability to find an individual item in a file in the _____ topology. 1) Star 2) Ring 3) Bus 4) Mesh 5)
immediately _____ is used. 1) File allocation table 2) Mixed
Directory 3) Sequential access 4) Direct access 5) None of 36. This component is required to process data into
these information and consists of integrated circuits. 1) Hard
19. The primary purpose of software is to turn data into disk 2) RAM 3) CPU 4) ROM 5) None of these
_____ 1) Web sites 2) Information 3) Programs 4) Objects 37. One advantage of dial-up-internet access is ___ 1) It
5) None of these utilises broadband technology 2) It utilizes existing
20. To what temporary area can you store text and other telephone service 3) It uses a router for security 4) Modem
data, and later paste them to another location? 1) The speeds are very fast 5) None of these
clipboard 2) ROM 3) CD-ROM 4) The hard disk 5) None 38. What is the term for unsolicited e-mail? 1) News group
of these 2) Use net 3) Backbone 4) Flaming 5) Spam
21. Storage that retains its data after the power is tuned off 39. Two or more computers connected to each other of
is referred to as 1) volatile storage 2) non-volatile storage sharing information form a _____ 1) Network 2) Router 3)
3) sequential storage 4) direct storage 5) None of these Server 4) Tunnel 5) Pipeline
22. _____is the science that attempts to produce machines 40. Computers that are portable and convenient for users
that display the same type of intelligence that humans do. who travel are known as _____ 1) Super computers 2) Lap
1) Nano science 2) Nanotechnology 3) Simulation 4) tops 3) Mini computers 4) File servers 5) None of these
Artificial intelligence (AI) 5) None of these 41. A computer checks the _____ of user names and
23. Changing an existing document is called _____ the passwords for a match before granting access. 1) Website
document. 1) Creating 2) Editing 3) Modifying 4) 2) Network 3) Backup file 4) Data base 5) None of these
Adjusting 5) None of these 42. Office LANs that are spread geographically apart on a
24. Computers use the _____ number system to store data large scale can be connected using a corporate _____ 1)
and perform calculations. 1) Decimal 2) Hexadecimal 3) CAN 2) LAN 3) DAN 4) WAN 5) TAN
Octal 4) Binary 5) None of these 43. The code for a Web page is written using _____ 1) A
25. Which of the following is the largest unit of storage? 1) fifth generation language 2) Win Zip 3) Peripherals 4)
GB 2) KB 3) MB 4) TB 5) None of these Hypertext Markup Language 5) URL
26. The _____ key will launch the start buttons. 1) Esc 2) 44. What is the process of copying software programs
Shift 3) Windows 4) Shortcut 5) None of these from secondary storage media to the hard disk called? 1)
27. _____is the process of finding errors in software code. Configuration 2) Download 3) Storage 4) Upload 5)
1) Compiling 2) Testing 3) Running 4) Debugging 5) Installation
None of these 45. Small application programs that run on a web page and
28. To move to the beginning of a line of text, press the may ensure a form is completed properly or provide
_____ key. 1) Home 2) A 3) Page-up 4) Enter 5) None of animation are known as _____ 1) Flash 2) Spiders 3)
these Cookies 4) Applets 5) Sparks

Karan Dhami-85
46. The first computers were programmed using _____ 1) record, field, database 2) character, record, field, database,
Assembly language 2) Machine language 3) Source code file 3) character, field, record, file, database 4) Bit, byte,
4) Object code 5) Spaghetti code character, record, field, file, database 5) None of these
47. Which process checks to ensure the components of the 11.The internet is .......... 1) a large network of networkds
computer and operating are connected properly? 1) 2) an internal communication system for a business 3) a
Booting 2) Processing 3) Saving 4) Editing 5) None of communications system for the Indian government 4) All
these of these 5) None of these
48. In a relational database, this is a data structure that 12.Which of the following statements is FALSE
organizes the information about a single topic into rows concenring file names ? 1) Files may share the same name
and columns. 1) Block 2) Record 3) Tuple 4) Table 5) or the same extension but not both 2) Every file in the
Command line interface same foldr must have a unique, name 3) File extension is
49. How can the user determine what programs are another name for file type 4) The file extension comes
available on a computer? 1) Checking the hard disk before the dot (.) followed by the file name 5) None of
properties 2) Viewing the installed programs during the these
booting process 3) Checking the operating system for a list 13.Which of the following would most likely NOT be a
of installed programs. 4) Checking the existing files saved symptom of a virus ? 1) Existing program files and icons
on the disk 5) None of these disappear 2) The CD-ROM stops functioning 3) THe Web
50. When we run a program in HTML coding _____ is browser opens to an unusual home page 4) Odd messages
used as backend and ____ works as front-end. 1) Notepad or images are displayed on the screen 5) None of these
- Internet-Explorer 2) Notepad - Msn-messenger 3) MS- 14.What is a back up ? 1) Restoring the information
Word - Internet Explorer 4) Both (1) and (2) 5) None of backup 2) An exact copy of a system's information 3) The
these ability to get a system u and runnign in the event of a
1)3 2)3 3)1 4)1 5)4 6)3 7)3 8)5 9)3 10)2 11)2 12)4 13)2 system crash or failure 4) All of these 5) None of these
14)4 15)2 16)3 17)1 18)1 19)2 20)1 21)2 22)4 23)2 24)4 15. ............ are lists of commands that appear on the screen
25)4 26)3 27)4 28)1 29)2 30)3 31)2 32)3 33)1 34)2 35)2 1) GUIs 2) Icons 3) Menus 4) Windows 5) None of these
36)3 37)2 38)5 39)1 40)2 41)4 42)4 43)4 44)5 45)4 46)2 16.What is the correct association between a hardware
47)1 48)4 49)4 50)1 component and a computer function? 1) Monitor > input 2)
Mouse > input 3) CPU > storage 4) Hard disk > processing
1.What is the ultimate purpose of Defragmentation ? 1) 5) None of these
Make the PC faster 2) Create More Free Space 3) Delete 17.What is the function of Drop Cap ? 1) It does not allow
temporary files 4) Reduce Power consumption 5) All of capital letters to be used in the documents 2) It makes first
the above letter of each word capital letter in the documents 3) It lets
2.Computers process data into information by working you begin a paragraph witha large dropped initial capital
exclusively with : 1) multimedia 2) words 3) characters 4) letter 4) In automatically starts all paragraphs and
numbers 5) None of these sentences with capital letters 5) None of these
3.You must install a (n) ......... on a network if you want to 18.The errors that can be pointed out by the compiler are :
share a broadband Internet connection 1) router 2) modem 1) Syntax error 2) Symantic error 3) Logical error 4)
3) node 4) cable 5) None of these Internal error 5) None of these
4.The purpose of the primary key in a database is to : 1) 19. The move to the bottom of a document, press ........ 1)
unlock the database 2) provide a map of the data 3) Auto summarize 2) Home key 3) Ctrl + Home key 4) End
uniquely identify a record 4) establish constraints on key 5) Ctrl + End key
database operations 5) None of these 20.By default, your documents print in ..... mode 1)
5.The design of the network is called the network 1) Landscape 2) Portrait 3) Page setup 4) Print preview 5)
architecture 2) server 3) transmission 4) type 5) None of None of these
these 21.Select the odd one out : 1) Interpreter 2) Operating
6.The most frequently used instructions of a computer system 3) Compiler 4) Assembler 5) Programmer
program are likely to be fetched from: 1) the hard disk 2) 22.For viewing video CDs, you would use ...... 1) CD
cache memory 3) RAM 4) registers 5) None of these Player 2) Windows Media Player 3) WIndows Video
7.Personal logs or journal entries posted on the Web are Player 4) WIndows Movie Player 5) None of these
known as : 1) listservs 2) Webcasts 3) blogs 4) subject 23. What's the name for the program or service that lets
directories 5) None of these you view e-mail messages ? 1) Web browser 2) E-mail
8.Which of the following is NOT a type of broad band clients 3) E-mail ID 4) Internet 5) None of these
internet connection ? 1) Cable 2) DSL 3) Dial-up 4) 24. What does the SMTP in an SMTP server stand for ? 1)
Satellite 5) None of these Simple Mail Transfer Protocol 2) Serve Message Text
9.Linux is a(n) ........ operating system 1) open-source 2) Process 3) Short Messaging Text Process 4) Short
Microsoft 3) Windows 4) Mac 5) None of these Messaging Transfer Protocol 5) None of these
10.Which of the following places the common data 25.What's considered the'backbone’of the World Wide
elements in order from smallest to largest 1) character, file, Web? 1) Uniform resource locator (URL) 2) Hypertext

Karan Dhami-86
mark-up language (HTML) 3) Hypertext transfer protocol 43. ........... is a method in which multiple communicatioin
(HTTP) 4) File transfer protocol (FTP) 5) None of these devices are connected to one another efficiently 1)
26. We access the World Wide Web using : 1) Browsers 2) Switching 2) Redundancy 3) Capacity 4) Detecting 5)
Instant messaging applications 3) High bandwidth 4) None of these
Search engine 5) None of these 44. One computer that is nto considered a portable
27.The Internet began with the development of 1) computer is ....... 1) Mini computer 2) A Laptop 3) Micro
USENET 2) ARPANET 3) Ethernet 4) Intranet 5) None of computer 4) All of the above 5) None of these
these 45.The sharing of a medium and its path by 2 or more
28.A wireless network uses .......... waves to transmit devices is called .......... 1) Modulation 2) Encoding 3) Line
signals 1) mechanical 2) radio 3) sound 4) magnetic 5) discipline 4) Multiplexing 5) None of these
None of these 46.Device drivers are : 1) time power cords for external
29.What device includes an adapter that decodes data sent storage devices 2) experts who know to maximise the
in radio signals ? 1) modem 2) digital translator 3) router performance of device 3) small, special purpose programs
4) switch 5) None of these 4) the innermost part of the operating system 5) None of
30.Network components are connected to the same cable these
in the .......... topology 1) star 2) ring 3) bus 4) mesh 5) 47. Array is ............ 1) linear data structure 2) non-linear
None of these data structure 3) complex data structure 4) simple data
31.Small application programs that run on a Web page and structure 5) None of these
may ensure a form is completed properly or provide 48.A stored link to a webpage, in order to have a quick and
animation are known as ...... 1) flash 2) spiders 3) cookies easy access to it later, it called : 1) Bookmark 2) WP-link
4) applets 5) None of these 3) Favourite 4) Both 1 and 3 5) None of these
32.Which of the following is Not a characteristic of a 49.Which input device cannot be used to work in MS
compluter ? 1) Intelligence 2) Speed 3) Versatility 4) Office ? 1) Sanner 2) Mouse 3) Keyboard 4) Joy stick 5)
Automation 5) None of these Lightpen
33.The WWW standard allows programs on many 50................ is an animated character that gives help in
different computer platforms to show the information on a MS Office ? 1) Office worker 2) Comic assistant 3) Office
server. Such programs are called : 1) ISP 2) Web Browsers assistant 4) All of the above 5) None of these
3) Web Servers 4) Web Modular 5) None of these 1)2 2)4 3)1 4)2 5)1 6)2 7)3 8)3 9)1 10)3 11)1 12)4 13)2
34. Outlook Express is a 1) E-mail client 2) Scheduler 3) 14)4 15)3 16)2 17)3 18)1 19)5 20)2 21)2 22)2 23)2 24)1
Address book 4) All of the above 5) None of these 25)3 26)1 27)2 28)2 29)3 30)1 31)1 32)1 33)2 34)4 35)3
35.Which of the following is not a network ? 1) Local 36)2 37)4 38)1 39)2 40)141)2 42)4 43)1 44)1 45)4 46)3
Area Network 2) Wide Area Network 3) Optical Fibre 4) 47)1 48)4 49)4 50)3
All are networks 5) None of these 36.Which of the
following is Not a characteristic of E-mail ? 1) Low cost 2) 1. Programs from the same developer, sold bundled
Record maintenance in database 3) High speed 4) Waste together, that provide better integration and share common
reduction 5) None of these 37. ........... is the science that features, toolbars and menus are known as? 1) software
attempts to produce machines that display the same type of suites 2) integrated software 3) software processing 4)
intelligence that humans do 1) nanoscience 2) personal information 5) none of these
Nanotechnology 3) Simulation 4) Artificial intelligence 5) 2. A data warehouse is which of the following? 1) Can be
None of these updated by the users 2) Contains numerous conventions
38.Who designed the first electronic computer - ENIAC ? and formats 3) Organized around subject areas 4) Contains
1) Van Neuman 2) Joseph M Jacquard 3) J presper Eckert only current data 5) None of these
and John W mauchly 4) Both 1 and 2 5) None of these 3. _____ servers store and manages files for network users.
39............. is a collection of web - pages and .......... is the 1) Authentication 2) Main 3) Web 4) File 5) None of these
very first page that we see on opening of a website 1) 4. All of the following are examples of real security and
Home page, Web page 2) Website, Home page 3) Web privacy risks except? 1) hackers 2) spam 3) viruses 4)
page, Home page 4) Web page, Website 5) None of these identify theft 5) None of these
40.When we run progra in HTML coding, ......... is used as 5. Loading Operating System onto RAM is called? 1)
back-end and ........... works as front-end 1) Notepad, Printing 2) Saving 3) Booting 4) Staring 5) None of these
Internet Explorer 2) Notepad, MSN messenger 3) MS 6. In MICR, C stands for? 1) Code 2) Colour 3) Computer
Word, Internet Explorer 4) Both 1 and 3 5) None of these 4) Character 5) None of these
41.The server on the internet is also known as : 1) 7. System software is the set of programs that enables your
Repeater 2) Host 3) Gateway 4) AND Gate 5) None of computer's hardware devices and ____ software to work
these together? 1) management 2) processing 3) utility 4)
42.Website is a collection of : 1) HTML documents 2) application 5) None of these
Graphic files 3) Audio and Video files 4) All of the above 8. ___ are specially designed computer chips reside inside
5) None of these other devices, such as your car or your electronic

Karan Dhami-87
thermostat? 1) Servers 2) Embedded computers 3) Robotic 23.What is the shortcut key to "Undo" the last action in a
computers 4) Mainframes 5) None of these document? 1)
9. The following are all computing devices, except? 1) Ctrl + X 2) Ctrl + Y 3) Ctrl + Z 4) Ctrl + U 5) None of
notebook computers 2) cellular telephones 3) digital these 24.You must install a(n) ________ on a network if
scanners 4) personal digital assistants 5) None of these you want to share a broadband Internet connection. 1)
10. In a ring topology, the computer in possession of the router 2) modem 3) node 4) cable 5) None of these
_____ can transmit data? 1) packet 2) data 3) access
method 4) token 5) None of these 25.The errors that can be pointed out by the compiler are?
11. This part of operating system manages the essential 1) Syntax errors 2) Semantic errors 3) Logic errors 4)
peripherals, such as the keyboard, screen, disk drives and System errors 5) None of these
parallel and serial ports ______ 1) basic input/output 2) 26.Granting an outside organization access to internet web
secondary system 3) peripheral system 4) marginal system pages is often implemented using a(n)? 1) extranet 2)
5) None of these intranet 3) internet 4) hacker 5) None of these
12. The bar at the top of a window that bears the name of
the window is known as? 1) control panel 2) task bar 3) 27.Which term identifies a specific computer on the web
menu bar 4) status bar 5) title bar and the main page of the entire site? 1) URL 2) Web site
13. ______ controls the way in which the computer system address 3) Hyperlink 4) Domain name 5) None of these
functions and provides a means by which users can
interact with the computer. 1) The platform 2) Application 28.The code that relational database management systems
software 3) Operating system 4) The motherboard 5) None use to perform their database task is referred to as? 1) QBE
of these 2) SQL 3) OLAP 4) Sequel Server 5) None of these
14. Servers are computers that provide resources to other 29.Chip is a common nickname for a(n)? 1) transistor 2)
computers connected to a? 1) mainframe 2) network 3) resistor 3) integrated circuit 4) semiconductor 5) None of
super computer 4) client 5) None of these these
15. A device that operates under the control of another 30.Programs such as Internet Explorer that serve as
device is called? 1) Stem 2) Slave 3) Simulator 4) navigable windows into the Web are called 1) Hypertext 2)
Emulator 5) None of these Networks 3) Internet 4) Web browsers 5) None of these
16. URL stands for? 1) Universal Research List 2) 31.What menu is selected to cut, copy and paste? 1) File 2)
Universal Resource List 3) Uniform Resource Locator 4) Tools 3) Special 4) Edit 5) None of these
Uniform Research Locator 5) None of these 32.The most important or powerful computer in a typical
network is? 1) desktop 2) network client 3) network server
17. A database management system (DBMS) is a? 1) 4) network station 5) None of these
hardware system used to create, maintain and provide 33.The primary purpose of software is to turn data into? 1)
controlled access to a data- base 2) hardware system used Web sites 2) information 3) programs 4) objects 5) None
to create, maintain, and provide uncontrolled access to a of these
database. 3) software system used to create, maintain, and 34.The ability to find an individual item in a file
provide uncontrolled access to a database. 4)software immediately _______ is used? 1) file allocation table 2)
system used to create, maintain and provide controlled directory 3) sequential access 4) direct access 5) None of
access to a database. 5)None of these these
35.To make a notebook act as a desktop model, the
18. The design of the network is called the network? 1) notebook can be connected to a ______ which is
architecture 2) server 3) transmission 4) type 5) None of connected to a monitor and other devices? 1) bay 2)
these docking station 3) port 4) network 5) None of these
19.A Proxy server is used for which of the following? 36.You can use the tab key to? 1) move cursor across the
1)To provide security against unauthorized users 2)To screen 2) indent a paragraph 3) move the cursor down the
process client requests for web pages 3)To provide TCP/IP screen 4) Only (1) and (2) 5) None of these
4)To process client requests for database access 5) None of 37.A collection of related files is called a? 1) character 2)
these field 3) database 4) adjusting 5) None of these
20.When data changes in multiple lists and all lists are not 38.Storage that retains its data after the power is turned off
updated, this causes? 1) data redundancy 2) information is referred to as? 1) volatile storage 2) non-volatile storage
overload 3) duplicate data 4) data inconsistency 5) None of 3) sequential storage 4) direct storage 5) None of these
these 39.Which of the following is an example of connectivity?
21._____ are words that a programming language has set 1) Internet 2) floppy disk 3) power card 4) data 5) None of
aside for its own use? 1) Control words 2) Reserved words these
3) Control structures 4) Reserved keys 5) None of these 40._______ is the process of finding errors in software
22.The most frequently used instru-ctions of a computer code? 1) Compiling 2) Testing 3) Running 4) Debugging
program are likely to be fetched from? 1) the hard disk 2) 5) None of these
cache memory 3) RAM 4) registers 5) None of these

Karan Dhami-88
41.A _______ contains specific rules and words that 6.To save a document in different location use : 1) Save 2)
express the logical steps of an algorithm? 1) syntax 2) Save as 3) Save as web page 4) All of above 5) None of
programming structure 3) programming language 4) logic these
chart 5) None of these 7.Which of the following is not an manufacturer of Hard
42.Changing an existing document is called ______ the Disk drives ? 1) Samsung 2) Interl 3) Seagate 4) Western
document? 1) creating 2) editing 3) modifying 4) adjusting Digital 5) None of these
5) None of these 8.The two basic types of record - access methods are 1)
43.Virtual memory is? 1) memory on the hard disk that the Sequential and random 2) Sequential and indexed 3) Direct
CPU uses an extended RAM 2) in RAM 3) only necessary and immediate 4) On-line and real time 5) None of these
if you do not have any RAM in your computer 9. A disadvantage of the laser printer is : 1) It is quieter
than an impact printer 2) It is very slow 3) The output is of
4) a back up device for floppy disks 5) None of these a lower quality 4) All of the above 5) None of these
44.Computers use the ________ number system to store 10.Different components on the motherboard of a PC
data and perform calculations? 1) decimal 2) hexadecimal processor unit are linked together by sets or parallel
3) octal 4) binary 5) None of these electrical conducting lines. What are these lines called ? 1)
45.The ______ key will launch the start buttons? 1) esc 2) Conductors 2) Buses 3) Connectors 4) Connectively 5)
shift 3) windows 4) shortcut 5) None of these None of these
46.To move to the beginning of a line of text, press the 11.Which of the following professions has been affected
_____ key? 1) home 2) a 3) page up 4) enter 5) None of by personal computers ? 1) Medical 2) Clerical and law 3)
these Accounting 4) All of the above 5) None of these
47.When sending an e-mail, the ______ line describes the
contents of the message? 1) to 2) subject 3) contents 4) CC 12. What is meant by a dedicated computer ? 1) Which is
5) None of these used by one person only 2) Which is assigned one and
48.Which groupings do you work with when formatting only one task 3) Which uses one kind of software 4)
text in Word? 1) Tables, paragraphs and indexes 2) Which is meant for application software 5) None of these
Paragraphs, indexes and sections 3) Characters, sections
and paragraphs 4) Indexes, characters and tables 5) None 13. A computer program that translates one program
of these instructions at a time into machine language is called a / an
49.Which of the following is the largest unit of storage? 1) 1) Interpreter 2) CPU 3) Compiler 4) Simulator 5) None of
GB 2) KB 3) MB 4) TB 5) None of these these
50.The ______ tells the computer how to use its 14.Instructions and memory address are represented by 1)
components? 1) utility 2) network 3) operating system 4) Character code 2) Binary codes 3) Binary word 4) Partiy
application program 5) None of these: bit 5) None of these
1. (1) 2. (3) 3. (4) 4. (2) 5. (3) 6. (4) 7. (4) 8. (2) 9. (3) 15.As compared to diskettes, the hard disks are 1) More
10. (4) 11. (1) 12. (5) 13. (3) 14. (2) 15. (2) 16. (3) 17. (4) expensive 2) More portable 3) Less rigid 4) Slowly
18. (1) 19. (2) 20. (4) 21. (2) 22. (2) 23. (3) 24. (1) 25. (1) accessed 5) None of these
26. (1) 27. (1) 28. (2) 29. (3) 30. (4) 31. (4) 32. (3) 33. (2) 16.The secondary storage devices can only store data but
34. (3) 35. (2) 36. (4) 37. (3) 38. (2) 39. (1) 40. (2) 41. (1) they cannot perform 1) Arithmetic Operation 2) Logic
42. (2) 43. (1) 44. (4) 45. (3) 46. (1) 47. (2) 48. (1) 49. (1) operation 3) Fetch operstions 4) Either of the above 5)
50. (3) None of these
17.A physical connection between the microsprocessor
PRACTICE QUESTIONS SET 5 memory and other parts of the microcomputer is known as
1.A normal CD-ROM usually can store up to .......... 1) 680 1) Path 2) Address bus 3) Router 4) All of the above 5)
KB 2) 680 Bytes 3) 680 MB 4) 680 GB 5) None of these None of these
2.Which programming languages are classified as low 18. A group of magnetic tapes, videos or terminals usually
level languages ? 1) Basic, COBOL, FORTRAN 2) Prolog under the control of one master is 1) Cyinder 2) Surface 3)
2, Expert Systems 3) Knowledge based Systerms 4) Track 4) Cluster 5) None of these
Assembly Languages 5) None of these 19.Each model of a computer has a unique 1) Assembly of
3.Which of the following devices have a limitation that we a computer 2) Machine language 3) High level language 4)
can only store information to it but cannot erase or modify All of the above 5) None of these
it ? 1) Floppy Disk 2) Hard Disk 3) Tape Drive 4) 20.Which company is the biggest player in the
CDROM 5) None of these microprocessor industry ? 1) Motorola 2) IBM 3) Intel 4)
4.Which of the following is the largst manufacturer of AMD 5) None of these
Hard Disk Drives ? 1) IBM 2) Seagate 3) Microsoft 4) 3M 21.Which computer memory is used for storing programs
5) None of these and data currently being processed by the CPU ? 1) Mass
5. The programs which are as permanent as hardware and memory 2) Internal memory 3) Non-volatile memory 4)
stored in ROM is known as 1) Hardware 2) Software 3) PROM 5) None of these
Firmware 4) ROM ware 5) None of these

Karan Dhami-89
22.Microprocessors can be used t make 1) Computer 2) 40.What kind of software would you most likely use to
Digital systems 3) Calculators 4) All of the above 5) None keep track of billing account ? 1) Word Processing 2)
of these Electronic Publishing 3) Spreadsheet 4) Web authoring 5)
23.The subject of cybernetics deals with the science of 1) None of these
Genetics 2) Control and communications 3) Molecular 41.Test the validity of the statements ? 1) 1 KB = 1024
biology 4) Biochemistry 5) None of these BYTES 2) 1 MB = 2048 BYTES 3) 1MB = 100
24.A term associated with the comparison of processing KILOBYTES 4) 1 KB = 1000 BYTES 5) None of these
speeds of different computer system is : 1) EFTS 2) MPG 42.Which of the following is not a computer language ?
3) MIPS 4) CFPS 5) None of these <br/> 1) BASIC 2) C++ 3) C# 4) Java 5) Microsoft
25.An integrated circuit is 1) A complicated circuit 2) An 43.Which among the following is a correct definition of
integrating device 3) Much costlier than a single transistor "Digital Divide"? 1) gap between people having access to
4) Fabricated on a tiny silicon chip 5) None of these mobile and internet access 2) gap between people having
26.Which command is used to set a name to a disk in DOS access to internet / IT and no internet/ IT 3) gap between
? 1) VOLUME 2) VOL 3) LABEL 4) DISKLABEL 5) people having access to broadband and narrowband
None of these internet 4) gap between people having access to internet
27.Which file starts MS Word ? 1) Winword.exe 2) banking and normal banking 5) gap between the people
Word.exe 3) Msword.exe 4) Word2003.exe 5) None of having an email account and no email account
these
28.To get to the 'Symbol' dialog box, click on the ......... 44.Now a days Vishing has become a criminal practice of
menu and choose 'Symbol'. 1) Insert 2) Format 3) Tools 4) using social engineering over which of the following ? 1)
Table 5) None of these Social networking sites 2) Mobile Phones 3) E-mail 4)
29.Superscript, subscript, outline, emboss, engrave are Cyber cafes 5) All of the above
known as 1) font styles 2) font effects 3) word art 4) text
effects 5) None of these 45.What is the fullform of W3C? 1) World Wide Web
30.Shimmer, Sparkle text, Blinkng Background etc. are Consortium 2) World Wide Web Company 3) World Wide
known as 1) font styles 2) font effects 3) word art 4) text Web Center 4) World Wide Web Command 5) None of
effects 5) None of these these
31.Which of the following is not availabel in Font Spacing
? 1) Normal 2) Loosely 3) Condensed 4) Expanded 5) 46.Which among the following is used for removing a
None of these software bug / defect which is available for free of cost
32.Bold, Itali, Regular are known as 1) font styles 2) font from the software provider ? 1) Version 2) Update 3) Help
effects 3) word art 4) text effects 5) None of these 4) Patch 5) Syntax

33.If you begin typing an entry into acell and then realize 47.In the MICR Code Line Structure what do represent
that you don't want your entry placed into a cell, you : 1) the first three digits of Sort field number consisting of nine
Press the Erase key 2) Press esc 3) Press the Enter button digits? 1) City 2) Bank 3) Branch 4) Account Type 5)
4) Press the Edit Formula button 5) None of these None of the above

34.Which of the following will not cut information? 1) 48.Most of the internet banking sites provide which of the
Pressing Ctrl + C 2) Selecting Edit > Cut. from the menu following feature to reduce the risk of keystroke logging
3) Clicking the cut button ont he standard 4) Pressing Ctrl for the password entry ? 1) Virtual keyboard 2) Finger
+ X 5) None of these Touching 3) Touchscreen 4) Shape Writer 5) Dasher
35.Computer connected to a LAN (Local Area Network)
can 1) run faster 2) go on line 3) share information and / or 49.ADSL data communications technology uses which of
share peripheral equipment 4) E-mail 5) None of these the following for faster data transmission ? 1) Voiceband
36.A self replicating program, similar to a virus which was modem 2) Wireless Modem 3) Copper telephone Lines 4)
taken from a 1970s science fiction novel by John Bruner Sockets 5) None of the above
entitled the Shockwave Rider is ........ 1) Bug 2) Vice 3)
Lice 4) Worm 5) None of these 50.What is the purpose of keeping electronic devices such
as computers, televisions, and remote controlled devices
37.Unwanted repetitious messages, such as unsolicited on Sleep mode ? 1) Reduce Power consumption 2) Back
bulk - e-mail is known as 1) Spam 2) Trash 3) Calibri 4) UP 3) To write contents of RAM to hard disc 4) To
Courier 5) None of these improve download speed 5) None of thea above
38.COBOL is widely used in ........... applications 1)
Commericial 2) Scientific 3) Space 4) mathematical 5) 1) 3 2) 4 3) 4 4) 2 5) 3 6) 2 7) 2 8) 1 9) 5 10) 2 11) 4 12) 2
None of these 13) 1 14) 2 15) 1 16) 4 17) 2 18) 4 19) 2 20) 3 21) 2 22) 4
39.VDU is also called 1) Screen 2) Monitor 3) Both 1 & 2 23) 2 24) 4 25) 4 26) 3 27) 1 28) 1 29) 2 30) 4 31) 2 32) 1
4) printer 5) None of these

Karan Dhami-90
33) 2 34) 1 35) 3 36) 4 37) 1 38) 1 39) 3 40) 3 41) 1 42) 5 17.What is output ? 1) What the processor takes from the
43) 2 44) 2 45) 1 46) 4 47) 1 48) 1 49) 3 50) 1 user 2) What the user gives to the processor 3) What the
1.Which command devides the surface of the blank disk processor gets from the user 4) What the processor gives to
into sectors and assign a unique address to each one 1) Ver the user 5) None of these
2) Format 3) Fat 4) Chkdsk 5) None of these 18.When you turn on the computer, the boot routine will
2.If you need to duplicate the entire disk, which command perform this test ........ 1) RAM test 2) Disk drive test 3)
will you use ? 1) Copy 2) Diskcopy 3) Chkdsk 4) Format Memory test 4) Power - on self-test 5) None of these
5) None of these 19.Which of the following storage media provides
3.A .............. sometimes called a boot sector virus, sequential access only ? 1) Floppy disk 2) Magnetic disk
executes when a computer boots up because it resides in 3) Magnetic tape 4) Optical disk 5) None of these
the boot sector of a floppy disk or the master boot record
of a hard disk 1) system virus 2) Trojan horse virus 3) file 20.In word processing, an efficient way to move the 3rd
virus 4) macro virus 5) None of these paragraph to place it after the 5th paragraph is ........ 1)
4.A result of a computer virus can not lead to ...... 1) Disk copy and paste 2) copy, cut and paste 3) cut, copy and
Crash 2) Mother Board Crash 3) Corruption o f program 4) paste 4) cut and paste 5) None of these
Deletion of files 5) None of these
5.Every computer connected to an intranet or extranet 21. Hardware includes .......... 1) all devices used to input
must have a distinct ....... 1) firewall 2) proxy server 3) IP data into a computer 2) sets of instructions that a computer
address 4) domain name 5) None of these runs or executes 3) the computer and all the devices
6.Programming language built into user programs such as connected to it that are used to input and output data 4) all
Word and Excel are known as ...... 1) 4GLs 2) Macro devices involved in processing information including the
languages 3) object-oriented languages 4) visual central processing unit, memory and storage 5) None of
programming languages 5) None of these these
7.Firewalls are used to protect against ....... 1) unauthorized 22.The quickest and easiest way in Word, to locate a
Attacks 2) virus Attacks 3) Data Driven Attacks 4) Fire particular word or phrase in a document is to use the .......
Attacks 5) None of these command 1) Replace 2) Find 3) Lookup 4) Search 5) None
8.Which of the following extensions suggest that the file is of these
a backup copy 1) Bak 2) Bas 3) Com 4) Txt 5) None of 23.The term 'user interface' refers to ............ 1) What the
these user sees on the screen and how they can interact with it 2)
9.Computer programs are written in a high - level How the operating system responds to user commands 3)
programming language; however, the human readable the means by which the user interacts with the peripheral
version of a program is called ....... 1) cache 2) instruction devices on the computer 4) the monitor that is available for
set 3) source code 4) word size 5) None of these the computer 5) None of these
10.The software tools that enable a user to interact with a 24.For creating a document, you use ........ command at
computer for specific purposes are known as ....... 1) File Menu. 1) Open 2) Close 3) New 4) Save 5) None of
Hardware 2) Networked Software 3) Shareware 4) these
Applications 5) None of these 25.The .............. becomes different shapes depending on
11............... proessing is used when a large mail-order the task you are performing 1) Active tab 2) Insertion point
company accumulates orders and processes them together 3) Mouse pointer 4) Ribbon 5) None of these
in one large set 1) Batch 2) Online 3) Real-time 4) Group 26.Specilizd programs that asist users in locating
5) None of these information on the Web are called .... 1) Information
12.When a file contains instructions that can be carried out engines 2) Search engines 3) Web browsers 4) Resource
by the computer, it is often called a(n) ...... file 1) data 2) locators 5) None of these
information 3) executable 4) application 5) None of these 27.The background of any Word document ...... 1) Is
13.A complier translates a program written in a high - always white colour 2) Is the colour you presect under the
level language into ........ 1) Machine language 2) An Options menu 3) Is always the same for the entire
algorithm 3) A debugged program 4) Java 5) None of these document 4) Can have any colour you choose 5) None of
14.A set of step - by - step procedures for accomplishing a these
task is known as a(n) ..... 1) algorithm 2) hardware 28.Correcting errors in a program is referred to as ......... 1)
program 3) software bug 4) firmware program 5) None of debugging 2) bugging 3) rectifying 4) modifying 5) None
these of these
15.A complete electronic circuit with transistors and other 29.Any letter, number, or symbol found on the keyboard
electronic components on a small silicon chip is called that you can type into the computer .......... 1) output 2)
a(n).... 1) Workstation 2) CPU 3) Magnetic disk 4) character 3) type 4) print 5) font
Integrated circuit 5) None of these 30.A symbol or question on the screen that prompts you to
16.A saved document is referred to as a ..... 1) file 2) word take action and tell the computer what to do next ........ 1)
3) folder 4) project 5) None of these scanner 2) questionnaire 3) prompt and dialog box 4)
information seeker 5) None of these

Karan Dhami-91
43.Which is the latest version of MS Office ? 1) Office XP
31.Commands at the top of a screen such as : FILE-EDIT- 2) Windows XP 3) Office 2007 4) Office 2010 5) None of
FONT-TOOLS to operate and change things within these 44.Which device can not be shared in network ? 1)
programs ..... 1) menu bar 2) tool bar 3) user friendly 4) Floppy 2) Keyword 3) Computer 4) Printer 5) None of
word processor 5) None of these these
32.The primary device that a computer uses to store 45.What is the purpose of query ? 1) Input data 2) Output
information ...... 1) monitor 2) memory 3) disk 4) hard data 3) Sort & filter 4) All of above 5) None of these
drive 5) None of these
33.A file extension is separated from the main file name 46.Which port doesn't exist in computer ? 1) USB 2)
with a(n) ......, but no spaces 1) questiion nark 2) Parallel 3) Com1 / Com2 4) RAW 5) None of these
exclamation mark 3) underscore 4) period 5) None of these
34.Application software is designed to accomplish ....... 1) 47.What is the name of exel files ? 1) Workbook 2)
real -w orld tasks 2) computer-centric tasks 3) gaming Worksheet 3) Spreadsheet 4) Spread book 5) None of
tasks 4) operating system tasks 5) None of these these
48.Workgroup means 1) Computers in network 2)
35.A ...... is a device that not only provdes surge Individual user 3) Individual computer 4) All of he above
protection, but also furnishes your computer with battery 5) None of these
backup power during a power outage 1) surge strip 2) USB 49.Synonym can be reviewed with 1) Spelling and
3) UPS 4) battery strip 5) None of these grammar 2) Thesaurus 3) Both 4) Synonym viewer 5)
None of these
36.The term ............. designates equipment that might be 50.Which command allows you to reduce fragments of file
added to a computer system to enhance, its functionality 1) and optimize the performance of disk ? 1) Scandisk 2)
digitial device 2) system add-on 3) disk pack 4) peripheral Diskcomp 3) Chkdsak 4) Defrag 5) None of these
device 5) None of these
37........... this is the act of copying or downloading a 1) 2 2) 2 3) 5 4) 2 5) 2 6) 4 7) 1 8) 1 9) 3 10) 4 11) 1 12) 3
program from a network and making multiple copies of it. 13) 1 14) 1 15) 4 16) 1 17) 4 18) 2 19) 2 20) 4 21) 4 22) 2
1) Network piracy 2) Plagiarism 3) Software piracy 4) 23) 1 24) 3 25) 3 26) 2 27) 4 28) 1 29)2 30) 3 31) 1 32) 4
Site-license piracy 5) None of these 33) 5 34) 4 35) 3 36) 4 37) 3 38) 1 39) 2 40) 4 41) 3 42) 1
38.When installing ............., the user must copy and 43) 4 44) 2 45) 4 46) 4 47) 1 48) 1 49) 2 50) 4
usually decompress program files from a CDROM or other
medium to the hard disk 1) programming software 2) PRACTICE QUESTIONS SET 7
system hardware 3) applications hardware 4) applications 1. A framwork in which circuit boards can be mounted is...
software 5) None of these (A) Switch circuit (B) Chip (C) Card cage (D) Bar code
39.Which one of the following would be considered as a (E) None of these Answer: (C)
way that a computer virus can enter a computer system ? 2. A convolutional code that is prone to catastrophic error
1) Opening an application previously installed on the propagation is... (A) Mnemonics (B) Gray code (C)
computer 2) Borrowed an illegal copy of software 3) machine code (D) Catastrophic code (E) None of these
Viewing a website without causing any additional Answer: (D)
transctions 4) Running antivirus programs 5) None of 3. Which one of the following input device is
these userprogrammable? (A) Dumb terminal (B) Smart terminal
40.Programs such as Mozila Firefox that serve as (C) VDT (D) Intelligent terminal (E) None of these
navigable windows into the Web are called .......... 1) Answer: (D)
Hypertext 2) Networks 3) Internet 4) Web browsers 5) 4. The barcode which is used on all types of items, is read
None of these by a scanning device directly into the computer. What is
41.What is the main difference between a mainframe and a the name of this scanning device? (A) Laser scanner (B)
super computer ? 1) Super computer is much larger than Wand (C) OCR (D) MICR (E) None of these Answer:
mainframe computers 2) Super computers are much (A)
smaller than mainframe computers 3) Supercomputers are 5. A Plastic card similar to a credit card but having some
focused to execute few programs as fast as possible while memory and a microprocessor embedded within it is (A)
mainframe uses its power to execute as many programs Punched paper tape (B) Chip card (C) Card punch (D)
concurrently 4) Supercomputers are focused to execute as Magnetic tape (E) None of these Answer: (B)
many programs as possible while mainframe uses its 6. The category of operating system that you most likely
power to execute few programs as fast as possible 5) None have running on your PDA computer is a ____________
of these operating system. (A) real-time (B) single-user, single-task
(C) single-user, multi-task (D) multi-user, multi-task (E)
42.What is the function of Recycle Bin ? 1) Store deleted None of these Answer: (B)
file 2) Store temporary file 3) Store corrupted file 4) Store
Document file 5) None of these

Karan Dhami-92
7. Which of the following is an example of a real-time programmer can modify Linux code, which is not
operating system? (A) Lynx (B) MS DOS (C) Windows permitted with Windows (D) there are multiple versions of
XP (D) Symbian (E) None of these Answer: (A) Linux, but only one version of Windows (E) None of these
Answer: (C)
8. A real-time operating system is most likely to be used 19. Which of the following is NOT an advantage of open
for which of the following tasks? (A) Controlling access to source operating systems over proprietary versions? (A)
a shared printer in a network (B) Ensuring that the system Free use and distribution (B) Availability of technical
clock works correctly on a server (C) Managing the access support (C) Availability of source code (D) Ability to
to system files in a laptop computer (D) Controlling the modify code (E) None of these Answer: (B)
fuel injection system of an automobile engine (E) None of 20. Use of icons and windows are characteristic of a
these Answer: (D) ________ interface (A) command-driven (B) windows-
oriented (C) graphical-user (D) menu-driven (E) None of
9. An essential difference between the operating system these Answer: (C)
that runs a typical desktop computer and the operating 22. The invention of the slide rule is attributed to ... (A)
system that runs a typical PDA is that (A) the desktop OS Babbage (B) Oughtred (C) Pascal (D) Napier (E) None of
has a graphical user interface whereas the PDA OS does these Answer: (B)
not (B) the desktop OS can run several programs 23. The main purpose of the offline device is... (A) To
simultaneously whereas the PDA OS cannot (C) the reduce the no.of operator errors in recording data (B) To
desktop OS manages hardware resources whereas the PDA save computer time (C) To save floor space in the
OS does not (D) the desktop computer has an OS whereas cimputer centre (D) All of the above (E) None of these
a PDA does not (E) None of these Answer: (B) Answer: (B)
24. The ability of an operating system to control the
10.To set a register or counter to the all-zero-state is... (A) activities of multiple programs at the same time is called
Rerun (B) Reset (C) Remote (D) Release (E) None of (A) multitasking (B) multi-processing (C) multi-operating
these Answer: (B) (D) multi-paging (E) None of these Answer: (A)
11.A set of information that defines the status of resources 25.A computer assisted method for the recording and
allocated to a process is... (A) Process control (B) ALU analysing of existing hypothetical systems is known as (A)
(C) Register Unit (D) Process description (E) None of Distributed processing (B) Data transmission (C) Data link
these Answer: (D) (D) Data flow (E) None of these Answer: (D)
12. A family of polynomial block codes designed to
correct burst errors is known as (A) Bar codes (A) Gray 1. In a network, the computer that stores the files and
codes (C) Fire codes (D) mnemonics codes (E) None of process the data is named as a) Server b) Terminal c)
these Answer: (C) Modem d) All of the above
13. The MS-DOS operating system is a (A) graphical user 2. Viruses are called that because a) They are viruses b)
interface, single-tasking operating system (B) graphical They can copy themselves and spread c) Both (a) and (b)
user interface, multi-tasking operating system (C) d) None of the above
command-driven interface, single-tasking operating 3. Which of the can't spread virus a) An e-mail with
system (D) command-driven interface, multi-tasking attachment b) A plain text mail c) Downloading files over
operating system (E) None of these Answer: (C) the web d) None of the above
14. Which of the following was an early desktop operating 4. There is a new anti-virus software update available,
system that included an integrated graphic user interface when it is downloaded to your computer a) Everyday b)
with point-and-click features? (A) MS-DOS (B) Mac OS Only in the night c) When you next switch on your
(C) Unix (D) Gnome (E) None of these Answer: (B) computer d) All of the above
15.CD-ROM can store upto ____ MB of data (A) 600 MB 5. Numbers are stored and transmitted inside a computer in
(B) 400 Floppy disk (C) 320 MB (D) Both (A) and (B) (E) a) Binary form b) ASCII code form c) Alphabets form d)
None of these Answer: (D) Numerical form
16. The most recent version of the Mac OS is based on the 6. CPU capacity can be measured in a) BPS b) MIPS c)
____________ operating system (A) Windows (B) Linux MHz d) MPI
(C) Unix (D) CMOS (E) None of these Answer: (C) 7. MPIS stands for a) Million Instructions Per Second b)
Million Instructions Per Season c) Monthly Instructions
17. The ____________ operating system was initially Per Second d) Million Inputs Per Second
created in the early 1970s at AT&T’s Bell Labs. (A) Linux 8. LAN speeds are measured in a) BPS b) KBPS c) MBPS
(B) DOS (C) Unix (D) GNU (E) None of these Answer: d) MIPS
(C) 9. Modem speeds are measured in a) BPS b) KBPS c)
18. The essential difference between an operating system MBPS d) MIPS
like Linux and one like Windows is that (A) Windows can 10. BPS stands for a) Bits Per Second b) Bits Per Season
run with an Intel processor, whereas Linux cannot (B) c) Bytes Per Second d) Bits Per System
Linux is proprietary, whereas Windows is not (C) any

Karan Dhami-93
11. In processing cheques which of the following I/O 33. Mr. Saketh needs to design invitation card. What type
techniques have banks traditionally followed? a) OCR b) of computer program is suitable? a) MS-Word b) Desktop
MICR c) Barcode d) VRT Publishing c) Simulation d) None of the above
12. What is object of UPS? a) Using for storage b) To 34. Which combination of keys needs to be pressed to
increase the speed of a computer c) Provides backup make a percent sign? a) Shift+2 b) Shift+3 c) Shift+4 d)
power d) All of the above Shift+5
13. QWERTY is used with reference to a) Monitor b) 35. What process should be used to recall a document
Printer c) Keyboard d) Mouse saved previously? a) Copy b) Save c) Retrieve d) Enter
14. "Zipping" a file means a) Encrypting the message b) 36. What term applies to a collection of related records in a
Compressing the message c) Transfer the message d) All database? a) Field b) File c) Both (a) and (b) 123 d) None
of the above of the above
15. Integrated Circuits (IC) chips used in computers are 37. How are data organized in a spreadsheet? a) Rows and
made with a) Gold b) Silver c) Silicon d) Coper Columns b) Boxes c) Tables d) None of the above
16. What is the Super Computer developed in India a) 38. Which of the following mode we use to deliver e-mail
CRAY b) PARAM c) Both (a) and (b) d) None of the a) Postal b) Courier c) Computer d) Fax
above 39. VIRUS stands for a) Vital Information Recourse Under
17. Which of the following is different from other a) Siege b) Vital Information Reason Under Siege c) Vital
Internet b) Windows c) Unix d) Linux Information Recourse Under System d) Virus Information
18. What is the full form of WWW? a) World Wide Web Recourse Under Siege
b) World With Web c) Work Wide Web d) World Wide 40. ------ Is known as unauthorized access into others
Wet system a) Hacking b) Encryption c) Decryption d) None of
19. Which of the following Command is required to reboot the above
the computer a) CTRL+ALT+DEL b) CTRL+ALT+TAB
c) CTRL+ALT+SHIFT d) CTRL+SHIFT+DEL ANSWERS: 1. a 2. b 3. b 4. c 5. b 6. b 7. a 8. c 9. a 10. a
20. Select the ODD one a) Operating system b) Interpreter 11. b 12. c 13. c 14. b 15. c 16. b 17. a 18. a 19. a 20. a 21.
c) Compiler d) Assembler b 22. c 23. c 24. a 25. c 26. a 27. b 28. b 29. a 30. b 31. a
21. PC stands for a) Practical Computer b) Personal 32. b 33. b 34. d 35. c 36. b 37.a 38. c 39. a 40. A
Computer c) Private Computer d) Personal Contact
22. The computer code for interchange of information
between terminals is a) BCDIC b) BCD c) ASCII d) None
of the above
23. The retrieval of information from the computer is
defined as a) Data processing b) Input c) Output d) All of
the above 24. Which one of the following is NOT a
computer language? a) MS-Excel b) BASIC c) COBOL d)
C++
25. "C" is a) A letter b) A word c) A language d) An
alphabet 26. Difference Engine invented by a) Charles
Babbage b) John McCarthy c) Pascal d) Newton
27. First generation computer systems used a) Transistors
b) Vacuum Tubes c) Both (a) and (b) d) None of the above
28. A byte is made up of a) Eight bytes b) Eight binary
digits c) Two binary digits d) Two decimal points
29. Doing research by using an on-line database instead of
a printed set of similar information offers which of the
following advantage a) More current information b) Easier
to understand c) Better charts d) None of the above
30. Software programs that allow you to legally copy files
and give them away at no cost are called which of the
following a) Time sharing b) Public domain c) Shareware
d) None of the above
31. The term that we use to describe physical components
of the system a) Hardware b) Input c) Software d) None of
the above
32. Which of the following is used to indicate the location
on the computer monitor a) Mouse b) Cursor c) Both (a)
and (b) d) None of the above

Karan Dhami-94

You might also like